WX145, WX165, WX185: Operator's Manual

WX145, WX165, WX185
Operator’s Manual
Printed in Italy
87590052 EN
*Tier III*
CASE
WX 145
WX 165
WX 185
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
87590052 EN * Tier III *
SUMMARY OF SECTIONS
1 - INTRODUCTION, SAFETY, PLATES AND DECALS
2 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
3 - OPERATING THE MACHINE
4 - SUPPLIES AND SERVICE CHART
5 - TROUBLESHOOTING
6 - STORAGE
7 - ACCESSORIES
8 - DATA AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9 - ALPHABETICAL INDEX
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
This warning symbol points out important The non compliance with the warning preceded by
S messages involving your safety. the above mentioned key-words (WARNING and
DANGER) can cause serious accidents or even the
death of the persons involved.
Carefully read the safety rules contained herein
and follow advised precautions to avoid potential
hazards and to safeguard your safety and personal Moreover in the present Manual have been given
integrity. some instructions with texts in italics, preceded by
the words NOTE and CAUTION:
In this manual you will find this symbol together NOTE: it emphasizes and underlines to the
with the following key-words: operator the correct technique or correct procedure
to follow.
S WARNING S
This symbol warns about the possibility of potential
damages to the machine that can involve the S CAUTION S
operator’s safety. It warns the operator of a possible hazard of
machine damage in case he does not follow a
determined procedure.
S DANGER S
With specific warnings about potential dangers for
the operator’s or other persons integrity directly or
indirectly involved.
INDEX
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION, SAFETY, PLATES AND DECALS ................................................................................. 1-1
FOREWORD.............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................................... 1-2
DESIGNATED USE ................................................................................................................................ 1-3
NOISE LEVELS ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4
LEVEL OF VIBRATIONS TRANSMITTED TO THE OPERATOR .......................................................... 1-5
BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE ................................................................................................. 1-6
OPERATING THE MACHINE ................................................................................................................. 1-8
TRAVEL ................................................................................................................................................ 1-10
TRAVELLING ON PUBLIC ROADS ..................................................................................................... 1-12
JOB SITE OPERATION........................................................................................................................ 1-16
PARKING THE MACHINE .................................................................................................................... 1-18
LOADING THE MACHINE ON A TRAILER .......................................................................................... 1-19
MACHINE TRANSPORT ...................................................................................................................... 1-20
UNLOADING THE MACHINE FROM A TRAILER................................................................................ 1-21
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................................ 1-22
PREVENTION OF FIRE OR EXPLOSIONS......................................................................................... 1-25
PREVENTION OF BURNS ................................................................................................................... 1-26
PRECAUTIONS FOR WASTE DISPOSAL........................................................................................... 1-27
MAIN COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................................. 1-28
PLACING BOOM ATTACHMENT......................................................................................................... 1-28
MONOBOOM ATTACHMENT .............................................................................................................. 1-29
COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION PLATES........................................................................................... 1-32
MACHINE ............................................................................................................................................. 1-32
ENGINE ................................................................................................................................................ 1-32
CAB ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-33
CE-MARK ............................................................................................................................................. 1-33
PUMP ................................................................................................................................................... 1-34
AXLES .................................................................................................................................................. 1-34
CONTROL VALVE................................................................................................................................ 1-34
DECALS................................................................................................................................................... 1-35
NOISE LEVEL DECAL ......................................................................................................................... 1-35
POSITION OF DECALS ....................................................................................................................... 1-36
HAND SIGNALS ...................................................................................................................................... 1-43
SECTION 2
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS .............................................................................................................. 2-1
SWITCHES AND PUSH-BUTTONS .......................................................................................................... 2-1
“BUZZER”: ACOUSTIC WARNING SIGNAL .......................................................................................... 2-7
CONTROLS AND PEDALS ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY .................................................................................................................. 2-11
OPERATING MODE ............................................................................................................................. 2-17
MAIN MENU ......................................................................................................................................... 2-18
CONDITIONS OF USE ......................................................................................................................... 2-19
INDEX
DISPLAY SETTING, MAIN MENU ....................................................................................................... 2-20
CONTRAST .......................................................................................................................................... 2-21
BRIGHTNESS ...................................................................................................................................... 2-22
TIME ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
UNITS ................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
SYMBOLS ............................................................................................................................................ 2-28
STARTER SWITCH ................................................................................................................................. 2-29
RADIO ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
CAB ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-32
ENTRY AND EXIT ................................................................................................................................ 2-32
DOOR OPENING ................................................................................................................................. 2-32
DOOR CLOSING .................................................................................................................................. 2-33
SIDE WINDOW..................................................................................................................................... 2-33
FRONT WINDOW................................................................................................................................. 2-34
EMERGENCY EXIT.............................................................................................................................. 2-35
WINDSCREEN WIPER AND WASHER ............................................................................................... 2-35
FLOODLAMPS ..................................................................................................................................... 2-36
DOCUMENTS STORAGE BOX, FIRST-AID KIT, WARNING TRIANGLE AND
FIRE-EXTINGUISHER ......................................................................................................................... 2-37
SUNBLIND............................................................................................................................................ 2-37
CAB LIGHTING .................................................................................................................................... 2-38
AUXILIARY SOCKET ........................................................................................................................... 2-38
STEERING COLUMN........................................................................................................................... 2-39
VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (OPTIONAL)....................................................... 2-40
VENTILATION (air from outside) .......................................................................................................... 2-40
HEATING.............................................................................................................................................. 2-42
AIR CONDITIONING (OPTIONAL)....................................................................................................... 2-43
SERVICE AND PARKING BRAKES........................................................................................................ 2-45
SERVICE BRAKE................................................................................................................................. 2-45
PARKING BRAKE ................................................................................................................................ 2-46
OPERATOR’S SEAT ............................................................................................................................... 2-47
OPERATOR’S SEAT WITH PNEUMATIC SUSPENSION ................................................................... 2-47
SEAT BELT ............................................................................................................................................. 2-52
SECTION 3
OPERATING THE MACHINE....................................................................................................................... 3-1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS...................................................................................................................... 3-1
BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE ................................................................................................. 3-1
OPERATING THE MACHINE ................................................................................................................. 3-1
RUNNING-IN PERIOD ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
AFTER DAILY OPERATION - PARKING ............................................................................................... 3-3
START-UP ................................................................................................................................................. 3-4
START-UP IMMOBILIZER ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
START-UP.............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
ASSISTED STARTING (JUMP-STARTING) ........................................................................................ 3-11
ENGINE SHUT OFF ............................................................................................................................. 3-13
TRAVEL ................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
BEFORE STARTING THE TRAVEL..................................................................................................... 3-14
BASIC POSITION................................................................................................................................. 3-14
INDEX
BASIC SETTING .................................................................................................................................. 3-16
TRAVEL ................................................................................................................................................ 3-18
GEARBOX - GEAR CHANGE .............................................................................................................. 3-21
TRAVEL WITH LOAD APPLIED TO CRANING HOOK........................................................................ 3-23
FLOATING AXLE BLOCKING AND UNBLOCKING............................................................................. 3-24
WORKING OPERATION ......................................................................................................................... 3-25
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................................................... 3-25
BEFORE BEGINNING THE WORK...................................................................................................... 3-26
HOLDING AND RELEASING THE UPPER STRUCTURE SLEW ....................................................... 3-31
POWER BOOST FUNCTION - POWER BOOST................................................................................. 3-37
LEVELLING MODE .............................................................................................................................. 3-39
HYDRAULIC DAMPING ....................................................................................................................... 3-41
STABILIZATION OF THE MACHINE.................................................................................................... 3-43
WORKING WITH STANDARD BUCKET OR CLAMSHELL ................................................................. 3-46
WORKING STAGES............................................................................................................................. 3-48
OPERATING THE MACHINE WITH COLD WEATHER.......................................................................... 3-51
COLD START - PREHEATING............................................................................................................. 3-52
OPERATING THE MACHINE WITH HOT WEATHER ............................................................................ 3-54
MACHINE RECOVERY AND TOWING................................................................................................... 3-55
SECURE THE MACHINE ..................................................................................................................... 3-56
WORKING ATTACHMENT...................................................................................................................... 3-59
PLACING BOOM ATTACHMENT......................................................................................................... 3-60
WORKING ATTACHMENT WITH OFF-SET BOOM ............................................................................ 3-63
BUCKET ............................................................................................................................................... 3-64
BUCKET DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ........................................................................................ 3-66
BUCKETS TEETH - CHANGE.............................................................................................................. 3-67
SECTION 4
SUPPLIES AND SERVICE CHART ............................................................................................................. 4-1
SUPPLIES AND SERVICE CHART........................................................................................................... 4-1
FUEL....................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
HYDRAULIC OIL .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 4-5
WORKING HOURS / INTERVALS ............................................................................................................ 4-6
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS CHART ...................................................................................................... 4-7
CHECKS BEFORE START-UP AND BEFORE EACH WORKING SHIFT (10 HOURS) ........................ 4-10
MACHINE GENERAL INSPECTION .................................................................................................... 4-10
SERVICE BRAKE ................................................................................................................................. 4-11
PARKING BRAKE ................................................................................................................................ 4-11
UPPER STRUCTURE HOLDING BRAKE............................................................................................ 4-12
LIGHTS ................................................................................................................................................. 4-12
CONTROLS AND LAMPS OPERATION .............................................................................................. 4-12
ENGINE OIL - LEVEL ........................................................................................................................... 4-13
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK - LEVEL ......................................................................................................... 4-13
FUEL TANK - LEVEL............................................................................................................................ 4-15
COOLING SYSTEM LIQUID - LEVEL .................................................................................................. 4-17
SCREEN WASHER LIQUID - LEVEL................................................................................................... 4-19
WORKING ATTACHMENT - GREASING............................................................................................. 4-20
OFF-SET BOOM - GREASING ............................................................................................................ 4-21
INDEX
TYRES - PRESSURE CHECK ............................................................................................................. 4-22
TYRES - NUTS TIGHTENING.............................................................................................................. 4-24
WEEKLY SERVICE (50 HOURS)............................................................................................................ 4-25
CAB AIR FILTER - CLEANING ............................................................................................................ 4-25
AIR FILTER - CLEANING ..................................................................................................................... 4-26
AIR INTAKE LINE - CHECK ................................................................................................................. 4-28
MULTI-COOLER - CLEANING ............................................................................................................. 4-28
FUEL SYSTEM - AIR BLEEDING AND WATER DRAINING ............................................................... 4-29
FUEL FILTER/S - WATER DRAINING ................................................................................................. 4-32
SLEWING GEARBOX - OIL LEVEL ..................................................................................................... 4-33
BATTERIES - LEVEL - CHARGE CHECK AND CLAMPS TIGHTENING............................................ 4-34
SLEWING BEARING CUPS AND AXLE FLOATING PINS - GREASING............................................ 4-37
QUICK COUPLER - GREASING .......................................................................................................... 4-38
MONTHLY SERVICE (250 HOURS) ....................................................................................................... 4-39
ENGINE OIL FILTER - CHANGE ......................................................................................................... 4-39
FUEL FILTER/S - CHANGE ................................................................................................................. 4-40
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTER - CHANGE .................................................................................. 4-41
STEERING AXLE - OIL LEVEL ............................................................................................................ 4-42
TRAVEL GEARBOXES - OIL LEVEL ................................................................................................... 4-43
RIGID AXLE AND GEARBOX - OIL LEVEL ......................................................................................... 4-44
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 4-45
BLADE AND STABILIZERS JOINTS, CARDAN SHAFT, STEERING TRUNNION PINS -
GREASING........................................................................................................................................... 4-46
FLOATING AXLE LOCKING CYLINDERS CONTACT FACES - LUBRICATION ................................ 4-47
SERVICE EVERY 12 MONTHS (500 HOURS) ....................................................................................... 4-48
ENGINE REVOLUTIONS SENSOR - CLEANING ............................................................................... 4-48
DRIVE BELTS - CHECK....................................................................................................................... 4-49
ENGINE OIL - CHANGE....................................................................................................................... 4-50
SLEWING BEARING - SCREW TIGHTENING CHECK....................................................................... 4-51
SLEWING BEARING TEETH - GREASING ......................................................................................... 4-52
SLEWING GEARBOX - SCREWS TIGHTENING CHECK................................................................... 4-52
SERVICE AFTER 1000 HOURS ............................................................................................................. 4-53
CAB AIR FILTER - CHANGE ............................................................................................................... 4-53
WINDSCREEN BLADES - CHANGE ................................................................................................... 4-53
ENGINE BRACKETS - SCREWS TIGHTENING CHECK .................................................................... 4-54
ENGINE BELT TENSIONER - CHECK ................................................................................................ 4-54
AIR FILTER - REPLACEMENT OF MAIN FILTER ELEMENT AND OF
SAFETY ELEMENT.............................................................................................................................. 4-55
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING VALVE - CHANGE ....................................................................... 4-56
STEERING AXLE - OIL CHANGE........................................................................................................ 4-56
RIGID AXLE AND GEARBOX - OIL CHANGE ..................................................................................... 4-58
SERVICE BRAKE - PLATES CHECK .................................................................................................. 4-60
PILOT CONTROL FILTER - CHANGE ................................................................................................. 4-61
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM - CLEANING AND OPERATION CHECK -
COMPRESSOR BELT CHANGE ......................................................................................................... 4-61
SERVICE AFTER 3000 HOURS ............................................................................................................. 4-65
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK - CLEANING AND OIL CHANGE .................................................................. 4-65
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - AIR BLEEDING ............................................................................................. 4-67
ENGINE - CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF VALVES CLEARANCE .................................................. 4-67
COOLING SYSTEM LIQUID - CHANGE .............................................................................................. 4-68
FUEL TANK - CLEANING .................................................................................................................... 4-69
INDEX
SLEWING GEARBOX - OIL CHANGE ................................................................................................. 4-70
SERVICE WHEN NECESSARY .............................................................................................................. 4-71
MACHINE - CLEANING........................................................................................................................ 4-71
WINDSCREEN WIPER - CHECK AND CLEANING............................................................................. 4-73
DRIVE BELT - CHANGE ...................................................................................................................... 4-73
INJECTORS - REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................... 4-74
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND TANK - PRESSURE RELEASE.............................................................. 4-74
TYRES - CHANGE ............................................................................................................................... 4-76
SERVICE BRAKE - AIR BLEEDING..................................................................................................... 4-78
STEERING ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................................. 4-78
AXLE FLOATING LOCKING CYLINDERS - AIR BLEEDING............................................................... 4-79
FUSES - REPLACEMENT.................................................................................................................... 4-80
BULBS - REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................................... 4-83
BATTERIES - REPLACEMENT............................................................................................................ 4-87
BUCKETS TEETH - CHANGE.............................................................................................................. 4-88
CLAMSHELL - WEAR CHECK ............................................................................................................. 4-89
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................. 5-1
ERRORS INDICATION ON THE DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 5-2
ENGINE ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
STEERING SYSTEM................................................................................................................................. 5-6
BRAKES SYSTEM..................................................................................................................................... 5-7
SERVICE BRAKE ................................................................................................................................... 5-7
PARKING BRAKE .................................................................................................................................. 5-7
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 5-8
TRAVEL ................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
SLEWING ................................................................................................................................................ 5-11
FLOATING AXLE BLOCKING ................................................................................................................. 5-12
STABILIZERS .......................................................................................................................................... 5-13
HYDRAULIC HAMMER ........................................................................................................................... 5-15
CLAMSHELL BUCKET ............................................................................................................................ 5-16
AXLES ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-17
CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION PUMP ................................................................................................... 5-19
HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM............................................................................................... 5-21
SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................... 5-21
COOLING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. 5-22
BLOWER .............................................................................................................................................. 5-23
SECTION 6
STORAGE .................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
MACHINE STORAGE............................................................................................................................. 6-1
ENGINE STORAGE ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
BATTERIES STORAGE ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
RECOMMISSIONING THE MACHINE AFTER PROLONGED STORAGE............................................ 6-2
DECOMMISSIONING OF THE MACHINE ............................................................................................. 6-3
INDEX
SECTION 7
ATTACHMENTS........................................................................................................................................... 7-1
HYDRAULIC HAMMER ............................................................................................................................. 7-1
HYDRAULIC HAMMER SELECTION..................................................................................................... 7-1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS...................................................................................................................... 7-1
USE OF HYDRAULIC HAMMER............................................................................................................ 7-3
HYDRAULIC SHEARS .............................................................................................................................. 7-8
SELECTING THE HYDRAULIC SHEARS.............................................................................................. 7-8
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS...................................................................................................................... 7-8
USE OF HYDRAULIC SHEARS ........................................................................................................... 7-10
HYDRAULIC QUICK COUPLER ............................................................................................................. 7-15
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................................................................... 7-15
QUICK ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY ........................................................................................... 7-17
HANDLING OF LOADS ........................................................................................................................ 7-19
CLAMSHELL BUCKET ............................................................................................................................ 7-20
CLAMSHELL BUCKET ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................... 7-20
CLAMSHELL BUCKET DISASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 7-22
PARAMETERS SETTING .................................................................................................................... 7-23
SWITCHING OVER FROM STANDARD TO CLAMSHELL BUCKET.................................................. 7-23
ROTARY CUTTER .................................................................................................................................. 7-25
USE OF THE ROTARY CUTTER......................................................................................................... 7-26
CRANING HOOK..................................................................................................................................... 7-30
USE OF THE CRANING HOOK ........................................................................................................... 7-30
OVERLOAD WARNING SYSTEM........................................................................................................... 7-31
BREAK PROTECTION VALVES ............................................................................................................. 7-33
REAR FLOODLAMPS ............................................................................................................................. 7-34
ROTARY LIGHT ...................................................................................................................................... 7-35
SINGLE LIGHT ..................................................................................................................................... 7-35
DOUBLE LIGHT ................................................................................................................................... 7-35
SWITCHING ON AND OFF .................................................................................................................. 7-35
FUEL TRANSFER PUMP ........................................................................................................................ 7-36
CAB PROTECTIONS............................................................................................................................... 7-38
BLADE PROTECTION............................................................................................................................. 7-38
TRANSPORT BRACKET FOR CLAMSHELL.......................................................................................... 7-38
CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION............................................................................................................... 7-39
OPERATION......................................................................................................................................... 7-39
MANUAL FILLING PUMP..................................................................................................................... 7-42
MOTORIZED FILLING PUMP .............................................................................................................. 7-43
SECTION 8
DATA AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 8-1
DIMENSIONS - OPERATING WEIGHTS .................................................................................................. 8-1
WX 145 MODELS................................................................................................................................... 8-1
INDEX
WX 165 MODELS ................................................................................................................................... 8-4
WX 185 MODELS ................................................................................................................................... 8-7
DIGGING PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................................................... 8-9
WX 145 MODELS ................................................................................................................................... 8-9
WX 165 MODELS ................................................................................................................................. 8-14
WX 185 MODELS ................................................................................................................................. 8-19
LIFTING CAPACITIES............................................................................................................................. 8-23
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................ 8-24
PUMPS ................................................................................................................................................. 8-24
CYLINDERS (ø for stroke).................................................................................................................... 8-24
SLEWING ................................................................................................................................................ 8-24
TRAVEL ................................................................................................................................................... 8-24
TYRES .................................................................................................................................................. 8-25
BRAKES .................................................................................................................................................. 8-25
STEERING............................................................................................................................................... 8-25
POWER STEERING ............................................................................................................................. 8-25
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 8-26
BUCKETS ................................................................................................................................................ 8-26
BUCKETS - WX 145 ............................................................................................................................. 8-26
BUCKETS - WX 165 ............................................................................................................................. 8-26
BUCKETS - WX 185 ............................................................................................................................. 8-26
TIGHTENING TORQUES ........................................................................................................................ 8-27
CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION PUMP (OPTIONAL).............................................................................. 8-27
FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................ 8-27
ENGINE ................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
SECTION 9
ALPHABETICAL INDEX .............................................................................................................................. 9-1
INDEX
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION, SAFETY, PLATES AND DECALS
FOREWORD
The current Operator’s Manual is the user’s guide SPARE PARTS
for correct run-in, use and maintenance of the
The “non-genuine” spare parts have not been con-
machine.
trolled and authorized by the Manufacturer. The
Carefully read this Operator’s Manual and store it in assembly and/or use of such products may have
the cab for quick location and reference. negative effects on the machine design features
Instructions concerning safety, operation and main- and could impair its operation safety. The Manufac-
tenance have been developed to permit safe serv- turer is not liable for any damage caused by “non-
ice and operation of this machine. genuine” spare parts or accessories.
In the event of queries or suggestions relevant to WARRANTY

your machine do not hesitate to address to your
This machine is under warranty according to the
Dealer. Dealers have qualified and trained person-
regulations in force in Your Country and in compli-
nel at disposal as well as Original Spares, means
ance with the sales agreement drawn up with the
and equipment suitable to carry out all necessary
Dealer. The warranty, however, expires if the opera-
maintenance.
tion and maintenance instruction for this machine
Do not use this machine for any applications or pur- and contained in this manual, have not been fol-
poses other than those described in this Manual. If lowed.
you use this machine for duties involving the use of
attachments, accessories, or special tools, consult
your Dealer to make sure that the adaptations or
modifications carried out are in conformity with the
machine’s technical specifications and with current
regulations on safety.
Any modifications or adaptations which are not
approved by the Manufacturer may invalidate the
machine’s original conformity with safety require-
ments.
Before entrusting this machine to an operator, make
sure that:
- the operator has received necessary training on
how to operate the machine correctly and safely
in one of our Training Centres or from an
approved organization;
- the operator has read and fully understood the
instructions given in this Manual.
Consult your Dealer to obtain extra manuals or
manuals in other languages.
Your Dealer is at your disposal for any further infor-
mation.
1-1
SECTION 1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Carefully read the safety rules contained herein and The safety messages in this section concern situa-
follow advised precautions to avoid potential haz- tions which may arise during normal machine oper-
ards and to safeguard your safety and personal ation and maintenance. These safety messages
integrity. also indicate the different ways of coping with these
situations. Other safety messages are used
In this manual you will find the following indications:
throughout the manual to indicate specific dangers.
S WARNING S Always keep this manual in the storage compart-

ment provided for it. Make sure that it is always
This symbol warns about the possibility of potential
damages to the machine that can involve the oper- complete and in good condition. Consult your
ator’s safety. Dealer to obtain extra manuals.
S DANGER S
With specific warnings about potential dangers for
the operator’s or other persons integrity directly or
indirectly involved.
The non compliance with the warning preceded by

the above mentioned key-words (WARNING and
DANGER) can cause serious accidents or even the
death of the persons involved.
Moreover in the present Manual have been given
some instructions with texts in italics, preceded by
the words NOTE and CAUTION:
NOTE: it emphasizes and underlines to the operator
the correct technique or correct procedure to follow.
S CAUTION S
It warns the operator of a possible hazard of
machine damage in case he does not follow a
determined procedure.
Your safety and that of people around you depends

on you. It is essential that you understand this man-
ual for the correct operation, inspection, lubrication
and maintenance of this machine.
Pay particular attention to the “Fundamental safety
instructions” and to all warnings and safety instruc-
tions attached to the machine.
Familiarize yourself with the machine operation and
the operating patterns of the control elements prior
to starting up the machine.
The operators must be fully informed about the
operation and application of this or comparable
machines.
1-2
DESIGNATED USE
The machine has been built in accordance with
state-of-the-art standards and the recognized safety
rules. Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to
life and limb for the user or third parties or cause
damage to the machine and to other material prop-
erty.
The machine must be used in accordance with its
designated use, by observing the safety and pre-
cautionary rules and by strictly following the operat-
ing instructions. Any functional disorders, especially
those affecting the safety of the machine, should
therefore be rectified immediately.
The excavator equipped with front attachment,
1
standard bucket or clamshell, is designed solely for
excavating, turning over and loading excavated
soils, sand, gravel, blasted rock, ore, coal and other
raw materials.
S DANGER S
Using the excavator or its attachments for purposes
other than those stated above, e.g.:
- for lifting or transporting persons;
- as a working platform;
- for lifting crane loads without the attachment
being approved for this purpose;
- for pulling slung loads;
- for driving in posts, supports, sheet-piles, without
the attachment being approved for this purpose;
is considered contrary to the designated use.
Improper use may involve a life-threatening risk for
operators or other personnel or may cause injury or
extensive damage.
The manufacturer/supplier cannot be held responsi-

ble for any damage resulting from other than the
designated use. The risk involved in such misuse
lies entirely with the user.
1-3
SECTION 1
NOISE LEVELS
Sound power level (acoustic external)
LWA:
WX 145 models: 101 dB (A)
Sound power level guaranteed (1), determined in
compliance with European standard 2000/14/EC.
Sound pressure level in the operator’s seat

(acoustic internal)
LpA:
2
Sound pressure level continuous, measured inside
of cabin with door and windows closed and with the
heater/air conditioner blower operating at 2nd
speed, measured on an identical machine, in com-
pliance with ISO 6396:1992 Standard.
1-4
LEVEL OF VIBRATIONS TRANSMITTED

TO THE OPERATOR
The vibration level to the operator depends mainly
on the conditions of the ground where the machine
is being operated and on the use conditions of the
machine and its equipment.
The exposition to vibrations can be remarkably
reduced if the recommendations here below are fol-
lowed:
- use equipment suitable for the machine and the
type of work to be carried out;
- adjust and lock the seat in the correct position;
regularly check for the seat suspensions and carry
out adjustments or maintenance as required;
- carry out regularly the ordinary maintenance of the 3
machine at scheduled intervals;
- operate the attachment evenly, avoiding sudden
motion or extreme shocks, if possible;
- avoid, as far as possible, to travel on particularly
uneven soils or the impact with possible obsta-
cles.
This machine is equipped with an operator’s seat in
compliance with ISO 7096: 2000 standard.
This guarantees that the operator’s body exposures
to vibrations respect the requirements for protection
against vibrations when the machine is used
according to its destination as explained in this man-
ual.
The weighted average acceleration value to which
the operator’s arms are subjected does not exceed
2.5 m/s2 (8.20 ft/s2).
The weighted average acceleration value to which
the operator’s body is subjected does not exceed
0.5 m/s2 (1.64 ft/s2). These results have been
obtained by using an acceleration gauge during the
ditches excavation works.
1-5
SECTION 1
BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE

Read and assimilate the instructions and warnings
shown in this manual before operating the machine.
The presence of grease, oil, mud or (in winter) ice
on the steps and access handles can cause acci-
dents. Make sure they are always clean.
Remove anything which might hinder visibility.
Clean the windshield, windows and rear view mir-
rors.
Before travelling or working at night, check that the
lighting and signalling systems are operating cor-
rectly.
Make sure the doors and the engine guard are cor-
rectly fastened before undertaking any travel. 4
Make sure that no loose object or tool is left on the

machine or in the operator’s compartment.
S DANGER S
The operator should be the only person on the
machine. Make sure there is nobody on or near the
machine.
When mounting or dismounting from the machine

always face the machine and use the steps and
access handles on the left-hand side of the
machine.
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate for the job.
It is necessary to have at disposal:
- safety helmet;
- safety shoes;
- safety goggles, or face shield;
- heavy gloves;
- hearing protection;
- reflective clothing;
- wet weather clothing;
- respirator or filter mask. 5
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

appropriate for the job. Do not leave anything to the
case. Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewellery, or
other items that can catch on control levers or other
parts of the machine.
To operate the machine in full safety, the operator
should be completely careful. Do not wear radio or
music headphones while operating machine.
1-6
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

Be prepared if a fire starts or an accident occurs.
Keep the first-aid kit and fire extinguisher on hand.
Thoroughly read and understand the label attached
to the fire extinguisher to use it properly.
Establish emergency priority procedures to cope
with fires and accidents.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance
service, hospitals and fire department posted near
the telephone.
SEAT BELT
On machines with a seat belt for operator’s safety:
- check the seat belt attached to the operator’s
seat. In the event of damage or after an accident,
have it replaced immediately;
- fasten seat belt before starting to work.
WARM-UP INSTRUCTIONS
In the event of low temperatures, the engine must
undergo the warm-up phase. The engine can be run
at full speed only at the end of the warm-up phase.
1-7
SECTION 1
OPERATING THE MACHINE

USE HANDHOLDS AND STEPS
Falling is one of the major causes of personal injury.
When you get on and off the machine, always main-
tain a three-point contact with the steps and hand-
rails and face the machine.
Do not use any controls as hand-holds.
Never jump on or off the machine.
Never mount or dismount a moving machine.
Be careful of slippery conditions on platforms, steps,
and handrails when leaving the machine.
ADJUST THE SEAT

A seat poorly adjusted for operator or work require-
ments may quickly fatigue the operator leading to
improper operations.
The seat should be adjusted whenever machine
operator changes.
The operator should be able to fully press the ped-
als and correctly move the control levers with his
back resting against the seat back.
If not, move the seat fore and aft, and check again.
DON’T CARRY RIDERS ON THE MACHINE

Riders on the machine are subject to injuries such
as being struck by foreign objects and being thrown
off the machine.
Only machine operator is allowed on the machine.
Riders are not allowed.
Riders also obstruct the operator’s visibility, result-
ing in the machine being operated unsafely.
1-8
AVOID INJURY FROM REVERSE TRAVEL AND

SWING ACCIDENTS
If someone stands near the machine when this is
swinging or in reverse travel, the same can hit or run
over this person causing heavy injuries or even
death.
To avoid accidents due to swinging or reverse travel
check the area around the machine. Before reverse
travel or swinging the machine, make sure that
nobody is staying within its working reach.
Always pay attention for the presence of people
within the working area. Use horn or other signals to
warn bystanders before starting machine.
10
Take advantage of a person that watches the
reverse travel if visibility is hindered. Always keep
signalling person in view.
Use manual signals, according to local rules, if
working condition require a flagman.
No motions shall be made unless signals are clearly
understood by both signalman and operator.
Learn the meaning of all flags, signs, and markings
used on the job and confirm who has the responsi-
bility for signalling.
Keep windows, mirrors, and lights clean and in good
condition.
11
Dust, heavy rain, fog, etc., can reduce visibility. As
visibility decreases, reduce speed and use proper
lighting.
Read and understand all operation instructions
given in this manual.
1-9
SECTION 1
TRAVEL
BEFORE SETTING OFF
Remove any soil, mud, snow, ice, grease and oil
from your working footwear before operating the
machine. You might otherwise slip from steps and
pedals and thus initiate inadvertent movements.
Adjust the driver’s seat and the mirror before setting
off.
Close the front window and the cab door.
Warn persons in the immediate vicinity by sounding
the horn before setting off.
Never allow anyone to climb onto the machine.
SELECTING THE TRAVEL DIRECTION

The specifications “forward” and “reverse” as well as
“right” and “left” apply only when the machine is in
basic position and the machine operator is looking
through the front window towards the working
attachment.
If the upper structure is turned more than 90° from
the basic position, the machine moves in the oppo-
site direction from the viewing direction of the opera-
tor.
Therefore check the position of the upper structure
in relation to the undercarriage before setting off.
REVERSE TRAVEL
12
During reverse travel the view of the hazard zone is
restricted. Therefore enlist the help of experienced
flagman. Come to an agreement with the flagman to
ensure that you interpret his signals correctly.
13
1-10
TRAVELLING OVER LONG DISTANCES

Before travelling over long distances:
- return the machine to basic position;
- activate the upper structure holding brake in auto-
matic mode.
The machine is then in basic position.
Before driving on public highway, familiarize yourself
with local laws and the regulations in force.
Read and observe meticulously the instructions pro-
vided under “travelling on public roads” page 1-12.
TRAVELLING ON SLOPES
Never drive across slopes or turn the machine on a
slope.
The machine may slip or overturn.
Take special care on slippery soils.
Ensure that the tyres offer adequate grip. Only then
are the steering and braking properties of the
machine maintained.
TAKING A BEND
Reduce the machine speed while taking a bend. If
the speed is too high and the steering wheel is
wrenched round, there is a risk of the machine over-
turning (due to a wheel of the rigid axle being lifted 14
off the ground). Extremely hard braking while taking
a bend may also cause the machine to overturn.
DO NOT TOW ANOTHER VEHICLE

The machine is not suitable for towing trailers or
other vehicles; this would result in damage to the
axles and gearbox.
The towing fixture is provided solely for towing or
recovery the machine from hazard areas or for lash-
ing purposes on transport vehicles.
1-11
SECTION 1
TRAVELLING ON PUBLIC ROADS
S WARNING S
Road circulation (on public roads) is ruled by special pro-
visions varying from country to country. Check before-
hand with local authorities for circulation provisions.
Transfer on public roads (each time you leave a yard)
is allowed only with an approved configuration, com-
plying with dimensions (A), (B) as shown on the tables.
WX 145
MONOBOOM
mm 2600 2300 2000
Dipper
(in) (102.36) (90.55) (78.73)
mm 3930 3870 3915
A Maximum height
(in) (154.72) (152.36) (154.13)
mm 4080 4095 4080
B Frontal off-set
(in) (160.62) (161.22) (160.62)
PLACING BOOM
mm 2600 2300 2000
Dipper
(in) (102.36) (90.55) (78.73)
mm 4000 3955 3950 15
A Maximum height
(in) (157.48) (155.70) (155.51)
mm 2685 2750 2910
B Frontal off-set
(in) (105.70) (108.26) (114.56)
OFF-SET BOOM
mm 2000
Dipper
(in) (78.73)
mm 4000
A Maximum height
(in) (157.48)
mm 4130
B Frontal off-set
(in) (162.59)
WX 165
MONOBOOM
mm 2900 2600 2300
Dipper
(in) (114.17) (102.36) (90.55)
mm 3980 3965 3965 16
A Maximum height
(in) (156.69) (156.10) (156.10)
mm 4200 4215 4225
B Frontal off-set
(in) (165.35) (165.94) (166.33)
PLACING BOOM
mm 2600 2300 -
Dipper
(in) (102.36) (90.55)
mm 3925 3925 -
A Maximum height
(in) (154.52) (154.52)
mm 2605 2680 -
B Frontal off-set
(in) (102.55) (105.51)
OFF-SET BOOM
mm 2000
Dipper
(in) (78.73)
mm 4000
A Maximum height
(in) (157.48)
17
mm 4130
B Frontal off-set
(in) (162.59)
1-12
WX 185
MONOBOOM
mm 2800 2400 2000
Dipper
(in) (110.24) (94.98) (78.73)
mm 3850 3800 3800
A Maximum height
(in) (151.57) (149.60) (149.60)
mm 4750 4750 4850
B Frontal off-set
(in) (187.00) (187.00) (190.94)
PLACING BOOM
mm 2400 2000 -
Dipper
(in) (94.98) (78.73)
mm 4000 4000 -
A Maximum height
(in) (157.48) (157.48)
mm 2800 2750 -
B Frontal off-set
(in) (110.24) (108.26)
S WARNING S
During road transfer with monoboom version the
help of a flagman to signal the motion is compul-
sory.
Car with blinking lights and flags should precede
and follow the machine.
S WARNING S
ITALY ROAD TRAVEL APPROVAL: travel with
traffic beams and rotary light alight (also during the
day). If the machine is equipped with off-set boom,
it is not approved for road travel.
GERMANY ROAD TRAVEL APPROVAL: travel
with traffic beams alight (also during the day). If the
machine is equipped with off-set boom, it is not
approved for road travel.
S WARNING S
If the machine is equipped with off-set boom, to
travel on public highways, address each time the
pertinent authorities and respect the rules in force
relevant to circulation.
1-13
SECTION 1
MACHINE LAY-OUT
The clamshell switching over valve has to be set to
“clamshell” position. In this way, the bucket cylinder
is hydraulically locked.
Assemble the overall lights on the dipper.
Connect the overall lights to outer socket, installed
on the frame.
Raise the stabilizer blade completely.
Attach the reflective strips on the stabilizer blade.
Raise the stabilizers completely (optional). They
have to stay in vertical position.
Switch off the working floodlamps.
18
Lock the upper structure by means of undercar-
riage.
Activate the “Road travel” mode (1).
On machines equipped with clamshell.

Install the safety pin (2).
Position the clamshell into the suitable support (3) of
the undercarriage.
19
1-14
TRAVELLING UPHILL AND DOWNHILL

During long tracks with remarkable gradient and at
too high speed, you could loose the machine control
and not being able to brake anymore.
Never overcome tracks with a gradient higher than
30° (57,7%). Look for an alternative track with less
gradient.
Never travel on a long downhill track with service
brake continuously engaged. This can cause an
extreme wear to the brake plates, and in the worst
cases, it can cause the breaking of the service
brake.
To avoid that the travel speed becomes too fast dur-
ing travelling downhill, engage the 1st gear. 20
With remarkable gradients, engage the creep
speed.
Travel only in basic position and ahead, in this case
the flywheel is positioned on the steering axle.
Do not travel across slopes or reverse the machine
across slopes as it could overturn.
Before travelling downhill or uphill engage the 1st
gear.
In this way the braking effect of the travel motor
increases and high speeds, not allowed, are
avoided.
Adjust the travel speed by means of the travel
pedal.
S WARNING S
Stop the engine if the gradient is higher than 35°,
as the lowering of the lubricating effect of oil on
constructive assemblies causes damages and
wear.
1-15
SECTION 1
JOB SITE OPERATION

INVESTIGATE JOB SITE BEFOREHAND
Clear all persons from area of operation and
machine movement. Make sure worksite footing has
sufficient strength to firmly support the machine.
When digging deeply, avoid hitting bottom of boom
or bucket cylinder hoses against the ground. Use
the bucket only for digging. To avoid accidents, do
not use it as a jack hammer or wrecking ball.
21
DIG WITH CAUTION

Accidental severing of underground cables or gas
lines may cause an explosion and/or fire, possibly
resulting in serious injury or death.
Before digging, check the location of cables, gas
lines, and water lines. Keep the minimum distance
required by law from cables, gas lines, or water
lines. If a fiber optic cable should be accidentally
severed, do not look into the end, to avoid eyes
injury. If in doubt, contact local authorities and/or the
distributing companies (Electric Power, Gas, Tele-
phone, Water, Telecommunications, etc.). Ask for
information about underground utility lines.
22
1-16
AVOID ELECTRIC LINES

Serious injury or death can result if the machine or
front attachments are not kept a safe distance from
electric lines.
When operating near an electric line, never move
any part of the machine or load closer than 3 m
(9.84 ft) plus twice the line insulator length (L).
Check and comply with any local regulations that
may apply.
Ground dampness increases the area on which
people might be affected by electric shocks.
Keep all bystanders or co-workers away from the
site.
23
BEWARE OF EXHAUST FUMES
Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death.
If you must operate in closed buildings, be sure
there is adequate ventilation.
Use an extension to eliminate exhaust gases or
open doors and windows to ensure a sufficient air
exchange.
1-17
SECTION 1
PARKING THE MACHINE

Park machine on flat and firm surface.
Return the machine to basic position.
Lock the upper structure.
Place the attachment down on the ground.
Engage the parking brake.
Shut off the engine.
S CAUTION S
Do not shut off the engine when running at full
speed, but let it run idle for some minutes to cool it
down.
24
Place chocks under the wheels.
Set ignition key (1) to position “0” and pull it out.
Ignition key (1) is set to “P”. With key in this position,
some electrical users are still under voltage, also
with engine shut off.
If these users remain under voltage for a long time,
the batteries may discharge and prevent a engine
start-up.
Because of this, pay attention that the ignition key is
always set to position “0”, before leaving the
machine parked for long time (for instance at work
shift end).
25
S CAUTION S
With special attachment, move both hydraulic con-
trol levers (2) and the pedal (3) in all directions, to
allow all cylinders to release pressure.
Disconnect the pilot control.
26
1-18
LOADING THE MACHINE ON A TRAILER

WITH FRONT ATTACHMENT INSTALLED
Travel forward along the ramp with the front attach-
ment at the front.
Once the ramp top has been reached, and before
the machine starts falling forward onto the flatbed
(shifting its centre of gravity), rest the bucket flat
onto the trailer flatbed (the angle between the
booms should be 90° to 110°).
Travel slowly forward until the wheels are correctly
positioned on the trailer flatbed.
Slightly raise the bucket from the flatbed, retract the
dipper and keeping it tucked under, slowly swing the
upper structure of 180°.
Retract the bucket and rest it on proper blocks 27
(e.g.: wooden blocks).
WITHOUT FRONT ATTACHMENT

Travel in reverse along the ramp as shown.
Machine centre of gravity should correspond to the
trailer centre of gravity.
Stop the engine and pull out the ignition key.
Cycle the hydraulic control levers to relieve any
residual hydraulic pressure from the booms driving
cylinders.
Move the safety lever to end of travel to the vertical
lock position.
Close all windows, front windscreens, and cab door.
Cover the exhaust pipe to prevent water or dirt from
entering. 28
Secure the machine to the trailer correctly, so as to
prevent dangerous movements, proceed as follows:
- lock the machine frame to the trailer flatbed by
means of chains or metal cables of suitable size,
avoid to involve metal cables or chains and panel-
ling;
- lock wheels by placing wedges (chocks) under
them;
- lock the front attachment (if installed) to the flatbed
using chains or metal cables of suitable size.
1-19
SECTION 1
MACHINE TRANSPORT
In case of transport on public roads, ask for relevant
permissions to competent authorities.
In case of transport by railway, ask for permission
and agree the loading and transport of the excava-
tor with the competent railway authorities.
According to the trailer or railway wagon width, dis-
assemble completely or partially the working attach-
ment. Loading dimensions and weights have to be
determined from section 8 “data and technical spec-
ifications”.
Pay the outmost attention while loading the machine
on the trailer.
Enlist the help of someone. 29
Secure the machine from accidental movements.

Activate the parking brake by using the button (2).
Lock the upper structure by means of proper pin (3).
Lay the working attachment on the flatbed of the
transporting vehicle.
Disconnect the pilot control with lever (1).
In this way the upper structure holding brake
engages automatically.
Remove the ignition key from the cylinder.
Close door and windows.
Place the chocks in front of the wheels. 30
Secure the machine properly, by anchoring chains
to the points indicated on the machine by means of
decals (4).
S CAUTION S
Do not insert the chains in the steering cylinders or
in the hydraulic hoses of the brake.
31
1-20
UNLOADING THE MACHINE FROM A

TRAILER
Unloading procedure may vary dependent upon
whether the front attachment is installed or not.
WITH FRONT ATTACHMENT INSTALLED

Travel slowly in reverse along the flatbed.
Once at the flatbed end and before the machine
starts falling forward onto the ramp (shifting the
position of its centre of gravity), rest the bucket flat
side onto the ground (the angle between the booms
should be 90° to 110°).
Drive slowly forward while retracting the boom,
extending the arm and repositioning the bucket rest-
ing onto the ground until the entire machine is
unloaded.
IMPORTANT: to avoid damaging the front attach-
ment, observe the following while unloading the
machine: 32
minimum angle between boom and arm should
never be lower than 90° and the bucket should
never suddenly hit the ground.
WITHOUT FRONT ATTACHMENT

Travel forward down the ramp.
33
1-21
SECTION 1
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

Do not carry out any service operation until you
have read and understood the instructions and
warnings given in this manual.
Observe the adjusting, maintenance and inspection
activities and intervals set out in the operating
instructions, including information on the replace-
ment of parts and equipment as this service con-
cerns exclusively the qualified personnel.
Wear safety equipment and suitable clothing to per-
form the machine maintenance.
During the service work apply a warning plate.
34
Always wear eye protection when using a tool which
might project metal particles. Use a hammer with a
soft face, such as copper, for installing pins.
Incorrectly performed maintenance or adjustments
can cause serious injury. If you do not understand a
maintenance or adjustment procedure, consult your
Dealer.
If the attachment is raised or the machine moves
with no operator on board, serious injury can result.
35
PRACTICE SAFE MAINTENANCE

Understand service procedures before doing work.
Keep work area clean and dry.
Never lubricate or service the machine while it is
moving.
Keep hands, feet and clothing from power-driven
parts.
Before carrying out any maintenance operation park
the machine safely on a flat surface.
If maintenance procedure must be performed with
engine running, do not leave machine unattended.
36
1-22
PROTECT AGAINST NOISE

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impair-
ment or loss of hearing.
Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as
earmuffs or earplugs to protect against constant or
uncomfortably loud noise.
37
AVOID HIGH PRESSURE FLUIDS

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the
skin causing serious injury. Avoid this hazard by
relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or
other lines.
Relieve the pressure by moving the hydraulic con-
trol levers several times. Tighten all connections
before applying pressure. To protect the eyes wear
a facial shield or safety goggles.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard; protect
hands and body from high-pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor familiar with this
type of injury immediately.
Any fluid penetrating the skin must be removed 38
within few hours to avoid serious infections.
Hydraulic fluid or grease under pressure which pen-
etrates the skin can cause serious injury. Take the
necessary safety precautions (protective clothing
and face and hand protection) to prevent all such
risks. In addition, before handling these products,
read the manufacturer’s specific instructions for
their use.
When carrying out a welding operation on the
machine, as authorized by the Manufacturer and in
accordance with his specifications, disconnect the
alternator plug and connect the welding set earth
lead to the component on which the welding is to be
carried out. Never connect the earth lead to a
hydraulic system component. 39
Escaping oil pollutes the environment.

Have leaks repaired immediately.
Discard oil, rags or dirty paper in a
proper way.
1-23
SECTION 1
CHECK TYRES
A burst tyre can cause serious injury. Regularly
check the condition of tyres and always observe the
inflation pressures defined in accordance with the
type of tyre and ground concerned.
When checking tyre pressures or during an inflation
operation, never stay facing the tyre but always fac-
ing the tread surface. Always use an inflation cage
when the wheel is removed from the machine. Keep
all other persons away from the area.
Never weld near a tyre. It is essential to remove the
tyre before any welding operation.
Take the necessary safety measures to protect your
face when using compressed air.
40
1-24
PREVENTION OF FIRE OR
EXPLOSIONS
Engine fuel can cause an explosion or a fire.
Never refuel when the engine is running.
Do not smoke during re-fuelling.
Take all the necessary safety measures when weld-
ing, grinding or when working near a naked flame.
Use a non-inflammable product for cleaning parts.
41
A spark or flame can cause the hydrogen in a bat-
tery to explode. To prevent any risk of explosion,
observe the following instructions:
- when disconnecting the battery cables, always
disconnect the negative (-) cable first;
- to reconnect the battery cables, always connect
the negative (-) cable last;
- never short-circuit the battery clamps with metal
objects;
- do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery.
Always store batteries in a safe place, out of the
reach of children. 42
The electrical system or the engine exhaust may
produce sparks. Before using the machine in an
area which may contain inflammable vapours,
ensure that there is good ventilation.
Always keep a fire extinguisher available on the
machine. Make sure that it is properly maintained in
conformity with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Clean the machine regularly, remove all debris and
material which may catch fire.
Check for leaks. Replace damaged hoses, pipes
and unions. Clean the machine after any repair work
before operating it.
43
1-25
SECTION 1
PREVENTION OF BURNS
Battery electrolyte causes severe burns. The battery
contains sulphuric acid. Avoid any contact with the
skin, eyes or clothing.
Antidote:
- EXTERNAL: rinse well with water, removing any
soiled clothing.
- INTERNAL: avoid vomiting. Drink water to rinse
your mouth. Consult a doctor.
- EYES: rinse abundantly with water for 15 minutes
and consult a doctor.
- When the electrolyte of a battery is frozen, it can
explode if you attempt to charge the battery or if 44
you try to start the engine using a booster battery.
Always keep the battery charged to prevent the
electrolyte freezing.
Batteries generate explosive gases. Keep all
flames, sparks and cigarettes away. Provide good
ventilation when changing a battery or using a bat-
tery in an enclosed space. Always protect your eyes
when working near a battery.
45
Never touch the battery terminals with your hands.
This can induce a state of electrolysis and impair the
main organs of the body.
Boiling coolant solution can spray out if the radiator
cap is removed while the system is still hot. To
remove the cap: allow the system to cool down, turn
the cap to the first notch and wait until there is no
more pressure. Then remove the cap.
46
1-26
PRECAUTIONS FOR WASTE DISPOSAL

Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the envi-
ronment.
Each country has its own Regulations on this sub-
ject. It is therefore advisable to prepare suitable con-
tainers to collect and store momentarily all solid and
fluid materials that must not be scattered in the envi-
ronment to avoid pollution.
At preset intervals these products will be delivered
to disposal stations legally recognized and present
in this Country.
Hereunder are listed some products of the machine
requiring disposal:
- lubricating oil; 47
- brakes system oil;

- coolant mixture, condensation rests and pure anti-
freeze;
- diesel oil;
- oil and diesel oil filter elements;
- engine and air conditioning air cleaners elements;
- battery.
Also polluting rags, paper, sawdust and gloves must
be disposed in compliance with the same proce-
dures.
Do not use food or beverage containers that may
mislead someone into drinking from them. Do not
pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source. Air conditioning refrigerants
escaping into the air can damage the Earth’s atmos-
phere. Government regulations may require a certi-
fied air conditioning service centre to recover and
recycle used air conditioning refrigerants. Obtain
information on the proper way to recycle or dispose
of waste from your local environmental or recycling
centre, or from your Dealer.
1-27
SECTION 1
MAIN COMPONENTS
PLACING BOOM ATTACHMENT
48
1. Bucket 15. Fuel tank

2. Bucket cylinder 16. Counterweight
3. Dipper 17. Stabilizers
4. Batteries 18. Rear wheels
5. Dipper cylinder 19. Rear axle
6. Placing boom 20. Cab
7. Multi-cooler 21. Stair and storage box
8. Boom cylinders 22. Front wheels
9. Boom 23. Front steering axle
10. Boom adjusting cylinder 24. Axle floating locking cylinders
11. Muffler 25. Blade
12. Diesel engine 26. Undercarriage
13. Hydraulic oil tank 27. Upper structure
14. Hydraulic pumps
1-28
MONOBOOM ATTACHMENT
49
1. Bucket 15. Counterweight

2. Bucket cylinder 16. Stabilizers
3. Dipper 17. Rear wheels
4. Batteries 18. Rear axle
5. Dipper cylinder 19. Cab
6. Monoboom 20. Stair and storage box
7. Cooler 21. Front wheels
8. Boom cylinders 22. Swinging front axle
10. Muffler 23. Axle floating locking cylinders
11. Diesel engine 24. Blade
12. Hydraulic oil tank 25. Undercarriage
13. Hydraulic pumps 26. Upper structure
14. Fuel tank
1-29
SECTION 1
UNDERCARRIAGE
The undercarriage of the hydraulic excavator is
used as a stable base and for travelling.
The undercarriage is moreover equipped with com-
ponents permitting stabilization of the machine dur-
ing working operations, such as the levelling blade
and the stabilizers.
The machine is driven hydraulically by oil motors
and travel gearboxes acting on both axles.
Undercarriage and upper structure are connected
by a slewing ring.
UPPER STRUCTURE
The upper structure accommodates the drive
engine and part of the hydraulic and electrical sys-
tems.
The upper structure carries also the working attach-
ment.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
All travelling and working movements are executed
hydraulically. The operational controls are activated
by hand and are transmitted via control circuits. The
oil flow between upper structure and undercarriage
is ensured by the rotor. The hydraulic system is pro-
tected against possible overloads by the pressure-
relief valves.
STEERING
The machine is equipped with a hydrostatic power
steering system, that is it can be steered by hand
with increased force when the engine is not running
or when the hydraulic steering pump has failed.
SERVICE BRAKE
The service brake is composed of four multi-plate
brakes integrated in the wheel hubs. The brake is
operated hydraulically.
To ensure the braking function at all times, the brak-
ing system is equipped with hydraulic pressure
accumulators, which are permanently monitored.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake can be applied by blocking the
brake plates with spring pressure.
The parking brake is incorporated in the gearbox. In
this way it acts on all the wheels.
FLOATING AXLE
The steered axle is a floating axle. It can be locked
hydraulically during the digging operations with two
cylinders.
1-30
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The electrical system operates on 24 V.
12 V are provided by an electronic transformer.
Electronic modules (Power Control System) ensure
that the available engine power is converted in the
best possible way into hydraulic performance.
WORKING ATTACHMENT
The working attachment is composed of positioning,
dipper and boom, bucket link and bucket. Other dig-
ging or working attachments can also be installed to
the machine.
MACHINE SIDES
The terms “right”, “left”, “front” and “rear”, when used
in this manual, indicate the sides of the machine as
seen from the operator’s seat.
1. Front side - forward
2. Rear side - backward
3. Right side
4. Left side
50
1-31
SECTION 1
COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION PLATES

When ordering parts, requesting information or
assistance, always give your Dealer the type and
serial number of your machine and component con-
cerned.
MACHINE
The machine plate is attached frontally on the right
side of the undercarriage.
1. Machine type
2. Serial number
3. Maximum admissible axle loads
51
ENGINE
The plate with the engine number is attached on the
engine crankcase at pumps side.
1. Model
2. Serial number
52
1-32
CAB
The plate is attached to the inner right cabin side on
the upper beam.
1. Serial number
53
CE-MARK
The CE-mark certifies that the machine has been
built in conformity with the EC directives 89/392, 91/
368, 93/44, 93/68 and 98/37.
54
1-33
SECTION 1
PUMP
The plate is applied on the pump body.
1. Model
2. Serial number
55
AXLES
The plate is applied on the axle body.
1. Model
56
CONTROL VALVE
The plate is applied on the control valve.
1. Model
2. Serial number
57
1-34
DECALS
S WARNING S
An illegible or missing decal can have far-reaching
consequences. Check them everyday.
S WARNING S
Make sure that all decals are perfectly legible.
Clean them regularly, replace them with new decals
if they are damaged, missing or painted over. If
there is a decal on a part that is replaced, make
sure you install a new decal on the new part.
NOTE: when you clean the decals, use only a cloth,

water and soap. Do not use solvents, petrol, etc.
NOISE LEVEL DECAL

EXTERNAL NOISE LEVEL
This decal (1) shows the value in decibel of the
external noise level LWA of machine as guaranteed
by the Manufacturer. As per European Directive
2000/14/EC.
58
1-35
SECTION 1
POSITION OF DECALS
MONOBOOM ATTACHMENT
59
1-36
60
1-37
SECTION 1
Frontal stay dangerous

1
Nobody must stay in front of machine during the
working stages.
Danger of injuries caused by the working attach-
ment in motion. Move the attachment only after
ensuring that nobody is staying in the area of dan-
ger.
61
Dangerous work site stay
2
Nobody must stay in proximity of the machine during
the working stages.
Risk of injury from falling loads or moving parts of
the working attachment. Do not stand under sus-
pended loads or under the working attachment.
62
Slinging points
3
These decals indicate the points of the machine
where to attach the lifting devices, when parts of the
machine are to be removed. Do not use other
points.
63
Battery
4
This decal shows that you have to refer to the Oper-
ator’s Manual.
Shut off the engine before disconnecting the battery.
64
1-38
Slinging points
5
This decal shows the slinging points for machine
handling. Never use any other slinging points than
those shown on this decal.
65
66
Hydraulic oil tank
6
This decal indicates the hydraulic oil tank. Make
sure that the tank indicated by this decal contains
exclusively hydraulic oil.
67
Hydraulic oil tank
7
Read this manual carefully to avoid the risk of oil
under pressure inside of the tank in case of service.
68
Fuel tank
8
This decal indicates the fuel tank. Make sure that
the tank bearing this decal contains fuel only.
69
Operator’s Manual
9
This decal shows the manual location. Read the
manual carefully to ensure you operate the machine
correctly.
70
1-39
SECTION 1
Danger electric current

10
Risk of injury from electric current. Keep the follow-
ing distances from live wires:
up to 1000 V (1 kV) = 1 metre (3.28 ft),
from 1 kV to 110 kV = 3 metres (9.84 ft),
unknown voltage = 5 metres (16.40 ft).
71
Steering risk
11
This decal refers only to the use of the steering. The
steering works only when the engine is running,
refer to the Operator’s Manual.
72
Oil level
12
Check the oil level in the engine before setting the
machine into operation.
73
Danger of staying behind
13
This decal shows that the operator must not allow
anyone to stay in the back of the machine when the
engine is running.
Danger of injuries caused by the rotation of the
upper structure or by the machine in motion. Move
the upper structure or machine only after ensuring
that nobody is staying in the area of danger.
74
1-40
Danger for moving parts

14
Risk of injury from hot or rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
Open the engine hood only with engine shut off.
75
Parking brake
15
Emergency operation for slewing drive and emer-
gency brake.
Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
76
Unscrew the tank plug
16
This decal indicates the need to open the plug
before starting to refuel with the fuel pump. This in
order to avoid overpressure and following abrupt
fuel ejection.
77
1-41
SECTION 1
Maintenance in progress tag

17
It is compulsory, for maintenance operators, to apply
a card warning about incomplete efficiency of the
machine and the presence of personnel performing
maintenance in unseen positions. This tag must be
located on the cab door.
78
1-42
HAND SIGNALS
When operating the machine, never attempt to carry out tasks calling for fine control or to work in areas where
visibility is poor or during reverse travel, without seeking the assistance of a flag man. Make perfectly sure that
you and the signalman understand the signals to be used. The flag man must always keep out from the
machine working area.
The operator must always keep visual contact with the flag man; stop machine immediately if the contact is
lost.
START THE ENGINE MOVE AWAY FROM ME
79 82
STOP THE ENGINE GO THIS FAR
80 83
COME TO ME STOP ALL AND HOLD
81 84
1-43
SECTION 1
STOPPING LOWER LOAD OR BUCKET
85 88
EMERGENCY STOP RAISE LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY
86 89
RAISE LOAD OR BUCKET LOWER LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY
87 90
1-44
TURN MACHINE LEFT DUMP THE BUCKET
91 94
TURN MACHINE RIGHT
92
FILL THE BUCKET
93
1-45
SECTION 1
NOTES:
1-46
SECTION 2
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
SWITCHES AND PUSH-BUTTONS
2-1
SECTION 2
Ref. Description Operation Symbol
Rotary knob/ Activates the blower and has 3-speed stages: 1, 2,

1 Blower
selector 3.
Air conditioner
2 White button Activates/deactivates the air recirculation.
(optional)
Air conditioner Activation/deactivation of air conditioner (ON/

3 Blue button
(optional) OFF).
Sets the heating power:

Rotary knob/
4 Heating completely to the left - low heating power (blue);
selector
completely to the right - high heating power (red).
Stabilizer
5 Push-button Rear right stabilizer control.
(optional)
Stabilizer
Rear left stabilizer control.
(optional)
6 Push-button
City Stabilizer
City stabilizer control.
(optional)
Stabilizer
Front left stabilizer control.
(optional)
7 Push-button
Blade (optional) Blade control.
Stabilizer
8 Push-button Front right stabilizer control.
(optional)
2-2

Push-button with two lights and three engagement
positions.
Left light on: brake permanently locked.
9 Push-button Parking brake Left light off: brake permanently released.
Right light on: automatic mode (in 1st gear only).
The brake releases when the travel pedal is
pressed.
By pressing the symbol (the lamp and the symbol
light up) the creep gear engages.
10 Push-button Creep speed
By pressing the symbol again (the lamp and the
symbol turn off) the creep gear disengages.
positions.
Left light on and right light out: 1st gear engaged.
Left light out and right light on: 2nd gear engaged.
11 Push-button Gearshift
Lights off: the automatic gearshift mode is active.
By pressing the accelerator pedal, the machine
will move in 1st gear up to a certain speed, at
which the 2nd gear will engage.
positions.
Left light off: floating axle locked.
Right light on: floating axle released.
Right light on (the button has been kept pressed
for at least two seconds): automatic mode.
If the machine is stopped, the current conditions
Floating axle
12 Push-button are saved.
blocking
Automatic mode
The axle is released when:
- the travel pedal is pressed and the excavator
starts moving;
- stabilizer legs are moved.
NOTE: the axle releases only if the safety lever is
in lowered position.
13 Display Multi-function Controls and monitoring of the machine functions.
2-3
SECTION 2
Engine speed increase up to a maximum speed in

14 Push-button Engine rpm
7 steps (7 power stages with fixed speed levels).
15 Push-button Engine rpm Lowering of engine rpm up to idle run in 7 stages.
Activation/deactivation of automatic engine speed

reduction.
16 Push-button Auto Idle After activation, the speed of the diesel engine is
automatically reduced to a lower speed during no-
work phases lasting longer than 4 seconds.
Sets engine to idling speed. If Auto Idle and Low

17 Push-button Low Idle Idle are on at the same time, Low-Idle has higher
priority.

positions.
Lights off: brake released, upper structure free to
turn.
Upper structure Left light on: holding brake engaged, upper struc-
18 Push-button
holding brake ture braked.
Right light on: holding brake automatic mode.
Holding brake is applied and released automati-
cally. As soon as the upper structure stops the
brake applies.
positions.
Lights off: overload warning system off.
Overload
19 Push-button Left light on: overload warning system on
(optional)
(machine not additionally stabilized).
Right light on: overload warning system on
(machine additionally stabilized).
positions.
Lights off: soft braking of upper structure slewing.
Upper structure
20 Push-button Left light on: standard braking of upper structure
holding brake
slewing.
Lights on: abrupt braking of upper structure slew-
ing.
2-4

Selects the road travel mode.
Ensure that the safety lever is placed to position
“0”.
21 Push-button Road travel Activation: press the button face with the symbol
(lamp lights up).
Deactivation: press the button face with no symbol
(lamp turns off).
22 Switch Parking brake Parking brake control.
To activate, press the switch face with no symbol.

Cab floodlamps /
23 Switch To deactivate, press the switch face with the
attachment
symbol.
Automatic return push-button.

Screen wiper/ One click: a wiper stroke and a liquid jet.
24 Switch
washer
The windscreen wiper operates continuously with
the jet, as long as the button is kept pressed.
Automatic return push-button.
One click: intermittent wiping.
25 Switch Windscreen wiper
Press and hold button: the windscreen wiper oper-
ates continuously.
Activation: press the button face with no symbol.

26 Switch Rear fog lights Deactivation: press the button face with the
symbol.

Rotary light
27 Switch Deactivation: press the button face with the
(optional)
symbol.

Hydraulic hammer
(optional) Deactivation: press the button face with the
symbol.
28 Switch
Stabilizers
independent
Stabilizers independent raising/lowering.
activation
(optional)

Hydraulic rotary
29 Switch Deactivation: press the button face with the
cutter (optional)
symbol.
2-5
SECTION 2

Hydraulic Shears
symbol.
30 Switch
Frequency Activation: press the button face with no symbol.
switching Deactivation: press the button face with the
(optional) symbol.
Rear working Activation: press the button face with no symbol.

floodlamps Deactivation: press the button face with the
(optional) symbol.
31 Switch
Quick coupler
symbol.
The opening/closing speed of the clamshell is

Clamshell
32 Switch determined by pre-set values. The speed
opening/closing
reduction is optional.
Set the maximum travel speed by keeping the

travel pedal pressed.
Travel speed
33 Potentiometer limiting device Adjustment while driving possible.
(Inching) Left slewing: minimum.
Right slewing: maximum.
Activates and deactivates the electrical system.
34 Ignition key
Starting/Stopping the engine.
On the button of the key-pad modules and on the

switches are engraved symbols; they describe the
function of the button or switch below.
The button are activated by finger tip pressure. The
stroke of the buttons is short and at their activation a
tactile reaction takes place, warning the operator,
that the button has been pushed.
The buttons carry some LEDS (lights). The current
activation status of the button is indicated by lights.
The symbols on the buttons are backlighted, and
this feature activates automatically as soon as the
ignition key is set to “I” (ignition ON).
By activating repeatedly the buttons, different acti-
vation status can be achieved.
Some switches may have two lights: normally they
have a left light (1) and a right light (2).
Some switches are assigned to special attach-
ments. They are installed only on a machine with
special attachments.
2
2-6
“BUZZER”: ACOUSTIC WARNING

SIGNAL
SINGLE ACOUSTIC WARNING SIGNAL
After “Ignition ON”:
- the self-test for electronic control is activated;
- the pilot control is activated and the machine can
be set in motion.
The return filters of the hydraulic system are dirty.
The switching over from dipper to blade/stabilizer
operation takes place.
During the hammer or rotary cutter operation, you
switch over momentarily to placing boom operation,
in order to perform the adjustment movements with
the control pedal.
Some troubles occur to the electronic control, but
they do not impair the operator’s and machine
safety seriously.
Triple sound in case of control error.
Single sound, by engaging the forward speed.
Double sound, by engaging the reverse travel.
Long single sound, by setting to idle the travel direc-
tion.
Single sound, by pushing the button for floating axle
block, when the parking or service brakes are
engaged.
ACOUSTIC WARNING SIGNALS INCHING

The brake pressure is too low.
The engine oil pressure is too low.
Coolant temperature too high.
The maximum load torque is exceeded (with over-
load indicator).
Battery will not charge.
Hydraulic oil temperature is too high.
The function “Stabilizers/blade raising/lowering” is
activated.
The electronic control shows serious troubles.
The emergency operation is activated.
2-7
SECTION 2
CONTROLS AND PEDALS

By shifting the lever to the right - the upper structure
slews right.
Slewing
By shifting the lever to the left - the upper structure
Left hydraulic slews left.
1
control lever By shifting the lever forward - the dipper extends - the
Dipper/blade and blade/stabilizers lower.
stabilizers By shifting the lever backward - the dipper retracts -
the blade/stabilizers raise.
By shifting the lever upward the pilot control is OFF.
2 Safety lever Pilot control
By shifting the lever downward the pilot control is ON.
3 Push-button Travel direction Selection of idle run.
4 Push-button Travel direction Selection of forward travel direction.
5 Push-button Travel direction Selection of reverse travel direction.
2-8

Clamshell
6 Push-button Left clamshell rotation.
rotation (optional)
Dipper/blade and
The controls for dipper/blade and stabilizers switch
stabilizers
7 Push-button over. (With blade/stabilizers activated the buzzer
controls switch-
sounds).
over
With placing boom: extension/retraction of boom
adjusting cylinder.
Placing boom/ With hammer: hammer control.
attachment
With rotary cutter: rotary cutter control.
8 Pedal With shears: shears control.
By depressing pedal on the upper side: the off-set
boom turns to the right.
Off-set digging
By depressing the pedal on the bottom side: the off-
set boom turns to the left.
9 Footrest
It selects the lights type.

Main beams signal: by pushing the lever upward.
10 Lever Lights
Low beams: lever in middle position.
Main beams: by pushing the lever downward.
11 Lever Warning buzzer Acoustic signal.
12 Lever Lights Lights off.
13 Lever Lights Tail lights on.
14 Lever Lights Low beams on.
15 Lever Turn signal light Left signal light activation.
2-9
SECTION 2
16 Lever Turn signal light Right signal light activation.
17 Push-button Flickering lights Flashing lights activation.
Steering
18 wheel and Steering Transfers the steering motion to the steering axle.
column
It locks the steering column to required inclination:
Locking of the
19 Lever by pushing downward - the column can be moved;
steering column
by releasing the lever - the column is locked.
20 Pedal Travel Starts the machine travel and determines its speed.
It brakes the machine travel. The control lever locks
the service brake to braking position. At the same
21 Pedal Service brake
time, the floating axle blocks. When the brake pedal is
released, also the floating axle releases automatically.
22 Push-button Warning buzzer Acoustic signal.
Clamshell Right clamshell rotation.
23 Push-button
rotation (optional)
24 Push-button Hammer Hammer activation.
Generates an engine rpm and pressure increase (for
25 Push-button Power Boost
short work stages).
Allows to perform the levelling operation in an
26 Push-button Levelling
accurate and smooth way.
Upper structure It locks the upper structure to the undercarriage.
27 Pin
holding brake
By shifting the lever forward - the boom lowers.
Boom
By shifting the lever backward - the boom raises.
Right By pushing the lever to the right - the bucket dumps.

Bucket
28 hydraulic By pushing the lever to the left - the bucket fills.
control lever
By pushing the lever to the right - the clamshell
Clamshell opens.
(optional)
By pushing the lever to the left - the clamshell closes.
29 Socket 12 V auxiliary socket.
2-10
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY
This light turns on when the forward

1 Lamp Travel direction
travel is engaged.
It flashes when the left turn signal is

2 Lamp Turn signal light
activated.
3 Lamp Preheating It turns on during preheating.
It turns on blue, when the main

4 Lamp Main beams
beams are activated.
Upper structure This light turns on when the slewing

5 Lamp
holding brake brake is engaged.
It turns on when the right turn signal

6 Lamp Turn signal light
is activated.
2-11
SECTION 2
It turns on when the reverse travel is

7 Lamp Travel direction
activated.
Time in hours and minutes/machine

working hours display/fuel level
indication.
Time/Hourmeter/
Indication above the cross line =
Fuel level
Level OK 121 HOURS
Indication under the cross line = top
up fuel.
Time/Engine Time in hours and minutes / graphic

power level display of the engine power level.
Coolant
temperature/ It displays the temperature of coolant
8 Display hydraulic oil and the hydraulic oil temperature.
temperature
Input of secret code for the start-up

Secret code
electronic lock.
CODE
Display of service hours, according

to:
Operation hours - total hours;
- partial time;
OPERATION HOURS
- days count.
2-12

Setting of hydraulic oil pressure and
of volumetric flow for the following
attachments:
- 4 different hydraulic hammers;
- 4 different rotary cutters;
ATTACHMENTS
- 4 different hydraulic shears.
Further options can be activated by
the dealer for use by the operator:
Attachments - degree of damping for equipment
movements and travel function;
- slewing power limiting;
- activation of “Auto Power Boost”
function;
- setting of the levelling function;
- basic setting;
- clamshell rotation;
- boom adjusting cylinder speed.
8 Display
Setting of display contrast and
Display brightness, clock, language and
measuring units.
DISPLAY
Displays operating data of the

Informations
machine and the control system.
INFORMATIONS
Machine Display of all machine data.
MACHINE
2-13
SECTION 2

Display of operating hours by function
groups of the machine (disabled in
normal machine operation).
Display and setting of maintenance
intervals (disabled in normal machine
operation). MAINTENANCE
Calibration of machine functions
Maintenance
(reserved for Service Department).
Activation of optional machine func-
tions (disabled in normal machine
operation).
8 Display
Resetting of faults (reserved for Serv-
ice Department - password pro-
tected).
Faults occurred are stored in detail

by electronic control unit.
Faults This menu is reserved for our Service
and disabled in normal machine
operation (password protected). FAULTS RETRIEVAL
Push-button for selection and scroll-

Push-button with
9 Push-button down in function and navigation
downward arrow
menus.
Push-button for selection and

10 Push-button “set” button confirmation of items in function and
navigation menus.
Push-button for selection and scroll-

Push-button with
11 Push-button up or escape button in function and
upward arrow
navigation menus.
2-14

Lights up yellow in the event of faults
which are not safety- or function- rel-
evant.
When a yellow fault occurs:
- yellow warning lamp lights up;
- buzzer warning sounds.
Faults can be recalled by pressing
the “set” button.
If several yellow faults have
occurred, they are displayed one
after another at certain intervals.
Faults can be recalled by pressing
the “set” button again.
12 Lamp Fault message Not all yellow faults are displayed on
the screen.
Only such yellow faults are displayed
as are important for machine mainte-
nance or of help to the service per-
sonnel in the event of technical
problems.
A detailed list of yellow faults is
accessible via the FAULT RECALL
menu item. This item can only be
activated with a code and is reserved
for our Service Department.
The cause of the fault should be rec-
tified as soon as possible. In most
cases, the machine can continue to
be used with all its functions.
2-15
SECTION 2

Lights up red, when the safety of per-
sons (e.g. safety lever defective, over-
load warning) and the functioning of
main assemblies of the machine is
endangered:
- this is the case, for instance, when
there is no engine oil pressure or
when the admissible load moment
is being exceeded (with overload
warning option) and when pres-
sure- relief valves open.
When a red fault occurs, a fault
number is displayed and an intermit-
tent buzzer warning is sounded in
13 Lamp Fault message
addition to the red warning lamp light-
ing up.
In some fault cases, certain machine
functions are deactivated or can be
switched over to emergency opera-
tion.
There is also the possibility of several
faults being indicated at the same
time. If 2 red faults occur, both are
indicated. If a yellow and red fault
occur at the same time, only the red
fault will be indicated. After removal of
the cause of the red fault, the yellow
fault is indicated.
2-16
The multi-function display handles all important set-

tings, controls and functions of the machine.
The display can operate in three different modes:
- operating mode;
- main menu;
- set mode. 969 HOURS
The arrow keys are basically used for scrolling

through the menus, whereas the “set” button is used
for activating the menus.
Each press on a button is accompanied by a tactile
touch sensation. The wedges in the main menu on
the right and left margin of the display indicate that 5
further menus can be accessed in the respective
direction with the arrow keys In the submenus,
these wedges are arranged on the right side of the
display at the upper and lower margins.
OPERATING MODE
In the operating mode, the machine operator is pro-
vided with information on machine performance,
machine operating modes etc.
In this mode, the display screen is divided into five
fields (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5).
Field (2) shows the fuel reserve presently available
in the fuel tank.
The general information field (1) displays the follow-
ing information depending on the mode of operation:
- time;
- operating hours;
- engine speed;
- travelling speed. 6
The temporary options selected for special modes

of operation are shown in field (3). Observe the pri-
ority of the temporary symbols as per table shown.
Field (4), displays the operating mode selected.
Field (5), displays graphic information on the operat-
ing mode selected.
2-17
SECTION 2
MAIN MENU
Pressing an arrow button in the operating mode
calls up the main menu. The arrow keys equally per-
mit access to the various sub-menus:
- operation hours;
- code;
- display settings;
- faults retrieval; CODE
- informations;
- service.
In this mode, the display is divided into two fields.
The symbols are displayed in the upper field while
7
the corresponding menu text appears in the lower
one.
The “set” button gives access to the submenus for
recalling information or for changing machine set-
tings.
Wedges under the pictograms indicate that further
menus are available in the respective direction.
The tester and service functions menus are
reserved for our Service Department and disabled in
normal machine operation.
121 HOURS
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
FAULTS RETRIEVAL ATTACHMENT
DISPLAY MACHINE
CODE OPERATION HOURS
F34010
2-18
CONDITIONS OF USE
Please observe the specified ambient conditions
and limits of use:
- temperature between -20 and 70 °C (-4 and
158 °F);
- relative air humidity < 95%.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, malfunctions
cannot be excluded. In the event of malfunctions or
in case of doubt, please contact our Service Depart-
ment.
At low winter temperatures (below about -20 °C
(-4 °F)) the function menus / displays are hardly
or not at all readable. This is not a defect, but a
typical effect of liquid-crystal displays.
After a short time in operation, the display is again
clearly readable with a good contrast.
Some functions of the navigation menu are optional.
They can only be activated and used if the machine
is equipped with the corresponding option and if the
function has been enabled in the electronics.
Example: the hammer.
The display illuminates automatically as soon as the
ignition key is turned to position “I” (ignition ON).
The symbols in the upper row are assigned only to
one function.
2-19
SECTION 2
DISPLAY SETTING, MAIN MENU

In operating mode depress repeatedly the arrow
button, until on main menu appears “display” on
grey background. Confirm with “set” button (2).
By depressing the button with the upward arrow (1)
you return to main menu.
With downward arrow button (3) you can recall fol- 969 HOURS
lowing sub-menus:
- contrast;
- brightness;
- time;
- units;
9
- language.
DISPLAY
German
English
French
DATE
F34012
10
2-20
CONTRAST
Under poor light conditions, strong solar light of
extreme cold, the display contrast may need to be
modified. In this way the readability of the informa-
tions displayed is ensured.
Depress repeatedly button with downward arrow
(3), until the contrast symbol appears on grey back-
ground (4). Confirm the selection with “set” button
(2).
11
F34014
12
By depressing the button with upward arrow (1), the

contrast increases, by depressing the button with
downward arrow (3) the contrast decreases at little
steps. The contrast setting is graphically displayed
like a column (5).
With button “set” (2) you exit the sub-menu “Con-
trast” and return to main menu “Display”. Concur-
rently the contrast settings are memorized.
2-21
SECTION 2
BRIGHTNESS
Under poor light conditions, strong solar light or
extreme cold, the display contrast may need to be
modified. In this way the readability of the informa-
tions displayed is ensured.
(3), until the brightness symbol appears on grey
background (6). Confirm the setting with “set” button
(2).
13
F34016
14
By depressing the button with upward arrow (1), the

brightness increases, by depressing the button with
downward arrow (3) the brightness decreases at lit-
tle steps. The brightness setting is graphically dis-
played like a column (7).
With button “set” (2) you exit the sub-menu “Bright-
ness” and return to main menu “Display”. Concur-
rently the brightness settings are memorized.
2-22
TIME
For different reasons time may need to be set in the
electronic control unit and visualized on the display
(for instance in case of legal time change).
15
(3), until the time symbol (9) appears on grey back-
ground (8). Confirm the setting with “set” button (2).
On the display left appears now the symbol of a
9
clock and right the selection of:
- the indication of the 12 hours;
- the indication of the 24 hours;
- the date setting. DATE
By means of the arrow button you can select one of
these options and confirm the selection with “set”
button (2). F34018
16
2-23
SECTION 2
Save Save
changes? changes?
DATE DATE DATE DATE
DATE
Data input Data input Data input

Data input
DATE
F34019
17
Indication of the 12 hours

Depress repeatedly the arrow keys until the indica- Now you are asked to memorize the settings. By
tion “12 h” appears on grey background. Confirm depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑),
the setting with “set” button. the new setting is not memorized and the modifica-
The display shows now the actual time, where AM tion is not active. By pressing button “set”, the new
means ante meridiem (morning) and PM means time setting is memorized and the modification
post meridiem (afternoon). becomes active. After that the upper menu is
recalled. Now the setting can be repeated or one of
The cursor is now on the first digit of the hours set- the other setting options (indication of the 24 hours
ting. By depressing the button with the upward or date) can be repeated. The display shows now
arrow (⇑), the number increases of one unit. By on the right near the time PM or AM.
depressing the button with the downward arrow (⇓),
the number decreases of one unit. By depressing
button “set”, the setting is confirmed and the cursor
slides to the right, waiting on the second digit of the
hours. Set the second digit of the hours as
described previously. The cursor shifts now on the
first digit of the minutes. Carry out the minutes set-
ting in the same way as described.
Once the minutes setting is confirmed with button
“set”, fields PM or AM becomes actives. By means
of the arrow keys you can scroll through these two
settings and confirm the selection with “set” button.
After that, the settings are shown on the display and
confirmed with button “set”.
2-24
Indication of the 24 hours Date

Depress repeatedly the arrow keys until the indica- Depress repeatedly the arrow buttons until the indi-
tion “24 h” appears on grey background. Confirm cation of the date appears on grey background.
the setting with “set” button. Confirm the setting with “set” button.
The display shows the actual time. The display shows the actual date.
The cursor is now on the first digit of the hours set- The cursor is now on the first digit of the day setting.
ting. By depressing the button with the upward By depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑),
arrow (⇑), the number increases of one unit. By the number increases of one unit. By depressing the
depressing the button with the downward arrow (⇓), button with the downward arrow (⇓), the number
the number decreases of one unit. By depressing decreases of one unit. By depressing the button
button “set”, the setting is confirmed and the cursor “set”, the setting is confirmed and the cursor slides
slides to the right, waiting on the second digit of the to the right, waiting on the second digit of the day
hours. Set the second digit of the hours as setting. Set the second day digit as described previ-
described previously. The cursor shifts now on the ously. The cursor is now on the month setting. By
first digit of the minutes. Carry out the minutes set- depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑),
ting in the same way as described. you scroll to next menu. By depressing the button
with the downward arrow (⇓) you recall the next
The hours and minutes settings are now shown on
month. By depressing the button “set”, the setting of
the display as active and confirmed by button “set”.
the month is confirmed and the cursor slides to the
Now you are asked to memorize the settings. By first digit of the year setting. By depressing the but-
depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑), ton with the upward arrow (⇑), the number
the new setting is not memorized and the modifica- increases of one unit. By depressing the button with
tion is not active. By pressing button “set”, the new the downward arrow (⇓), the number decreases of
time setting is memorized and the modification one unit. By depressing the button “set”, the setting
becomes active. After that the upper menu is is confirmed and the cursor proceeds of one step to
recalled. Now the setting can be repeated or one of the right and stops on the second digit of the year
the other setting options (indication of the 12 hours setting. Set the second, third and fourth digit as
or date) can be repeated. described previously.
The year setting is shown on the display as active
and confirmed by means of button “set”.
Now you are asked to memorize the settings. By
depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑),
the new setting is not memorized and the modifica-
tion is not active. By pressing button “set”, the new
time setting is memorized and the modification
becomes active. After that the upper menu is
recalled. Now the setting can be repeated or one of
the other setting options (indication of the 24 hours
or date) can be repeated.
2-25
SECTION 2
UNITS
Depress repeatedly the button with downward arrow
(3), until the unit symbol appears on grey back-
ground (10). Confirm the selection with “set” button
(2).
The display shows two different units for tempera-
ture, speed, pressure and flow rate measure with
the relevant symbols (10) and (11) highlighted.
Wedges on the edges and on the right and left side
of the display show that it is possible to recall other
settings, by means of button “set” (2). 18
The cursor is now positioned on the temperature
unit currently set. Now on grey background is active
either field “°C” (Celsius degrees) or field “°F” (Fahr- 10 11 12
enheit degrees). By means of the arrow buttons,
you can scroll through these two units and confirm
the selection with the “set” button (2).
The cursor is now positioned on the speed value
currently set. Now on grey background is active
either field “km/h” (kilometres/hour) or field “mph”
(miles/hour). By means of the arrow buttons, you
can scroll through these two units and confirm the
selection with the “set” button (2).
F34021
The cursor is now positioned on the pressure unit
19
either field “bar” or field “psi” (pounds per square
inch). By means of the arrow buttons, you can scroll
through these two units and confirm the selection
with the “set” button (2).
The cursor is now positioned on the flow rate unit
either field “l/min” (litres/minute) or field “gpm” (gal-
lons per minute). By means of the arrow buttons,
you can scroll through these two units and confirm
the selection with the “set” button (2).
Now you are asked to memorize the settings of the
measurement units. By depressing the button with
the upward arrow (1), the new setting is not memo-
rized and the modification is not active. By pressing
button “set” (2), the new measurement units setting
is memorized and the modification becomes active.
After that the upper menu is recalled. Now the set-
ting can be repeated or one of the other setting
options (contrast, brightness, time or language) can
be repeated. By depressing the button with the
upward arrow (1), you exit the display menu and
return to the main menu.
2-26
LANGUAGE
(3), until the language symbol appears on grey
background (13). Confirm the selection with “set”
button (2).
The display shows now 5 language options (Ger-
man, English, French, Italian and Spanish). The lan-
guage currently set is shown as active.
The current language setting is on grey background.
20
Save changes?
German Italian Italian
English Spanish Spanish

French
F34023
21
Depress repeatedly the arrow buttons until the the new setting is not memorized and the modifica-
required language is highlighted inside of a frame. tion is not active. By pressing button “set” (2), the
Confirm the setting with “set” button (2). new language setting is memorized and the modifi-
The display shows now the language setting on a cation becomes active. After that the upper menu is
grey background and highlighted into a frame. This recalled. Now the setting can be repeated or one of
has to be confirmed again by means of the button the other setting options (contrast, brightness, time
with the downward arrow (3). or measurement unit) can be performed. By
depressing the button with the upward arrow (1),
After confirmation by button with downward arrow you exit the display menu and return to the main
(3), you are requested to memorize the language menu.
setting.
By depressing the button with the upward arrow (1),
2-27
SECTION 2
SYMBOLS
Attachments Machine Service hours
Code Display Faults
Informations Maintenance Contrast
Brightness Time Units
Languages Temperature Speed
Pressure Displacement Road travel
Hammer Rotary cutter Shears
Slew power limitation Damping Digging
Stabilizer or blade
Levelling Craning hook
lowering
Stabilizer or blade
Stabilizer or blade Power Boost
lifting
Placing boom speed Trailer Clamshell bucket
Creep speed Slow speed High speed
2-28
STARTER SWITCH
S WARNING S
Before starting the engine, make sure you are fully
aware of the location and the function of each con-
trol. Operating the controls wrongly can cause seri-
ous physical injury.
The ignition key (1) activates following functions:

0 = No electric user is under voltage, the engine is
shut off.
A main relay disconnects all electric circuits
from the battery.
P = The cab inside light and socket, as well as the
radio, are electrically powered. All other users 22
are not under voltage.
I = Electrical system connected.
If the start-up is locked, the relevant code input
is required.
If the start-up is not locked, the electronic control
unit performs the self-test.
All pilot and control lights are activated for a few
seconds, the buzzer sounds shortly twice.
The display shows now some indications.
By means of the arrow buttons, you can set follow-
ing indications:
Time in hours and minutes (A) and visualization of
the operating time of the machine (B).
12 HOURS
23
2-29
SECTION 2
Time in hours and minutes (A) engine power level

(C).
24
The temperature of coolant (D) and of hydraulic oil
(E) is displayed.
25
All screens show the fuel level graphically.
All functions are now input by the electronics as per
table:
Operation Situation after ignition to ON

Power level 2
Auto Idle OFF
Gear shifting 1st
Floating axle blocked
Parking brake applied
Forward/reverse gear shifting idle
“Levelling” mode Active, with Memory function active
Road travel Memory
Start-up locking Memory
Creep speed OFF
Slewing brake behaviour Memory
ON - if set to ON when the engine is shut off
Upper structure holding brake Automatic - if set to automatic or ON when the
engine is shut off
Overload indicator Memory
Start the engine. All indicator and control lights must Exception: with the upper structure holding brake,
turn off, while the engine keeps on running. the lamp remains on.
2-30
RADIO
26
1. Preselection button 1 9. Display

2. Preselection button 2 10. Sound level button: by depressing the top it
3. Preselection button 3 increases, while by depressing the bottom it
decreases
4. Preselection button 4
11A.Band selection
5. Preselection button 5
11B.RDS activation and deactivation
6. TA activation (short pressure) and TA deactiva-
tion (long pressure) 12. Automatic reload
7. Audio/sound modes selection 13. Tape quick winding
8A. Activation (short pressure) and Deactivation 14. Tape quick rewinding
(long pressure) 15. Cassette ejection
8B. Audio activation and deactivation 16. Cassette case opening
2-31
SECTION 2
CAB
ENTRY AND EXIT

Use only the steps, platforms and grab handles (1)
provided for entering and leaving the cab.
Always face the machine when climbing or dis-
mounting.
S WARNING S
Never use the steering wheel or the control levers
to help yourself entering or leaving the operator’s
compartment.
S WARNING S
Clean the steps and access handles and remove all
traces of grease, oil, mud and ice (winter). 27
S WARNING S
Never jump on or off the machine. When dismount-
ing from the operator’s compartment always face
the machine and use the steps and access han-
dles.
DOOR OPENING
Opening the door from outside
Unlock the door with key (1).
Withdraw the flap (2) on the door lock.
The door can now be opened.
Fully opened, the door can be locked into place.
28
2-32
Opening the door from inside

To open the door from inside, push lever (3) forward.
29
DOOR CLOSING
Unlock the opened, locked-in door by pushing down
the lever (1). Grab the handle (2) on the upper side
of the door frame and close the door.
S WARNING S
Make sure that the doors are correctly closed
before any travel.
30
SIDE WINDOW
Loosen the locking device (1) and move the glass
(2) backward.
To close the glass (2), push it forward until the lock-

ing device locks.
2-33
SECTION 2
FRONT WINDOW
The front window can slide in the back of the cabin
under the roof.
Roll up the sunblind.
Bring the screen wiper to basic position (fully to the
left).
Grab both handles (2) at the front window (left and
right side) and push lock levers (1) forwards.
Tilt front window inwards and slide back upwards to
the stop.
Release the locks (1). They lock the window.
Make sure that both locks are properly engaged.
31
S WARNING S
If the locks are not properly engaged, the front win-
dow may move forward under high vibration.
The lower segment of the front window, when

closed, can be moved to “Ventilation” or “Opening”
position.
VENTILATION
Loosen the left and right locks of the lower front win-
dow, by depressing and holding the upper lever (3)
downwards against the handle (4).
Slide lower front window segment downwards to the
stop. Creating a 3.5 cm (1.38 in) wide slot, to allow
the cab ventilation.
Release lever (3) on the left and right.
32
OPENING
Roll up the sunblind.
Loosen the left and right locks of the lower front win-
dow, by depressing and holding the upper lever (3)
downwards against the handle (4).
Slide lower front window segment by means of han-
dles (4) upwards in front of the upper segment of the
front window and let levers (3) engage in the
notches (5).
In the open position, the lower segment together
with the upper segment of the front window can be
pushed under the cab roof.
33
2-34
EMERGENCY EXIT
Use the front window as an emergency exit, if the
cab door cannot be opened after it has been dam-
aged (e.g. in case of an accident).
To break the glass panes in case of danger, use the
little hammer (1) on the rear wall behind the opera-
tor’s seat on the left.
34
WINDSCREEN WIPER AND WASHER

The windscreen wiper and washer are activated by
the relevant switches located on the cab right dash-
board.
Intermittent wiping
Depress rocker switch (2) once. (The switch face
without symbol is depressed and the lamp in the
switch is lit up).
Permanent wiping
Depress rocker switch (2) twice. (The switch face
without symbol is depressed and the lamp in the
switch is lit up).
Switching the wiper off 35
Disconnect switch (2). (Depress symbol face of
switch, the lamp goes out).
Activating the wipe / wash function
Depress button (1). (The lamp inside of button lights
up).
The screenwasher pump is switched on with the
wiper being activated at the same time.
After releasing the button, the wiper continues to
perform wiping movements for a short time.
NOTE: if the front screen is pushed back under the
cab roof, the functions of switches (1) and (2) are
automatically deactivated.
2-35
SECTION 2
FLOODLAMPS
Front working floodlamps activation
Depress the blank face of switch (1).
The working floodlamps on top of the cab and on the
working attachment are on.
Front working floodlamps deactivation
Depress the symbol face of the switch (1).
The working floodlamps on top of the cab and on the
working attachment are off.
36
Rear working floodlamps activation
The rear working floodlamps can only be switched
on, if the key of the electrical system is set to “I”
(ignition ON).
Connect switch (2). (Depress switch face without
symbol, the lamp inside the switch lights up).
Switching the floodlamps off
Disconnect switch (2). (Depress switch face with
symbol, the lamp goes out).
37
2-36
DOCUMENTS STORAGE BOX, FIRST-

AID KIT, WARNING TRIANGLE AND
FIRE-EXTINGUISHER
The operator’s seat (1) is equipped behind with a
storing compartment for documents (2) where to
stow the Operator’s Manual.
This compartment can also stow a fire-extinguisher,
a first aid-kit and the warning triangle.
The triangle can also be stowed in the tool box.
38
SUNBLIND
The sunblind is fitted in a holder above the front win-
dow.
It can be pulled out in front of the front window or the
roof window.
Rolling out the sunblind
Grab the end of the sunblind (1), roll out against
spring action (2) and engage in the holders.
39
Rolling in the sunblind
Take the end of the blind (1), detach from holders (3)
and let it be pulled in (2) slowly by the spring. Do not
let go the unrolled sunblind (2); it might get dam-
aged.
40
2-37
SECTION 2
CAB LIGHTING
The cab interior lighting is switched on and off with
the switch (1).
The lighting can be switched on even if the ignition
key has been pulled out from the cylinder.
If the light remains accidentally alight for a longer
period (all over the week-end), the batteries may be
unnecessarily discharged.
Therefore always check that the interior lighting is
switched off, before leaving the machine.
41
AUXILIARY SOCKET
A socket outlet (1) is installed in the panelling on the
right behind the operator’s seat.
This provides the output voltage of the voltage
transformer (12 V) for connection of the cool-box
(option).
Other electrical consumers can also be connected
as long as the maximum output of the voltage trans-
former is not exceeded.
The voltage transformer installed at the factory is
designed so as to supply not only a cassette radio
but also the cool-box (option); the maximum output
is 90 W (67 ft·lb/s).
For this reason, before connecting a device, check 42
the power input it requires. When the voltage trans-
former is overloaded, its temperature rises so that
the overload protection switches off and leaves the
connected unit without current. In this case pull the
plug out of the socket (1). After 5 - 10 minutes, the
overload protection has cooled down and reacti-
vates the voltage transformer.
If the overload condition persists, the thermal shut-
down does not work anymore and the fuse of the
supply line blows. To replace the fuse, the panelling
below the radio must be removed.
The socket is live when the ignition-key is pulled out
from the ignition cylinder.
A user remaining accidentally connected for a long
period (about a week-end) can cause the discharge
of the machine’s batteries.
Therefore, before leaving the machine, check that
the connected user is switched off.
2-38
STEERING COLUMN
Do not adjust the steering column during travel.
Before adjusting the steering column:
- stop the machine;
- position the button of travel direction to idle;
- activate the parking brake.
The angle of the steering column can be adjusted to
suit the height and posture of the operator. For this
operation proceed as follows:
- press lever with toe cap down and keep in position
lever (2) to unlock the steering column;
- tilt steering column (1) into required position;
- release lever (2) to lock steering column (1);
- check that the steering column is locked.
43
2-39
SECTION 2
VENTILATION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (OPTIONAL)
VENTILATION (air from outside)

WITH ENGINE RUNNING
Use handle (1) to activate and to adjust the blower
speed.
WITH ENGINE SHUT OFF

Turn first of all the ignition key (2) to position “I”.
Now it is possible to activate the knob (1).
44
By means of rotary knob or selector (3) you can set
the air warmth intensity.
45
Defrosting the front, side and rear windows
S WARNING S
Windows that are steamed or iced up obstruct the
operator’s view of the hazard zone.
Never move the machine until the windows are
defrosted and the hazard zone can be clearly seen.
Start the engine. Full heating output is attained only

when the engine is at operating temperature.
Close the air-flow vents (4) under the operator’s
seat.
46
2-40
Open the two air-flow vents (5) for the front windows
as wide as possible and direct onto the front win-
dows.
Open the air-flow vents (6) for the side window as
wide as possible and direct onto the side window.
47
Open the air-flow vents (7) of the rear window as
wide as possible and direct onto the rear window.
48
Set heating output to max.
Set the blower speed to stage 3 by means of knob
(3).
49
2-41
SECTION 2
HEATING
The engine coolant flows through the heat
exchanger of the heating system. The heating out-
put is therefore also dependent on the engine tem-
perature. The full heating output is not achieved
until the engine has run up to operating tempera-
ture.
Even if the heating is not required for an extended
period, switch heating system on at full output once
a week for about 5 minutes in order to mix the cool-
ant in the engine and that in the heating system.
When working in dusty, severely contaminated air,
the heating system can be operated temporarily in
the circulating air mode (only with optional air condi-
tioner).
Turn rotary knob (3) clockwise according to required
heating output.
Depending on the quantity of hot air required, switch
blower to stage 1 - 3 with rotary knob (1).
50
The slats of the air outflows (4) are adjustable. The
air flow can thus be deflected laterally and upwards.
51
2-42
AIR CONDITIONING (OPTIONAL)

During summer time, when the air conditioner has
cooled down the cab temperature, the air inside of it
can further be cooled by activating the air recircula-
tion.
Also during winter it is possible to activate the air
conditioner in order to dry the cabin air.
SWITCHING ON THE AIR CONDITIONER

Start the engine.
Depress button (4). The lamp inside the button lights
up blue.
The blower is switched automatically to stage 1.
Turn rotary knob (1) to select the desired blower
performance (stages 1 - 3).
AIR TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

The temperature of the air blown into the cab can be
adjusted with heater rotary knob (3).
Positions:
- left stop (min) = cooled air blown into cab,
52
- right stop (max) = heated air blown into cab.
The temperature between these two positions can
be adjusted continuously.
For higher cooling or heating performance, the
blower can be switched to stages 2 and 3.
SWITCHING OFF THE AIR CONDITIONER

Depress button (4). The lamp inside the button turns
off.
SWITCHING ON RECIRCULATED AIR

Depress button (2). The lamp inside the button lights
up.
SWITCHING OFF RECIRCULATED AIR

Depress button (2). The lamp inside the button turns
off.
Air recirculation can also be used when the air con-
ditioner is off.
2-43
SECTION 2
CONDITIONS FOR A GOOD COOLING REFRIGERATING AGENT R 134a

INTENSITY
If handled in a wrong manner the refrigerating agent
The air intakes ports are on the rear of the cab and R 134a can be dangerous. Therefore it is important
should neither be covered nor contaminated. the following warning and directions are adhered to.
The filter element for outside air and the evaporator The refrigerating agent R 134a has a boiling point of
slats must be clean. 12 °C (53.6 °F).
The cab door and panes must be closed. Never expose any part of the air conditioning sys-
tem to flames or excessive heat, because of the risk
NOTE: the air in the air conditioner is not only of fire or explosion and the production of phosgene
cooled but also dried, this avoids the steaming of gas.
the cab panes and increases the operator comfort
Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the air
and safety.
conditioning system as escaping coolant can cause
frostbite.
INSTRUCTION FOR A CORRECT USE If coolant comes into contact with your skin, use the
same treatment as for frostbite.
First of all to eliminate the heat stagnation.
Ventilate the cab then proceed with the cooling (with Warm the exposed area of skin with your hand or
windows and door closed). lukewarm water 32 °C (89.6 °F), cover loosely with
a bandage to protect against infection and consult a
Set for maximum cooling: doctor immediately.
recirculation, maximum blower output, minimum
temperature, average air distribution. If coolant comes into contact with your eyes, rinse
When the inside room is sufficiently cooled, set the them immediately with cold water for at least 5 min-
normal cooling: utes and consult a doctor immediately.
blower to level 1 or 2, wished temperature, air from
outside instead of recirculation.
Clearing off the window misting:
set air conditioning to ON, set full heating output, full
blower out put and direct air blow toward the win-
dow panes.
Preventing the glass panes misting:
with cold and moist weather, work with air condition-
ing activated, direct air flow toward the panes, tem-
perature and blower set according to needs.
Protection against exhausts and dust:
with air very dusty and with poisonous exhausts,
activate the air conditioner and space out the opera-
tion with periods of recirculation.
Temperature:
a temperature of 20-23 °C (68-73.4 °F) is the best,
minimum 18 °C (64.4 °F). If you have to dismount or
to climb into the cab with very hot weather, increase
the temperature to 25 °C (77 °F).
2-44
SERVICE AND PARKING BRAKES
SERVICE BRAKE
The service brake is composed of four multi-plates
brakes integrated in the wheel hubs. The brake is
operated hydraulically.
To ensure the braking function at all times, the brak-
ing system is equipped with hydraulic pressure
accumulators which are permanently monitored.
800 HOURS
If the pressure lowers under a preset minimum
value, the red lamp (1) will light up on the display
and the buzzer will release an intermittent warning
sound.
Concurrently the display will show an error code and
the symbol “Brake pressure too low”. You are also
required to switch off the engine immediately. 53
S WARNING S
If, during an operation lamp (1) lights up:
- stop the machine immediately;
- apply the parking brake;
- place the machine in a safe condition.
Reset the machine in motion only after clearing the
problem.
SERVICE BRAKE ACTIVATION

To brake the machine, press the pedal (2).
Concurrently also the floating axle is blocked (inde-
pendently from the position of the floating axle
blocking button).
The machine cannot be started as the service brake
is applied.
By activating the travel pedal with the travel direc-
tion selected but with the service brake blocked, the
display warns only once for some seconds that the
service brake must be released.
If not only the service brake but also the parking
brake is applied, and the travel direction has been
selected, and you press the travel pedal, the display 54
warns that the parking brake has to be released.
The brake is released by releasing the pedal (2). If
the floating axle had not been blocked beforehand
by means of button (3), it is unlocked at the same
time.
2-45
SECTION 2
PARKING BRAKE
S WARNING S
Apply the parking brake only with machine station-
ary! Only in emergency case, for instance if the
service brake fails, you can activate the parking
brake while the machine is still moving.
In this case the braking effect is immediate, and the
wheels lock!
The gearbox contains two packs of plates, that are

pressed by preloaded springs, when the parking
brake is applied.
PARKING BRAKE ACTIVATION

The parking brake is engaged by keeping the button
(1) pressed until the left lamp lights up. This button
has two lights and three engagement positions:
- left lamp on: brake engaged;
- left light off: brake released;
- right light on: automatic mode is active (in 1st gear
only).
When the engine is stopped, the current engage-
ment condition is saved.
By using the buttons for travel direction, you can
select the travel direction, but you cannot start the
machine as the parking brake is engaged. 55
AUTOMATIC MODE
To select the automatic mode, press and hold button
(1) for more than two seconds.
To exit automatic mode, press the button (1) again.
Switching always occurs with no delay.
In the automatic mode, when the machine is
stopped, the parking brake is automatically
engaged.
If the travel direction has already been set, the
machine moves when the travel pedal (2) is acti-
vated.
If the travel pedal (2) remains unused for more than
0,5 seconds, the parking brake is engaged.
2-46
OPERATOR’S SEAT
To operate the machine correctly with maximum effi-
ciency and comfort, the seat should be correctly
adjusted to suit the weight and height of the opera-
tor.
S WARNING S
Before using the controls, make sure that the seat
is adjusted and positioned correctly.
S DANGER S
Never adjust the seat while travelling, because you
must concentrate on the road.
Before adjusting the seat:
- stop the machine;
- position the button of travel direction to idle;
- activate the parking brake.
The locking levers for fore-and-aft adjustment and
for backrest adjustment must engage in the
required position.
After locking, the operator’s seat and the backrest
can no longer be moved into other positions.
OPERATOR’S SEAT WITH PNEUMATIC

SUSPENSION
An electrically operated compressor installed in the
seat supplies the suspension of the seat suspension
and the air chambers of the backrest with com-
pressed air. Corresponding valves are installed in
the seat.
ADJUSTING THE SEAT CUSHION ANGLE

Pull handle (1) at front edge of seat upwards, adjust
seat cushion, engage handle (1).
Adjustment range 3° - 11°, in 4 steps.
56
2-47
SECTION 2
ADJUSTING THE SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT

Pull handle (2) at front edge of seat upwards, adjust
seat cushion, engage handle (2).
57
FORE-AND-AFT ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT

WITHOUT CONSOLES
Pull locking lever (3) upwards, shift seat to required
position and release locking lever.
58
ADJUSTING THE SUSPENSION/SEAT HEIGHT

Suspension
The operator’s weight should be adjusted upwards
with the machine stationary and the seat loaded by
brief actuation of the handle (4). The suspension is
adapted automatically to the operator’s body weight.
Seat height
Pull handle (4) upwards or downwards until the seat
(6) has reached the required height. Release the
handle (4).
59
2-48
FORE-AND-AFT ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT WITH

CONSOLES
Pull bracket (5) upwards, shift seat and engage
bracket.
60
FOLD-BACK ARMRESTS
The armrests (7) can be folded upwards for entering
and leaving the seat.
61
ARMRESTS ANGLE
The angle of the slope can be changed in the lowest
position irrespective of the backrest angle, using the
integrated handwheel (8).
Adjustment range +10° up to -30°.
62
2-49
SECTION 2
ADJUSTING THE LONGITUDINAL -

HORIZONTAL SUSPENSION
Unlocking
Move lever (9) forward.
Locking
Move lever (9) backward.
63
BACKREST ADJUSTMENT
Sit down on seat and lean lightly against the back-
rest.
Pull locking lever (10) upwards. Bring backrest to
required position by pressing back or leaning for-
ward, release locking lever. Release the locking
lever.
64
ADJUSTING THE ARMREST HEIGHT

Remove plastic cap (11), slacken nut (size 13 mm
(0.51 in)), adjust to required height, tighten nut, fit
plastic cap.
65
2-50
ADJUSTING THE LUMBAR SUPPORT

An upper and a lower air chamber are integrated
into the backrest. They can be inflated or deflated
independently of each other. The backrest convexity
can be adapted to the shape of the operator’s spine
with the two push-buttons (12).
For both push-buttons:
- by pressing + the air chamber is inflated;
- by pressing - the air chamber is deflated.
66
SEAT HEATING
Two electric heating elements (seat and backrest)
are installed in the operator’s seat.
The maximum heating capacity is preset. The tem-
perature is thermostat-controlled.
Switching on and off
This is done with a rocker switch (13) on the left side
of the backrest.
“0”: heating OFF
“I”: heating ON
The seat heating can be switched on only if the igni- 67

tion key is set to position “I” (Ignition ON).
BACKREST EXTENSION (OPTIONAL) (HEAD

SUPPORT)
The backrest extension can be suited individually in
height, by pulling the same out (14) up to stroke end
by means of a toothed rod.
Adjustment range: 100 mm (3.94 in) in 7 places
To remove the backrest extension, override the
resistance of the stroke end with a light pull.
68
2-51
SECTION 2
SEAT BELT
S WARNING S
Always fasten your seat belt before starting the
engine. The machine is equipped with a roll over
protection system (ROPS) which ensures your
safety. The seat belt will protect you efficiently if you
attach it correctly and if you always wear it. The
seat belt must not be too loose. It must not be
twisted or caught in the seat.
Check periodically the seat belt and all its securing

elements. If you notice that the seat belt and its
securing elements are damaged or some of them
missing, perform immediately repair or replacement
of parts. Seat belts damaged or worn because of an
accident, they have to be replaced.
The seat belt buckle must not be clogged, for
instance from paper or other objects, otherwise the
hooking tongue does not lock. Never run belt over
rigid or fragile objects such as bunches of keys or
spectacles. In this way your body could get injured
in case of accident. The operator’s seat is fitted with
a lap-type seat belt. The belt tensioning roller is
incorporated on the left side of the seat.
FASTEN SEAT BELT

Insert the hooking tongue (2) in the buckle (1). Pull
the tongue against the buckle to check if the seat
belt is well secured.
The belt should not be entangled or rolled.
69
RELEASE SEAT BELT
Press the lock (3) of the buckle (1) and take out the
hooking tongue.
The belt rolls in automatically.
70
2-52
SECTION 3
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE OPERATING THE MACHINE
S WARNING S S WARNING S
Read and assimilate the instructions and warnings Check that all the controls and all the safety
shown in this manual before operating the devices operate correctly in a safe, clear area
machine. before beginning work.
Before operating the machine, observe the following When operating the machine the following instruc-
instructions: tions must be observed:
- Check the levels (engine oil, hydraulic fluid and - Start the engine taking into account weather con-
coolant fluid) and make sure that the various flu- ditions.
ids correspond to the conditions of use.
- Regularly consult the hourmeter to ensure Main-
- Carry out the daily maintenance operations. tenance Intervals are observed.
- Walk around the machine, look for any leaks and - If you use the machine under particularly severe
inspect the hoses. conditions (dusty or corrosive atmosphere, etc.),
the Maintenance Intervals should be reduced.
- Before undertaking any road travel, lock the
equipment, and connect the safety systems - Make sure that you know the location of pipes and
required by regulations. cables before beginning work.
- Before any road travel or job site work at night, - Do not work near overhead high-voltage electrical
check that the lighting and signalling systems are cables without checking beforehand that all nec-
operating correctly. essary measures have been taken to respect the
minimum distances: 5 metres.
- Check the condition of the tyres and the tyre pres-
sure. - On job sites on the public highway, use regulation
signals, taking into account the working range of
- Clean the steps and access handles and your
shoes. The presence of oil, mud or ice (winter) the machine. Local regulations define the number,
type and location of reflective strips.
can cause accidents. Make sure they are always
clean. - Make sure that the operator’s seat is correctly
adjusted and positioned.
- Clean or replace safety decals which are no
longer legible. - Never operate any control or driving component
unless you are seated correctly in the operator’s
- Make sure that the engine hood is closed and
seat with the seat belt adjusted and attached cor-
latched correctly.
rectly.
- Check that the cab door is closed correctly.
- Adapt your operating style to the type and condi-
- Remove anything which might hinder visibility. tions of work.
Clean the windshield windows and rear view mir-
rors. - Do not allow anyone to stand in the machine
working area. Stop all movement until the person
- Make sure that no objects or tools are left on the has moved away.
machine or in the operator’s compartment.
- Operate all controls progressively so the machine
- Make sure to know the escape manoeuvres from works smoothly.
machine (emergency exit).
- When loading the machine onto the trailer of an
- Make sure that nobody is under or on the articulated vehicle, see “Transporting the
machine. The operator should be the only person machine”.
on the machine.
- When towing the machine, see “Machine recovery
- Make sure that nobody is within the working range and towing”.
of the machine.
- Avoid running the engine in an enclosed space. If
necessary, ensure good ventilation under all cir-
cumstances.
3-1
SECTION 3
- Dust, smoke or fog can reduce visibility and cause RUNNING-IN PERIOD
an accident. Stop or slow down the machine until
Your machine will last longer and give better and
normal visibility is restored.
more economical performance if you pay particular
- If there is any operating problem, immediately attention to the engine during the first twenty hours
lower the loader equipment to the ground, engage of operation.
the parking brake and stop the engine. Find the
During this period:
cause or inform responsible persons and take the
necessary measures to forbid the use of the Keep a close watch on the instrument panel.
machine. Operate the machine at normal speeds. Do not run
- When stopping the engine take account of the engine too much at stalling speeds (with the
weather conditions. wheels turning slowly or stopped and the engine at
full speed).
- To park the machine, see “Parking the machine”.
To ensure adequate lubrication, idle the engine at
1000 rev/min. for one minute before increasing the
rpm.
Maintain the engine at the normal operating temper-
ature.
Do not run the engine at idle speed for long periods.
During the running-in period, the following inspec-
tions and maintenance operations must be carried
out in addition to the operations shown in the Main-
tenance Programme:
Every ten hours or daily
Check the engine oil and coolant levels.
Check the transmission and rear axle oil levels.
Check the greasing of the front equipment.
After the first 10 operating hours
Check the tightness of the wheel nuts.
After the first 50 operating hours
After the first 50 operating hours, consult your
Dealer for the 50 hour maintenance operations rec-
ommended by the Manufacturer.
3-2
AFTER DAILY OPERATION - PARKING

Secure the machine:
- Carry out daily service operations.
- Park the machine.
- Park machine on dry and level ground. Place the
working equipment on a stand or on the ground.
- Return the machine to basic position.
- To stop the machine on a grade:
park the machine with face downhill and with the
teeth of the bucket pushed firmly into the ground.
- Secure the machine with the wheel chocks.
- Lock the upper structure.
- Activate the parking brake.
- Shut off the engine (turn the ignition key to posi-
tion “0”).
- Remove the ignition key.
- With special attachment, move both hydraulic
control levers and the pedal in all directions, to
allow all cylinders and the system to release pres-
sure.
- Disconnect the pilot control.
- Close cab glasses and windows.
- Lock the cab door and all machine covers and
hoods.
- Remove gross dirt from machine.
- Visual check of hydraulic system, axle and reduc-
tion gears tightness.
- Visual check of machine and attachment status:
verify the presence of possible damages to the
upper structure and undercarriage.
- Visual check of tyres tightness and status.
- Protect the machine against unauthorized starting.
3-3
SECTION 3
START-UP
START-UP IMMOBILIZER
This machine is equipped with an electronic immobi-
lizer as a standard feature. When activated, the
immobilizer prevents unauthorized starting of the
machine.
The immobilizer is not active on delivery from the
factory. It can be activated by the customer when
the machine is handed over. Before activation, the
customer has to enter a 4-digit code chosen by him.
NEW CODE ENTER

In the operating mode, press the arrow button until
the lock symbol (4) is highlighted grey and the text
“CODE” appears. Confirm the setting with “set” but-
ton (2).
Using the downward arrow button (3), activate the
lock symbol (4) and confirm the selection with the
“set” button (2). CODE
Enter the presently valid 4-digit code with the arrow

buttons and the “set” button. Attention when making
the change for the first time: the code preset at the
factory is 1111.
After confirming the fourth digit, you are requested
to enter the new code.
1
NOTE: note the code and keep it in a safe place.
Confirming with the “set” button, saves the entered
code, whereas upward arrow button (1) rejects the
change. This takes you back to main menu.
3-4
SAVE CHANGES?
INPUT CODE
NEW CODE
WRONG CODE INPUT CODE
PRESS ANY KEY INPUT NEW CODE
INPUT NEW CODE
F34081
key = ON
ERROR System
MESSAGE check ok?
NO • Engine does not start.
• Set ignition key to OFF.
YES • Restart procedure.
Code
active?
YES
Code NO
correct?
F34429
3-5
SECTION 3
CODE ACTIVATION
button, until on main menu appears “CODE” on grey
background.
By means of the arrow buttons you can select
“closed-lock” symbol and confirm the selection with
“set” button.
CODE DEACTIVATION
button, until on main menu appears “CODE” on grey
background and confirm with button “set”.
By means of the arrow buttons you can select now
the “open-lock” symbol and confirm the selection
with “set” button.
FURTHER SETTINGS
Similar to the above procedure, the code can also
be changed and deactivated in this sub-menu and a
time set after which the code is to become active.
The machine can thus be put back into operation
after a pause without the need to re-enter the new
code, if this is done within the preset time.
3-6
IMMOBILIZER, ACTIVATING THE CODE TIMER

FUNCTION
This menu can be used for setting a time after which By means of the arrow buttons you can activate
the code is to be activated. The machine can thus now the clock symbol and confirm the selection with
be put back into operation after a pause without the “set” button.
need to re-enter the new code, if this is done within
Enter the activation time with the arrow buttons and
the preset time.
the “set” button, this time can be between 1 minute
In the operating mode depress the arrow button and 12 hours. After confirming the last number you
repeatedly, until on main menu appears “CODE” on are requested to confirm once again.
grey background. Now activate button “set”. Confirming with the “set” button, saves the selected
By means of the arrow buttons you can select time of activation, whereas arrow up button rejects
“closed-lock” symbol and confirm the selection with the change. This takes you back to main menu.
“set” button.
CODE
Save changes?
F34083
3-7
SECTION 3
CODE
Active code after: Save changes?
Data input
Active code after:

minimum = 1 minute
maximum = 6 hours
F34250
3-8
START-UP
The following text describes starting of the machine
without entering a number code.
Disconnect the pilot control by lifting the safety lever
(1) to position “0”.
6
Set the travel direction to neutral with push-button
(2).
Insert the ignition key into the cylinder (3) and turn it
to position “I”.
The display shows the logo.
The machine performs a test check of the system.
A brief warning is sounded.
7
After approximately two seconds, the display shows
a information relevant to the next service to be per-
formed.
After two more seconds the display shows the
actual time, the service hours performed until now
and the fuel level indication.
Turn the ignition key to position “II”.
The engine starts.
Release the ignition key that returns to position “I”.
Now you can set the safety lever (1) to position “I”
and the machine can be operated.
3-9
SECTION 3
ENGINE DOES NOT START

If the engine does not start, reset the ignition key to
position “0” and repeat the start-up operation.
During this operation hold the key continuously to
start-up position for at least 30 seconds. Between
one start trial and the other observe a pause of 2
minutes.
If the engine does not start even after three
attempts, check the fuel supply. The absence of
blue or white smoke from the exhaust tube during
start-up, indicates that the engine receives fuel.
Watch for the fault messages.
Maybe there is water in the fuel.
Drain water and try to start the engine again. If, after
all, the engine fails to start, address to the After-
sales service.
3-10
ASSISTED STARTING (JUMP-

STARTING)
S CAUTION S
Keep any potential ignition sources, such as
unshielded lights or burning cigarettes, away from
the batteries. Battery gases are readily flammable.
A high current flows on connection of the earthing
cable. Sparks occurring at the contact point may
ignite gases at the discharged battery.
The ground clamp should therefore be connected
as far as possible from the discharged battery.
Never lean over the batteries when jump-starting a
vehicle. Wear goggles.
Never use assisted starting when the batteries are
defective or frozen.
9
Never connect batteries (battery sets) unless they
have the same voltage.
Use only tested jumper cables with insulated termi-
nal clips and an adequate lead diameter.
Ensure that the bodies of the supplying and receiv-
ing machines are not in contact. Otherwise a cur-
rent flow might result from connecting the positive
poles. Risk of short-circuiting.
Never use jumper cables with overvoltage, e.g. two
or three batteries or booster units connected in
series and generating voltages in excess of 12 V.
Never use welding generators or welding trans-
formers as a source of current.
Position jumper cables in such a way that they can-
not be caught by rotating engine components.
BEFORE JUMP-STARTING
Switch off all electrical consumers in receiving
machine (with discharged battery) and turn ignition
key to position “0”.
Switch off all consumers in supplying machine
(booster battery) and shut off engine.
The charge of the batteries supplying electric power
should not be lower than the charge of the flat bat-
teries.
3-11
SECTION 3
CONNECTING THE JUMPER CABLES

Connect the red jumper cable to the positive clamp
of the discharged battery (1) and then to the positive
clamp of the booster battery (2).
Connect the black jumper cable first to the negative
clamp of the booster battery (3) and then to a bright-
metal point on the receiving machine (4).
10
STARTING THE ENGINE

Start the engine of the supplying machine and run it
with stepped-up revolutions.
Start the engine of the receiving machine (with dis-
charged battery). If the engine does not start up
after 15 seconds, wait one minute before restarting.
Once the engine has started up, proceed as follows:
Switch on some high-consumption users, e.g. com-
plete lighting system, blower on stage 3 and the air-
conditioning system if present. All this prevents that
when the cables are detached, peaks of current are
generated, that could on their turn damage the elec-
tronic units.
Disconnect battery jumper cables in this way:
- negative terminal on receiving machine (4);
- negative terminal on delivering machine (3);
- positive terminal on receiving machine (2);
- positive terminal on delivering machine (1).
Switch off high-consumption units again.
Run the engine at moderate speed for about half an
hour. Batteries are partially re-charged.
Have the electrical system of the machine checked,
to determine why the batteries were discharged.
11
S WARNING S
If, after all, the engine fails to start, address to the
After-sales service.
3-12
ENGINE SHUT OFF
S WARNING S
Do not shut off the engine when running at full
speed, but let it run idle for three/five minutes to
cool it down.
Place the working attachment on the ground.

By means of push-button Low Idle (1) bring the
engine to idle run.
12
Turn the ignition key (2) to position “0”.
The engine is shut off and stops.
Remove the ignition key (2) from the cylinder.
The key can be pulled out only if placed to position
“0”.
13
3-13
SECTION 3
TRAVEL
BEFORE STARTING THE TRAVEL

Remove any soil, mud, snow, ice, grease and oil
from your working footwear. You might otherwise
slip from steps and pedals and thus initiate inadvert-
ent movements.
Raise the working attachment only to such an extent
that the machine can pass under overhead power
lines without risk.
Adjust the operator’s seat, the steering column and
the rear view mirrors before setting off.
If the machine is equipped with seat belt, fasten it.
Close the front window and the cab door.
the horn before setting off.
Never travel across slopes.
Take the utmost care on slippery and greasy
ground.
Check for correct tyre pressure.
Make sure the wheels have adequate grip; only then
are the steering and braking properties assured.
Give the engine 2 to 3 minutes time to warm up
before setting off.
Run the engine at full load only if warm.
BASIC POSITION
The specifications “forward” and “reverse” as well as
“right” and “left” apply only when the machine is in
basic position and the machine operator is looking
through the front window towards the working
attachment.
Bear in mind that the required and the actual direc-
tions of travel “forward” and “reverse” as well as the
required and actual directions of cornering “right”
and “left” are identical only when the machine is in
basic position.
If the upper structure is turned more than 90° from
its basic position, the machine moves in the oppo-
site direction from the viewing direction of the opera-
tor.
Therefore check the position of the upper structure
in relation to the undercarriage before setting off.
3-14
The machine is in its basic position when the cab (1)

is over the left pair of wheels of the steering axle (2).
A = travelling forwards: the wheels of the steered
axle are in front.
B = travelling backwards: the wheels of the rigid
axle are in front.
Only in the basic position are the travel direction
selected and the true travel direction the same.
S WARNING S
If the upper structure is slewed more than 90° out of
basic position, the machine moves in the opposite
direction of the one selected.
14
Example:
The upper structure (3) is turned by more than 90°
out of its basic position.
The operator looks through the front window and
wants to move in this direction.
He depresses the travel pedal. The machine, how-
ever, does not travel in direction B but in direction A.
The operator wants to travel “forward”, he is actually
travelling in “reverse”.
Because of this:
If the position of the upper structure (3) in relation to
the undercarriage (4) is not exactly known, look out
of the windows to check the direction of the upper
structure (3) with respect to the undercarriage (4).
If this is not possible, depress first the travel pedal
slightly.
In this way you can determine the machine travel
direction.
Depress the travelling pedal fully only after the
actual travelling direction is perfectly clear.
15
3-15
SECTION 3
BASIC SETTING
According to the operation requirements and condi-
tions, to the pedals and control levers reactions for
working and travel movements, you can select up to
four different basic settings.
Following setting are possible:
- (A) - SPORTIVE = bright
- (B) - CLASSIC = balanced
- (C) - COMFORT = smooth and sensitive
- (D) - EVOLUTION = flexible with specific feature
of machine rotation
The letter relevant to the basic setting selected,
from A to D (1), is shown always on the middle of 16
the display.
The machine is delivered ex-works with configura-
tion C - smooth and sensitive.
Have these setting performed by the After-sales
service.
BASIC SETTING SELECTION
MACHINE
Save changes?
LEVELLING
BASIC SETTING A
SPEED LIMITATION
BASIC SETTING BASIC SETTING BASIC SETTING BASIC SETTING

A - BRIGHT
B - BALANCED B - BALANCED B - BALANCED
C - SMOOTH C - SMOOTH C - SMOOTH
D - FLEXIBLE D - FLEXIBLE D - FLEXIBLE
F34092
17
3-16

button, until on main menu appears “MACHINE”
inside of a frame. Confirm with “set” button.
Depress the arrow buttons repeatedly until the bar is
on “BASIC SETTING”. Confirm with “set” button.
To get back to “MACHINE” menu, depress the but-
ton with the upward arrow (⇑) repeatedly or the
downward arrow button (⇓), until the beginning or
the end of the display selection is reached. If, after
reaching the end or the beginning, the display
scrolls in the same direction, you return to the higher
menu. If the buttons are not depressed for a pro-
longed period, the return to the next higher menu is
automatic.
Confirming with “set” button, the sub-menu “BASIC
SETTING” is recalled.
The display shows four choices as basic settings
(BRIGHT, BALANCED, SOFT AND FLEXIBLE). The
current active basic setting is displayed.
Depress repeatedly a arrow button, until the
required basic setting is highlighted into a frame.
Confirm with “set” button.
Once the selection is confirmed with button “set”,
you are requested to memorize the basic setting. By
depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑), the
setting is NOT memorized and the modification is
not active. By pressing button “set”, the basic setting
is memorized and the modification becomes active.
After that the higher menu is recalled. Now the set-
ting can be repeated or one of the other setting
options (for instance the hydraulic hammer) can be
repeated. By depressing the button with the upward
arrow (⇑) you exit the menu “MACHINE” and return
to main menu.
3-17
SECTION 3
TRAVEL
Raise the blade and the stabilizers completely.
Before starting the travel, perform a visual inspec-
tion of the machine.
Lock the upper structure with the stud (1).
Apply the upper structure holding brake, by
depressing button (2), until the left lamp of the but-
ton lights up.
18
Move the safety lever (3) to position “0”.
19
Then depress the “Road travel” button (6) and the
right lamp of button lights up; the display shows the
road travel symbol.
Insert the “Road travel” mode.
Select the gears shifting mode.
Release the parking brake. At the same time the
floating axle is unlocked while the selected travel
direction is restored.
Select the travel direction by means of button (4) or
(5).
20
3-18
Depressing button (4): selection of forward travel

direction, shown by lamp (A) on the display.
A single acoustic warning is sounded
Depressing button (5): select forward travel direc-
tion, shown by lamp (B) on the display.
21
If you have to work at a particularly low speed,
select the 1st speed (off-road travel) with push-but-
ton (8) and than the creep speed with push-button
(7).
A double acoustic warning is sounded.
Activate the travel pedal (9), the machine starts trav-
elling.
The display shows the selected gear and speed; the
lamps indicated the travel direction selected.
Set the speed with the travel pedal (9).
22
INCHING - TRAVEL SPEED ADJUSTER

The travel speed can be adjusted by using the knob
/ potentiometer (1).
By turning it to the left: travel speed is decreased.
By turning it to the right: travel speed is increased.
When travelling uphill, machine speed does not
decrease. When travelling downhill, the braking
effect of the engine is increased, so that the
machine speed does not increase. In this way, a
non-permitted increase in travel speed and danger
situations both for persons and for the machine are
prevented.
When stopping the machine on slopes (travel speed
in “0” position), the machine keeps still, even without 23
actuating the service brake and the automatic mode
of the parking brake.
Thanks to the closed oil circuit, as regards inner
leaks, wheel movement is prevented by blocking the
travel engine.
3-19
SECTION 3
TRAVEL SCREEN DISPLAY

By depressing the button for “Road travel” the dis-
play shows and highlights the relevant symbol.
F34443
24
F34099
25
3-20
GEARBOX - GEAR CHANGE

According to the machine operation kind, you can
afford different operation types at gear change:
- 1st speed: left light on button (1) lit and right light
out;
- 2nd speed: left light out and right light on;
- automatic gearshift active: both lamps are out.
26
When the pedal (2) is activated, in the middle of the
lower section, the display shows the symbol of gear
engaged [the tortoise (A) = 1st speed or the hare (B)
= 2nd speed].
27
CREEP SPEED
The engagement/disengagement of the creep
speed is possible only at a travel speed lower than
20 km/h (12.43 mph). The creep speed can be
engaged/disengaged with button (3) (the right lamp
lights up at creep speed engagement). At the same
moment, on the display bottom right, the snail sym-
bol (C) appears. The speed of the relevant speed
engaged, lowers of about 80%.
28
29
3-21
SECTION 3
OPERATION AND SPEED OF AUTOMATIC GEAR

CHANGE
During travel at 1st speed (left lamp on button (1) lit
and right lamp out), the machine travels at low
speed “Tortoise” up to 5 km/h (3.11 mph), then the
automatic gear change engages and the speed
switches over to 2nd gear. Speed can increase up to
20/30 km/h (12.43/18.64 mph).
If during 1st speed travel you depress the “Snail”
button (3), speed will be reduced automatically to
1 km/h (0.62 mph).
During travel at 2nd speed, if speed lowers up to
5 km/h (3.11 mph), the automatic gear change
engages and speed decreases to 1st gear, if you
travel at 2nd speed and depress the button “Snail”
(3), the speed decreases up to 2 km/h (1.24 mph), 30
the automatic gear change engages and the
machine runs at 1st speed.
Automatic speed change
F34447
31
3-22
TRAVEL WITH LOAD APPLIED TO

CRANING HOOK
Turn the load toward travel direction. The flywheel
must be placed in this case over the steering axle.
Approach the load as near as possible to the earth
and to the machine.
Lock the upper structure with the stud (1).
Apply the holding brake of the upper structure with
push-button (2). The symbol left lamp lights up. At
the same time the lamp lights up on display.
Release the blocking the floating axle by depressing
push-button (3) (the right lamp lights off).
Proceed with caution and slowly.
32
3-23
SECTION 3
FLOATING AXLE BLOCKING AND

UNBLOCKING
The steered axle is suspended from the undercar-
riage in such a way that it can float about the longi-
tudinal axis of the machine (floating axle). This
feature is an advantage when driving on uneven ter-
rain. During working it is, however, necessary to
avoid axle floating. To achieve this, the oil exchange
between two hydraulic cylinders taking support on
the axle is prevented. The floating axle is then
blocked and the stability of the machine considera-
bly increased. Before using the machine for driving,
the floating axle must be unblocked.
OPERATION
The blocking and unblocking of the floating axle
activates by depressing button (1), that has two
lamps and three engagement positions:
- left and right lights out: blocking of floating axle
activated;
- left light on and right light out: blocking of floating
axle deactivated;
- left light out and right light on: automatic opera-
tion.
Depress button (1) many times until you achieve the
required condition.
AUTOMATIC MODE 33
To select the automatic mode or to exit this mode,
depress button (1) and hold for more than two sec-
onds.
In automatic mode some of the following conditions
take place:
- the floating axle is blocked if the travel pedal
remains inoperative for more than 0.5 seconds;
- the floating axle is released when you depress the
travel pedal;
- for the full time of stabilizers or blade operation,
the floating axle is blocked. At the end of opera-
tion, the axle blocking is restored.
Beware, at machine departure from the factory this
option is disabled. This option can be enabled or
disabled through the Service menu.
3-24
WORKING OPERATION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Inspect the site for underground gas, power and
water lines before starting work.
Any damage to these lines is a life-threatening risk.
Clean off any earth, mud, snow, ice, grease and oil
from your working footwear before operating the
machine.
There is otherwise a risk of slipping off the pedals
and steps and initiating inadvertent movements.
the horn before starting work.
Stop working if anyone is staying in the hazard
range of the machine. 34
Make sure such persons have left the hazard range
before resuming work.
Work with the machine only when it is standing on
level and flat ground and in its basic position.
Make sure the clearance between working equip-
ment and overhead power lines and other structures
is sufficient!
If a power line has been contacted, drive the
machine out of the hazard zone or lower the working
attachment.
Pay attention to machine load capacities.
Components of the working attachment may dam- 35
age the machine when the working attachment is
used beyond its capacities.
Work with caution and avoid similar extreme condi-
tions.
3-25
SECTION 3
BEFORE BEGINNING THE WORK

Every day, before setting the machine in operation,
carry out daily maintenance.
Enter the cab and seat on the operator’s seat.
Carry out all start-up operations.
With engine at service temperature, set the required
rpm by means off push-button (1). According to the
operation mode, it is possible to set up to 7 stages
the rpm/power ratings.
Working mode Power levels
Craning 1-3
36
Digging 4-7
Levelling 4-7
Road travel DRIVE
Hammer 4-7
Shears 1-7
Rotary cutter 4-7
MACHINE IN WORKING POSITION

Return the machine to basic position. Work possibly
in this position to achieve the maximum balance.
Stop the machine.
Engage the parking brake by pressing the button
(2).
Lower the stabilizers.
The machine can be installed with different stabiliz-
ers configurations.
37
3-26
AUTOMATIC SPEED REDUCTION (AUTO IDLE)

The speed reduction function (Auto Idle) automati-
cally reduces the engine speed in no-load working
conditions.
The drive engine is throttled down to idling speed if
work with the working equipment is interrupted for
longer than 4 seconds.
Fuel consumption and noise and exhaust emissions
are reduced.
When the operator activates a hydraulic function,
the drive engine speed is again increased to the
previously set speed of the respective power level.
The switching state of the Auto Idle function (ON/
OFF) is saved after engine shut-off.
NOTE: do not activate the engine speed automatic
reduction with following functions: craning, hammer-
ing, rotary cutter or during travel.
Risk of unexpected changes in machine power.
To activate the engine automatic speed reduction

depress push-button (1): the right lamp lights up.
To deactivate the engine automatic speed reduction
depress push-button (1) again: the right lamp lights
off.
The Auto-Idle speeds and the time to activation are
pre-programmed at the factory. These parameters
can be modified depending on the conditions of use
of the machine. Contact the After-sales service if a
modification of the programmed values is required.
38
3-27
SECTION 3
AUTO IDLE
YES
Not operating >

for 10 seconds
AUTO IDLE
NO
AUTO IDLE Selection Power level adjustment
F34112
39
POWER LEVEL SELECTION

Select the power level by means of buttons (1) and
(2). If the arrow buttons are depressed longer, the
values keep changing automatically.
The engine speed can be varied in 7 stages up to
maximum engine speed and pump performance.
Power levels 6 and 7 are used for working with high
pump output.
Power levels 4 and 5 are used for working with a
engine power rating called “economic”. Engine
speed and pump output are reduced and the work-
ing speed is slightly lower.
With power levels 1 thru 3, the machine works with
further reduced engine speed and pump output. 40
These power levels are particularly useful for preci-
sion work, e.g. lifting operations, and for further
reduction of the fuel consumption.
3-28
The selected power level is indicated on the display

by dark bars representing the power stages (3).
3
F34114
41
The power level is associated to 3 different opera-

tion modes:
- digging (A);
- levelling (B);
- loads moving (C).
The display will show 3 different symbols.
A B C
F34115
42
3-29
SECTION 3
PILOT CONTROLS ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

Perform the activation with following operations:
Shift safety lever (1) to position “I”.
43
Now the electrical pilot control is activated; the
hydraulic control levers (2) and (3) as well as pedal
(4) are operational.
44
Deactivation is performed as following:
Move the safety lever (1) to position “0”. The pilot
control is now deactivated.
45
3-30
HOLDING AND RELEASING THE UPPER

STRUCTURE SLEW
UPPER STRUCTURE HOLDING
Return the machine to basic position.
the locking pin (1) is set right above the opening of
the undercarriage.
Lift the pin (1), turn it away from the seat and push it
downward.
The locking pin engages in the opening of the car-
riage. If the locking pin cannot be turned at all or
only with difficulty, slew the upper structure slowly to
the left or to the right. Meanwhile push the locking
pin downwards.
RELEASING THE UPPER STRUCTURE 46

Pull up locking pin (1), turn towards the seat and
engage.
If the locking pin cannot be turned at all or only with
difficulty, slew the upper structure slowly to the left
or to the right. Meanwhile pull the locking pin
upwards.
UPPER STRUCTURE HOLDING BRAKE

The slewing gearbox is equipped with a multi-plate
brake. This is applied by spring pressure and
released by hydraulic pilot pressure.
The upper structure holding brake can be applied at
any time with button (1), (left lamp lit). The holding
becomes active only after hydraulic control lever (2)
is in neutral position and the upper structure slewing
moving has come to a halt.
About 3 seconds later, the “Holding brake” lamp (3)
lights up on the display.
47
3-31
SECTION 3
With ignition key is off, with engine shut off or in the

event of system voltage failure, the upper structure
holding brake is active.
The upper structure holding brake can be operated
in the following three modes:
- lamps off, button (1) not pressed: the brake is
released and the upper structure can rotate freely;
- left lamp off and right lamp on, by pressing button
(1) once only: automatic operation. The holding
brake is automatically applied when the upper
structure comes to an halt. The brake releases
when a slewing movement is initiated. Lamp (3)
lights up if the upper structure is not moved for 48
more than three seconds;
- left lamp on and right lamp off, by pressing button
(1) twice: the brake is engaged and the upper
structure is stopped.
Automatic operation
The holding brake is automatically applied when the
upper structure comes to an halt. It releases when a
slewing movement is initiated.
If the upper structure holding brake is set to
“Applied”, during a slewing movement, left lamp
lights up.
For safety reasons, the brake is applied, however,
only after the slewing movement has ended.
Technical problems can lead to a change of the
functions of button (1).
The following switching states of the upper structure
holding brake that are active when the ignition is
switched off, are active again when the ignition is
switched on.
Ignition OFF Ignition ON
Brake released Automatic
Automatic Automatic
Applied Applied
Releasing the upper structure holding brake

Depress repeatedly button (1), until lamps on push-
buttons turn off. The holding brake is released and
the upper structure is free to turn (not possible when
pilot control is off).
In the automatic mode (with right lamp lit up), the
holding brake is released when the slewing control
lever is moved out of neutral position.
3-32
Upper structure holding brake faults

- All 3 switching states continue to be available; in
the “automatic” or “applied” states, the respective
lamp flashes (“in automatic”, right lamp; “applied”
left lamp).
- Only the “released” and the “applied” states are
available; while with “applied” state the left lamp
flashes.
Upper structure holding brake, emergency acti-

vation
S WARNING S
The upper structure slewing is free as soon as the
upper structure emergency brake is released with
the emergency activation!
In such case, the upper structure is not able to stop
automatically after the end of the slewing move-
ment.
When working on slopes or in an inclined position
of the excavator, the upper structure can continue
to slew uncontrolled if the slewing movement is not
stopped by countering.
To avoid dangerous situations, the emergency
release function should be used only in exceptional
cases.
Rectify any faults of the upper structure holding
brake immediately (or have them repaired).
The pilot pressure needed for releasing the upper

structure holding brake is controlled by means of a
solenoid valve.
In the event of solenoid failure, the upper structure
holding brake can be released with the emergency
release device.
The solenoid valve is installed in the frame behind
the cab (1).
Remove the base-plate of the maintenance opening
below the valve stack.
Screw the setscrew (3) down to the limit stop using
an Allen key (2). The upper structure holding brake
is released and the upper structure can turn freely.
After removal of the fault, screw the setscrew back
out to the upper stop.
49
3-33
SECTION 3
UPPER STRUCTURE SLEWING

Switch the upper structure holding brake into the
automatic mode by depressing button (1) until lamp
is lit up (this mode is selected automatically on
engine start-up).
Activate the pilot control by pushing forward the
safety lever (3).
Unlock the upper structure.
To slew the upper structure to the right push hydrau-
lic control lever (2) to the right.
To slew the upper structure to the left push hydraulic
control lever (2) to the left.
The slewing speed increases the further the hydrau- 50
lic control lever (2) is moved to the right or to the left.
UPPER STRUCTURE HOLDING

The maximum slewing speed depends on the slew-
ing features set by button (4):
- lamps off: low slewing speed;
- left lamp on: standard slewing speed;
- lamps on: high slewing speed;
- intermittent lamps: fault message.
UPPER STRUCTURE BRAKING

The slewing movement of the upper structure is
braked when the hydraulic control lever returns to
neutral position.
By means of push-button (4) you can set the braking
effect of the upper structure holding brake. The time
of braking from lever release to upper structure stop
can be suited to individual requirements according
to 3 levels.
- Lamps off: soft braking of upper struc-
ture slewing movement.
- Right lamp on: standard braking action.
- Lamps on: hard braking of upper struc-
ture slewing movement.
Countering (i.e. shifting the slewing control lever in
the opposite direction) enhances the braking action
even further.
S WARNING S
Both lamps flash at intervals if a fault occurs in the
system. Push-button (3) operation is disabled. The
switching functions are blocked. In neutral position
of slewing control lever, the slewing braking action
is weaker. If necessary, increase the slewing brak-
ing action by moving the lever to the opposite direc-
tion (countering).
3-34
SLEWING POWER LIMITATION

The hydraulic slewing power of the upper structure
can be individually adapted to the working needs
and to the conditions of use of the machine.
In the working mode, depress repeatedly a arrow
button until the background of “MACHINE” (1) on
main menu is highlighted grey. Confirm with “set”
button.
MACHINE
51
Depress repeatedly an arrow button until “SLEW-
ING MOMENT” (2) is selected and confirm with but-
ton “set”.
The arrows on the right side of display indicate that
other sub-menus can be recalled:
ON = slewing power limitation active. The slewing
power preset is indicated as a percentage, e.g.
40%.
OFF = slewing power limitation inactive.
The values are increased or decreased with the
arrow keys in 5% steps.
A long press of the arrow keys starts automatic 52
scrolling of the values.
The desired hydraulic slewing power of the upper
structure can be set with the UP and DOWN arrow
buttons. Higher values mean more power available
for slewing with a simultaneous reduction of the
hydraulic power available to other working move-
ments such as “Raising the boom” and vice versa.
The settings are shown as a bargraph display
between 30% and 100%. Confirm the setting by
depressing button “set” twice. Depressing “set” only
once and then the upward arrow button, all changes
made are rejected and the main menu returns.
DEFAULT = resets the settings depending on the
type of machine, the standard parameters are reset
to the factory-defined standard values.
3-35
SECTION 3
The standard values may vary with the type of

machine.
When the slewing power limitation is on and active,
the slewing power symbol is displayed in the lower
left corner of the screen.
In this case, observe the priority of the temporary
symbols displayed.
Save Save
changes? MACHINE changes?
DAMPING
SWING POWER
AUTO POWER BOOST
SLEWING POWER SWING SPEED
LIMITATION LIMITATION
PARAMETERS NOT UPDATED. PARAMETERS NOT UPDATED.
RE-TEST. RE-TEST.
PRESS ANY KEY PRESS ANY KEY
SWING SPEED SWING SPEED LIMITATION

LIMITATION Slewing 3-max
speed
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT

1-min
Slewing 3-max Slewing speed 3-max Slewing 3-max

speed speed
DEFAULT DEFAULT
DEFAULT
1-min 1-min 1-min
F34459
53
3-36
POWER BOOST FUNCTION - POWER

BOOST
The “Power boost function” is always automatically
active in power levels 1 - 3 and in the travelling func-
tion (travel pedal depressed).
In the event of heavier loading, the hydraulic pres-
sure for the working functions and for travelling is
increased.
This means higher lifting force, higher extraction
force, higher breaking force, higher traction forces
and improved precision control at reduced working
speeds.
When button (1) on right hydraulic control lever (2)
is depressed, the activation of the power boost func-
tion is displayed on the screen
The function remains active for about 10 seconds.
The function activates only if power levels 4 - 7 are
active and the activation time is not exceeded.
In power levels 1 - 3 and during travelling, the auto-
matic activation of the function is not displayed, in
order to have more free space on the screen for
other symbols during the work.
The increase of hydraulic pressure is now available
for about 10 seconds. After about 10 seconds, the
increased hydraulic pressure is shut off again. 54
The state of activation of the Power boost function is
simultaneously displayed on the screen.
To activate the function once again release button
(1) and press it again.
POWER BOOST, AUTOMATIC FUNCTION

The Auto Power Boost function can be activated
and deactivated with the help of the multi-function
display’s movements menu “Fill bucket” and/or
“Retract dipper”.
The Auto Power Boost is not active on delivery from
the factory.
With Auto Power Boost on, the Power Boost func-
tion is activated automatically in performance levels
4 - 7, if maximum system pressure is prevailing for
prolonged periods for the “Fill bucket” and/or
“Retract dipper” movements and if the correspond-
ing control lever is at maximum deflection.
3-37
SECTION 3
AUTO POWER BOOST ACTIVATION

button, until on main menu appears “MACHINE” on
grey background. Depress the “set” button.
on “Auto Power Boost” activates. Depress the “set”
button.
Use the arrow buttons to select the working attach-
ment for which you want to activate or deactivate
the “Auto Power Boost”. Depress the “set” button.
By means of the arrow buttons you can activate or
deactivate this option and confirm the selection with
“set” button.
55
Confirm the change with the “set” button or keep the
old setting by depressing an arrow button.
Activation of the standard Power Boost function with
button (1) is always possible, even when Auto
Power Boost is on.
56
MACHINE
DAMPING
SWING POWER
AUTO POWER BOOST AUTO POWER BOOST
PARAMETERS NOT
UPDATED. RE-TEST.
PRESS ANY KEY AUTO POWER BOOST AUTO POWER BOOST

DIPPER IN DIPPER IN
NO
Updating performed BUCKET FULL BUCKET FULL

YE by ESX?
AUTO POWER BOOST AUTO POWER BOOST
DIPPER IN DIPPER IN
Save changes?
F34127
57
3-38
LEVELLING MODE
The “levelling” mode can be activated in the power
levels 4 - 7.
Depress button (1). The display shows the symbol
“Levelling”. The hydraulic control levers performs
controls in a smoother way.
If both levers are brought to position “0”, an auto-
matic return to the “Digging” mode is executed after
4 seconds.
If the “Levelling” mode is to be switched off out of
hydraulic control lever movement (with no waiting
time), press button (1) again.
58
CONFIGURATION OF SETTING LEVELLING

MODE
Save levelling
The “Levelling” mode remains activated in perma-
nence after having been switched in with push-but-
ton (1) if this mode has been preconfigured on the
display.
If the machine is shut off while in the “Levelling”
mode, this mode is active again after new starting.
grey background. Depress “set” button.
on “LEVELLING SETTING”. Depress “set” button.
Press the arrow buttons until the control “SAVE
LEVELLING” appears. Depress the “set” button. 59
Confirm the changes with the arrow buttons or leave

the existing setting. Depress the “set” button.
old setting by depressing an arrow buttons.
3-39
SECTION 3
Fine levelling
The “Fine levelling” mode can permits even more
sensitive working. In this case, the maximum equip-
ment speed is no longer available for boom and dip-
per movements.
This working mode must have been configured
beforehand on the display.
grey background. Depress “set” button.
on “LEVELLING SETTING”. Depress “set” button.
Press the arrow buttons until the control “FINE LEV-
ELLING” appears. Depress the “set” button.
Confirm the changes with the arrow buttons or leave
the existing setting. Depress the “set” button.
old setting by depressing an arrow buttons.
MACHINE
LEVELLING
BASIC SETTING
SPEED LIMITATION
LEVELLING
PARAMETERS NOT
UPDATED. RE-TEST.
PRESS ANY KEY LEVELLING LEVELLING
NO SAVED LEVELLING SAVED LEVELLING
FINE LEVELLING FINE LEVELLING

Updating performed
YE by ESX?
LEVELLING LEVELLING
FINE LEVELLING FINE LEVELLING

Save changes?
F34127
60
3-40
HYDRAULIC DAMPING
By means of the hydraulic damping, the working
movements acquire smoothness. Abrupt move-
ments of the hydraulic control levers and travel
pedal are converted into smooth machine move-
ments.
The controls of boom, dipper, bucket and travel are
in this way suited in the best way to the operator’s
ability and to the machine’s operational state.
For instance:
- low damping:
exact and progressive sequence of the hydraulic
control levers movements, during building and
craning works;
- high damping:
smooth power boost or braking during the transfer
movements.
PARAMETERS SETTING
MACHINE
MACHINE MACHINE MACHINE MACHINE
DAMPING HAMMER LEVELLING

SPEED LIMITATION
SWING POWER ROTARY CUTTER BASIC SETTING A
AUTO POWER BOOST SHEARS BUCKET
F34157
61
3-41
SECTION 3
MACHINE LEVELLING
DAMPING
PARAMETERS NOT UPDATED.
RE-TEST.
SWING POWER
AUTO POWER BOOST PRESS ANY KEY
DAMPING DAMPING
BUCKET ALL STANDARD VALUES Save changes
BOOM
TRAVEL
DIPPER
SOFT SOFT SOFT
TRAVEL TRAVEL TRAVEL
STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD
STRONG STRONG STRONG
F34132
62
NOTE: by pressing “ALL STANDARD VALUES”, all The selected assy is now confirmed with button
devices will set to DEFAULT value. In such a case “set”.
the word “STANDARD” will be shown under the
By depressing the buttons with the upward arrow,
device name.
you can set for each machine assy four different
In operating mode depress repeatedly the arrow damping adjustments, spacing from soft damping to
button, until on main menu appears “MACHINE” firm damping. Both have to be confirmed with button
inside of a frame. Confirm with “set” button. “set”. If the selected assy is set or the standard
Depress the arrow buttons repeatedly until the bar value is set, under the assy reference appears for
is on “DAMPING”. Confirm with “set” button. instance BOOM, the word “STANDARD”. If a differ-
ent setting from the standard value is defined, the
The arrows on the right side of display indicate that word “STANDARD” does not appear.
other sub-menus can be recalled.
Confirming with “set” button, the main menu
By depressing the button with the upward arrow (⇑), “MACHINE” is recalled. First of all you are though
you scroll to main menu. asked to memorize the settings. By depressing the
Confirming with “set” button, the sub-menu “DAMP- button with the upward arrow (⇑), the setting is NOT
ING” is recalled. saved. By pressing button “set”, the setting is mem-
orized and the modifications becomes active.
By depressing the buttons with the upward arrow
(⇑) or downward arrow (⇓), you can select following In the sub-menu “TRAVEL” the action of the travel
machine assemblies “set”: control piston is damped. According to this setting,
and with the pedal a soft or firm travel operation of
- BOOM
the machine is started.
- DIPPER
- BUCKET
- TRAVEL
3-42
STABILIZATION OF THE MACHINE

The standard version of the machine does not per-
mit independent control of the stabilizers. This
means that the stabilizer legs are lifted and lowered
in common. An independent control of the stabiliz-
ers is available as an option in stabilization variants.
The openings for switches not needed are covered
up, depending on the equipment options.
STABILIZERS AND BLADE ACTIVATION

Bring left hydraulic control lever (1) to neutral posi-
tion. By means of button (2) switch over operation to
“Stabilizers/blade”. The buzzer sounds intermit-
tently, until this operation is activated.
When the function “Stabilizers/blade” is activated,
the dipper is not operational.
INDEPENDENT STABILIZER CONTROL
(OPTION)
After installing the option, the stabilizers can be
moved up and down by depressing push-buttons
(C) and (D) in the left hydraulic control lever (1),
without making use of the proportional control.
63
To activate this operating mode, the switch face
without symbol (3), must be pressed.
64
The stabilizing cylinders move only as long as the
push-button is pressed. The speed of the up and
down movement is fixed. button (A)
As long as the function is active, it is not possible to
activate the “Power Boost” function.
Automatic addition of the power boost function in button (B)
power levels 1 - 3 and during travelling as well as of
the Power Boost setting for some movements of the
equipment remains available.
As long as the function is active, the proportional button (C)
control of a levelling blade, if any, is not available.
button (D)
3-43
SECTION 3
Standard stabilizers Independent stabilizer

Stabilizers options Blade
control control
lowering at the rear

push hydraulic control
lever forward (without
switches A, B, C and
D)
raising at the rear

pull hydraulic control
lever backward (with-
out switches A, B, C
and D)
lowering at the rear lowering at the rear

push left hydraulic control
- rear right stabilizer:
lever forward (without
activate button (C)
switches A, B, C and D)
- rear left stabilizer:
activate button (D)
and push forward the
left hydraulic control
lever
raising at the rear raising at the rear

pull left hydraulic control
lever backward (without
activate button (C)
switches A, B, C and D)
activate button (D)
and pull backward the
lever
lowering at the rear lowering at the rear lowering in the front

rear right and left stabiliz- activate button (B) and
- front right stabilizer:
ers at the same time: push forward the left
activate button (C)
activate button (D) and hydraulic control lever
push forward the left - rear left stabilizer:
hydraulic control lever activate button (D)
lever
raising at the rear raising at the rear raising in the front

rear right and left stabiliz- activate button (B) and
ers at the same time: pull backward the left
activate button (C)
activate button (D) and hydraulic control lever
pull backward the left - rear left stabilizer:
hydraulic control lever activate button (D)
lever
3-44
lowering in the front and lowering in the front

in the back and in the back
push the left hydraulic
control lever forward
activate button (A)
(without switches A, B, C
and D all stabilizers lower - front left stabilizer:
at the same time) activate button (B)
activate button (C)
and/or
- activate button (D)
lever
lifting in the front and in lifting in the front and

the back in the back
push the left hydraulic
control lever backward
activate button (A)
(without switches A, B, C
and D all stabilizers lift at - front left stabilizer:
the same time) activate button (B)
activate button (C)
activate button (D)
lever
3-45
SECTION 3
WORKING WITH STANDARD BUCKET OR CLAMSHELL
65
UPPER STRUCTURE SLEWING

To slew the upper structure to the right:
Shift the left hydraulic control lever (1) to the right.
To slew the upper structure to the left:
Shift the left hydraulic control lever (1) to the left.
RAISING AND LOWERING THE BOOM

To raise the boom:
Pull the right hydraulic control lever (2) back.
To lower the boom:
Push the right hydraulic control lever (2) forward.
3-46
EXTENDING AND RETRACTING THE DIPPER

First switch over to dipper function with push-button
(6).
To extend the dipper:
Push the left hydraulic control lever (1) forward.
To retract the dipper:
Pull the left hydraulic control lever (1) back.
FILLING AND DUMPING THE BUCKET

To fill the bucket:
Shift the right hydraulic control lever (2) to the left.
To bump the bucket:
Shift the right hydraulic control lever (2) to the right.
OPENING AND CLOSING OF THE CLAMSHELL

(OPTIONAL)
To open the clamshell:
Shift the right hydraulic control lever (2) to the right.
To close the clamshell:
Shift the right hydraulic control lever (2) to the left.
ADJUSTING THE OPENING AND CLOSING

SPEED OF THE CLAMSHELL (OPTIONAL)
Activate the clamshell switch on the left panel. The
clamshell opening and closing speeds now corre-
spond to the values preset on the display.
CLAMSHELL ROTATION (OPTIONAL)

To turn the clamshell to the right:
Depress button (8) of right hydraulic control lever
(2).
To turn the clamshell to the left:
Depress button (5) of left hydraulic control lever (1).
AUTO POWER BOOST ACTIVATION

Depress button (3) of left hydraulic control lever (1).
HORN ACTIVATION
Depress button (7) of right hydraulic control lever
(2), the horn releases an acoustic signal.
3-47
SECTION 3
WORKING STAGES
If possible, working operations should always be
carried out by pulling the dipper. When digging, use
the retracting forces of the dipper and work with
shallow cutting angles of the bucket.
Steep bucket angles during digging reduce the per-
formance.
66
Make smooth and regular movements with the
boom. Raising and lowering of the boom must
always be initiated slowly and smoothly. When the
boom is stopped abruptly, the machine is subjected
to heavy shock loads, this results in excessive wear
and damage.
67
Hold the teeth of the bucket in the direction of dig-
ging. This reduces the digging resistance and possi-
ble damage of the teeth.
68
3-48
The maximum digging forces are produced at

angles ß at approximately 165°.
If the machine is to develop maximum digging
forces, digging must be done slowly. The dipper cyl-
inder must have the longest possible lever arm.
69
To remove sand and soil adhering to the bucket, the
dipper must be stretched out to nearly horizontal
position and the bucket be brought into dumping
position. If sand and soil do not drop out of the
bucket by gravity alone, the corresponding control
lever must be moved several times forwards and
backwards. Do not move the bucket cylinder against
block, if strong shaking of the bucket is needed to
remove adhering soil.
70
Stop the slewing movement slowly. To stop the slew-
ing movement, release the slewing control lever
before reaching the place where work is to be done
or material to be dumped.
71
3-49
SECTION 3
Soil levelling. For filling and levelling the soil after

the excavation work, the bucket must be moved hor-
izontally forwards and backwards.
To level the soil, material has to be shoved or raked
with the bucket.
The levelling operation must be performed by
extending the dipper slowly, by raising the boom
slightly and then, when the dipper crosses the verti-
cal position, by lowering slowly the boom. Now
move the machine so that the bucket movement is
held horizontal.
For the soil levelling in the opposite direction, per-
form the above mentioned operation in reverse 72
order.
For the working operations described above, sev-
eral bucket movements can be combined. By corre-
sponding actuation of the boom control lever, it is
possible to cut a slope and to level it at the same
time.
3-50
OPERATING THE MACHINE WITH COLD WEATHER

FUEL
Refill the fuel tank after each working day to prevent
the formation of condensation and the entry of water
into the fuel system.
To prevent the formation of crystals (-2 °C (28.4 °F))
use a low temperature fuel or mix a protective fluid
with your fuel.
LUBRICATING OIL
Select oil viscosity (SAE grade) according to ambi-
ent temperature before starting engine.
Increase oil change frequency when operating
below -10 °C (14 °F).
BATTERY
Efficient cold starting requires that battery is well-
charged.
Starting limit temperatures can be lowered by 4 or
5 °C (39.2 or 41 °F) by heating batteries up to about
+20 °C (68 °F) (to do so, remove batteries and store
in warm place).
COOLANT
When temperature approaches to 0 °C (32 °F) it is
necessary, to avoid the hazard of freezing, to check
whether the cooling circuit is filled with anti-freezing
mixture: otherwise, replace the coolant of radiator
with this mixture.
We recommend to use AGRIFLU coolant liquid, see
in the table hereunder the mixture percentages
according to outer temperature:
Outer temperature AGRIFLU Water

(up to ...)
- 8 °C (17.6 °F) 20% 80%

73
- 15 °C (5 °F) 30% 70%
- 25 °C (-13 °F) 40% 60%
- 35 °C (-31 °F) 50% 50%
3-51
SECTION 3
COLD START - PREHEATING

The machine can be equipped with a preheating
device.
By means of this system and using winter grade fuel, 1
resistant up to -15 °C (5 °F), the operation is safe up
to a temperature of about -25 °C (-13 °F).
If with temperatures lower than -25 °C (-13 °F), fuel
should still be so thick to prevent the engine from
starting, bring the machine for a certain time, into a
warm environment. 2
Fuel additives (fluidizing) and similar products have
not to be mixed up with diesel oil at all.
3 4
With temperatures (engine coolant) between -1,5 °C F34468
(29.3 °F) and -28 °C (-18.4 °F), the preheating stage 74

starts about 1-2 seconds after the setting of the igni-
tion key to position “I”. The lamp (1) on display lights
up for about 10-15 seconds. As soon as the lamp
turns off, bring key to position “II” and start the
engine. When the preheating stage is ended (lamp
(1) turns off), to activate the post-heating stage in
stand-by, still 30 seconds are available for the
engine start and for the activation of the post-heat-
ing. If this is not the case, for the starting stage are
still available from 0 to 15 seconds, for the heating
of the intake air.
In order to activate the post-heating phase, the
engine should necessarily be started within a limit
time of 40-45 seconds from ignition activation.
The post-heating stage begins after the loading volt-
age for alternator is available. It lasts between 60
and 120 seconds according to the temperature.
To obtain the best cold start performance, the
engine should be started (ignition key turned to posi-
tion “II”) immediately after the turning off of the lamp
(1).
If the engine temperature is higher than 10 °C
(50 °F), after start-up, the engine turns idle for 3
seconds.
If the engine temperature is lower than 10 °C
(50 °F), after start-up, the engine turns for 3 sec-
onds between 900 and 1400 rpm (depending on
temperature).
After that and in both cases, the engine sets auto-
matically on rpm of power level 2.
3-52
During engine preheating, the display shows every

3 seconds and for 1 second long, the indication that
the preheating stage is still ongoing. The preheating
degree reached by the engine, is shown as a bar-
graph, placed horizontally.
During the preheating stage, the power level can be
set with arrows (3) and (4). Up to power level 5, this
setting becomes active also during the preheating
phase. By setting the power levels 6 and 7, they are
activated only after the engine has reached the
service temperature.
AFTER THE ENGINE START - PREHEATING

The oil contained in the hydraulic system activates
the cylinders and the different hydraulic motors.
Cold hydraulic oil is viscous. In such a case, some
machine functions as travel and rotation move-
ments, are performed more slowly than with hot oil.
S WARNING S
It is absolutely forbidden to force the oil heating,
because this procedure can damage the machine
remarkably.
S WARNING S
With very low temperatures, the hydraulic system
can reduce the machine speed. For this reason we
recommend the outmost attention before the sys-
tem has reached the service temperature, to avoid
the hazard of injuries.
It is vital that oil inside of the machine hydraulic sys-

tem is brought to the right operating temperature
correctly. For this reason, to bring oil to service tem-
perature, you have to observe following conditions:
Start the engine and let it run idle and at low speed
for five minutes.
Let the machine perform a several number of move-
ments like lifting, extension/retraction, slewing and
travel, to allow the hot hydraulic oil to reach all cylin-
ders and the motor.
Carry out these movements until the hydraulic sys-
tem of the machine reaches the service tempera-
ture.
3-53
SECTION 3
OPERATING THE MACHINE WITH HOT WEATHER

Air density decreases as altitude or ambient temper-
ature increases. As a result of this, the engine’s
maximum output, quality of exhaust gas, tempera-
ture level and, in extreme cases, starting behaviour,
are impaired. Engine can be used at altitudes up to
1000 metres (3280.83 ft) and temperatures up to
30 °C (86 °F) for mobile operations. If the engine is
to operate under more severe conditions (at higher
altitudes or temperatures), it will be necessary to
reduce the injected fuel quantity and thus engine
power.
75
Observe the following recommendations:

Maintain the correct level of coolant solution in the
coolant reservoir.
Check the condition of the cooler cap before start-
ing. Replace the cap if necessary.
Clean the radiator and the engine carefully.
Check the condition of the alternator and blower
belt.
Use lubricants with the recommended degree of vis-
cosity.
Use a suitable coolant.
3-54
MACHINE RECOVERY AND TOWING

Tow the machine only with a tow rod.
The tow-rod must be free from damage. It must be
dimensioned in such a way that the calculated
breaking load is equal to three times the tractive
power of the towing machine.
The towing vehicle must have adequate tractive and
braking power.
Drive slowly, carefully and smoothly.
All persons must keep clear of the tow-rod.
Tow only if the brakes and the steering of the
machine are functioning properly and if the machine
cannot be transported otherwise.
Tow defective machines only as far as necessary to
recover the machine from hazardous areas.
After the recovery, the machine must be secured
against inadvertent movements and unauthorized
starting.
Have the machine repaired before transporting it
over greater distances or load it onto a transport
vehicle.
The machine is not suitable for towing trailers or
other vehicles; this would result in damage to the
axles and gearbox. The tow coupling is designed
solely for towing or recovering vehicles from hazard-
ous areas or for lashing purposes on transport vehi-
cles.
GEARBOX DISENGAGEMENT
Disengage the drive in the travel gearbox by turning
the hex-head bolt (2) off about 180° to the right or
the left until the index ball is felt to engage.
The connection between travel gearbox and the
axles is now interrupted.
76
3-55
SECTION 3
DURING RECOVERY AND TOWING

Limit the hazard area as large as possible.
Proceed with caution and slowly.
When the engine is running, the service brake is
active.
When the engine is not running, the service brake is
only partially active.
The legal requirements are fulfilled even with the
engine stationary, a filled brake pressure accumula-
tor permits about 6 to 8 braking cycles until standstill
of the machine.
AFTER RECOVERY AND TOWING

Secure the machine against inadvertent move-
ments.
Press the bucket into the soil.
Protect the machine against unauthorized starting.
Re-engage the drive in the travel gearbox by turning
the hex-head bolt (2) off about 180° to the right or
the left until the index ball is felt to engage.
The connection between travel gearbox and the
axles is now restored.
SECURE THE MACHINE

For transport purposes, the machine must be tied
down in front and at the rear with two tying chains
each.
Depending on the existing tying points, working
equipment or stabilization variant, the following pre-
scriptions / spacings are applicable for tying down of
the machine.
FASTENING POINT A IN FRONT, WITHOUT

BLADE AND STABILIZERS
Tie down the machine to both sides (not crosswise)
at the outer holes using heavy-duty shackles.
Shackles
Form A / DIN 82101, tensile load 8500, 9500 or
12000 kg (18700, 20900 or 26400 lb).
Tie-down chains
Ø 13 mm (0.51 in) and an admissible tensile load of
10000 daN (22480.9 lbf) (10 t) / EN 12195-3.
77
3-56
FASTENING POINT A LEVELLING BLADE IN

FRONT
NOTA: always drive the machine onto the low-bed
trailer in forward gear. Lower the levelling blade for
transport and for fastening onto the loading plat-
form.
Tie down the machine at the central fastening point,
using heavy-duty shackle.
Shackle
12000 kg (18700, 20900 or 26400 lb).
Tie-down chains
10000 daN (22480.9 lbf) (10 t) / EN 12195-3.
78
FASTENING POINT A STABILIZERS IN FRONT

WITH TIE-DOWN BRACKET
Shackles
12000 kg (18700, 20900 or 26400 lb).
Tie-down chains
10000 daN (22480.9 lbf) (10 t) / EN 12195-3.
The fastening points on the loading platform must
be at least 2 m apart.
Models Tying distance at 79
450 - 1000 mm
WX 145 - WX 165 - WX 185
(17.72 - 39.37 in)
3-57
SECTION 3
B FASTENING POINT, LEVELLING BLADE IN

THE REAR
NOTA: always drive the machine onto the low-bed
trailer in forward gear. Lower the levelling blade for
transport and for fastening onto the loading plat-
form.
Tie down the machine at the left and right fastening
holes, to the respective side (not crosswise) using
heavy-duty shackles.
Shackles
12000 kg (18700, 20900 or 26400 lb).
Tie-down chains
Ø 13 mm (0.51 in) and an admissible tensile load of 80
10000 daN (22480.9 lbf) (10 t) / EN 12195-3.
FASTENING POINT B, STABILIZERS IN THE

REAR, WITH TIE-DOWN BRACKET
Shackles
12000 kg (18700, 20900 or 26400 lb).
Tie-down chains
10000 daN (22480.9 lbf) (10 t) / EN 12195-3.
The fastening points on the loading platform must
be at least 2 m (6.56 ft) apart.
Models Tying distance b 81
1500 - 2650 mm
WX 145 - WX 165 - WX 185
(59.05 - 104.33 in)
FASTENING POINT B, WITHOUT BLADE AND

STABILIZERS
Shackles
12000 kg (18700, 20900 or 26400 lb).
Tie-down chains
10000 daN (22480.9 lbf) (10 t) / EN 12195-3.
82
3-58
WORKING ATTACHMENT
The machine can be equipped with various working Incorrect operation of the machine or the attach-
equipments. Components can be combined in vari- ments may cause life threatening situations.
ous ways for optimum adaptation of the equipment
Tools, hoists, slings, trestles and other devices must
to the specific application.
be in a safe and reliable state of operation.
Operate the machine only with the equipment and
Metal splinters may cause injury when attachment
component combinations expressly approved by
pins are being driven in or out. A brass or copper
the Manufacturer.
mandrel should therefore be used for this purpose,
Equipments from other manufacturers may be and goggles must be worn.
assembled and put into operation only if in compli-
At the end of work, place equipment on the ground
ance with Machine Directive 89/392 EEC and only if
in such a way that no movements can be made if
the Manufacturer Declaration of Conformity of
mechanical or hydraulic connections become
equipment as well as the Manufacturer Declaration
detached.
of Compatibility of the machine are available.
When working in jointed areas, block off the joints.
Assembly work may be carried out only by operat-
Remove the blocks on finishing work.
ing or maintenance personnel who have the neces-
sary know-how at their disposal. Secure any equipment or component which is to be
mounted or dismantled, or whose position is to be
If such know-how is lacking, meticulous instruction
changed, with hoists or appropriate slinging/sup-
must be given by experienced personnel.
porting devices to prevent them from moving, slip-
Only such persons may start up the machine during ping or falling inadvertently.
assembly work in order to adjust the attachments.
3-59
SECTION 3

On this attachment between the lower boom (3) and
positioning boom (1) there is a further articulation
point (2).
By means of a further hydraulic cylinder, boom
adjusting cylinder (4) the placing boom can be
adjusted (1).
The adjusting equipment offers advantages both
during travelling and during the work:
- enlarging the working range;
- better attachment mobility;
- easy transport of machine on trailers;
- observance of prescribed dimensions during road 83
travel.
WORKING WITH BOOM ADJUSTING

EQUIPMENT
By depressing pedal (1) forward, the adjusting cylin-
der retracts.
By depressing pedal (1) backward, the adjusting cyl-
inder extends.
With a specific menu, it is possible to suit the work-
ing speed of the adjusting cylinder to the operator
personal requirements and particularly to the work
requirements. During this operation the pedal con-
trol radius is adapted (1).
84
MACHINE TRANSPORT WITH BOOM

ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT
The best transport height, when the machine is
loaded on the trailer is achieved with:
- the adjusting cylinder completely retracted;
- the digging cylinder completely extended;
- the bucket cylinder completely extended.
The lifting cylinders have to be retracted so that the
attachment can lay as far as possible on the trailer.
3-60
SETTING OF BOOM ADJUSTING EQUIPMENT

With this menu, it is possible to suit the working
speed of the adjusting cylinder to the operator per-
sonal requirements and particularly to the work
requirements. During this operation the pedal con-
trol radius is adapted (1).
The setting, described hereunder, influence the
retraction and the extension of the adjusting cylin-
der.
In the working mode, depress repeatedly an arrow
button until “MACHINE” appears in the lower part of
the display and the machine symbol is marked by a
frame. Depress “set” button.
To get back to the “MACHINE” menu, depress the
button with the upward arrow (⇑) or downward arrow
button (⇓), until the beginning or the end of the dis-
play selection is reached. When scrolling is contin-
ued on reaching the beginning or the end of the list,
the program returns to the next higher menu. The
return to the next higher menu is automatic if the
buttons are not pressed for a prolonged period.
MACHINE

SPEED LIMITATION
F34157
85
3-61
SECTION 3
Depress the arrow buttons repeatedly until the bar By selecting the “ADJUSTMENT” menu, by means
is on “SPEED LIMITATION”. Depress “set” button. of arrow buttons you can set the working speed of
the adjusting cylinder, by shifting of 10% percent-
On the “SPEED LIMITATION” menu the bar back-
ages in a range between 0% and 100%. Depress
ground is grey.
“set” button to confirm the selected value.
By means of the arrow buttons you can shift the
frame on the required setting and activate the “set” Now you are asked to memorize the settings. By
button. pressing button “set”, the new setting is memorized
and the modification becomes active. By depressing
Following settings are available: the button with the upward arrow (⇑), the new set-
- ON ting is not memorized and the modification is not
active.
- OFF
After that the upper menu is recalled. Now the set-
- STANDARD ting can be repeated or you can return to main
- ADJUSTMENT menu “MACHINE” by means of arrow buttons.
MACHINE
LEVELLING
SWING POWER
SPEED LIMITATION
THE PARAMETERS HAVE
NOT BEEN UPDATED, RE-
TRY
SPEED LIMITATION SPEED LIMITATION
STANDARD
ADJUSTMENT THE TEMPORARY SYMBOL

WILL APPEAR IF A
DIFFERENT LIMIT OTHER
THAN DEFAULT IS
SELECTED
PLACING BOOM PLACING BOOM

SPEED SPEED SAVE CHANGES?
25 30
STANDARD STANDARD
F34158
86
3-62
WORKING ATTACHMENT WITH OFF-

SET BOOM
This attachment is equipped with a joint (1) on the
monoboom (2) allowing to turn the front attachment
section laterally. The machine can now operate
without problems directly in front of walls, corners or
escarpments or under other conditions of confined
space.
During the creation of a flat surface, the soil must be
levelled exclusively in direction of digging. Never
use the bucket as a “broom or a hammer” (for dem-
olition work for instance). The working attachment is
not designed for big efforts, applied laterally; this
would cause its damage.
To increase the machine balance, position the stabi-
87
lizers and the blade in the proper way. Always oper-
ate with stabilizers feet and blade lowered. If the
machine is not equipped with stabilizers, block the
floating axle. In such a case pay particular attention
during operation, because the overturning danger is
remarkably higher. Avoid to exceed the load carry-
ing capacity limit.
WORKING WITH OFF-SET BOOM

When the machine is equipped with off-set boom,
pedal (3) takes over the control of slewing.
By depressing pedal (3) in the upper/front section,
the off-set boom turn to the right.
By depressing pedal (3) in the lower/rear section,
the off-set boom turn to the left.
88
MACHINE TRANSPORT WITH OFF-SET BOOM

The best transport height, when the machine is
loaded on the trailer is achieved with:
- off-set boom retracted;
- the digging cylinder completely extended;
- the bucket cylinder completely extended.
The lifting cylinders have to be retracted so that the
attachment can lay as far as possible on the trailer.
89
3-63
SECTION 3
BUCKET
OPENING/CLOSING SPEED PARAMETERS
SETTING
In the working mode, depress an arrow button until
“MACHINE” appears in the lower part of the display
and the machine symbol is marked by a frame.
Depress “set” button.
Depress the arrow buttons until the bar is on
“BUCKET”. Depress “set” button.
button with the upward arrow (⇑) or downward arrow
button (⇓), until the beginning or the end of the dis-
play selection is reached. If, after reaching the end
or the beginning, the display scrolls in the same
direction, you return to the higher menu. If the but-
tons are not depressed for a prolonged period, the
return to the next higher menu is automatic.
Confirm with “set” button, the sub-menu “BUCKET”
is recalled. For the clamshell opening and closing a
percentage digit is shown so as to mark the relevant
speed. The delivery ex-works is performed with the
relevant 50% setting.
MACHINE

SPEED LIMITATION
F34157
90
3-64
Position of the tens

By depressing button “set”, is highlighted with grey
background the first digit (tens position) for the
“OPENING”. By means of the arrow buttons you can
activate or deactivate this option and confirm the
selection with “set” button.
By confirming, the grey background sets to next
digit.
Position of the units
By means of the arrow buttons the digit can be mod-
ified, as described, and confirm the selection with
“set” button.
By confirming the units position, the first digit (tens
position) is highlighted on grey background for
“CLOSURE”. The setting procedure is repeated as
described.
When both digits for “CLOSURE” are confirmed,
you return to menu higher level.
MACHINE
LEVELLING
BASIC SETTING
A
BUCKET
BUCKET SPEED BUCKET SPEED Save changes?

4x
OPENING: 50% OPENING: 50%
CLOSING: CLOSING:
50% 50%
91
3-65
SECTION 3
BUCKET DISASSEMBLY AND

ASSEMBLY
Place the working equipment on the ground.
Shim the bucket bottom.
It could overturn, when the pins are removed.
Unscrew the screws (2) and (4).
Take out pins (1) and (3).
92
Raise the working attachment slightly (5).
Now the bucket (6) is free.
Before assembly pins and bushings have to be
cleaned and protected against corrosion.
Assembly the new bucket in reverse sequence.
93
CORROSION PROTECTION FOR PINS AND

JOINTS
All pins and bearings (bushings and hubs) of the
working equipment or in equipment components
must be treated with anti-corrosive agent before fit-
ting:
- easy assembly and disassembly;
- protects against rust, oxidation and similar wear;
- prevents seizing and fretting corrosion in non-
moving parts of bearings.
Clean off grease, oil, dirt and corrosion protection
agents from pins and bearings using white spirit or
diesel fuel.
Rust patches must be thoroughly removed, if any.
All components must be sand polished and dry.
Spray or apply a thin layer of product with a brush
on pins and bearings. Pin shafts and bearings must
be completely covered by the protective layer.
If the protection layer of a pin already treated is
damaged, these areas must be touched up before
fitting the part.
3-66
BUCKETS TEETH - CHANGE
S WARNING S
Nobody must stay in the way of the tooth or tooth
safety latch that has to be extracted.
The safety latch or the tooth can suddenly be
ejected when driven out and hit persons.
Metal splinters may cause injury.
Wear your personal protective equipment and gog-
gles.
Drive out tooth safety latch (1) using a piece of

smooth metal or of hard wood (2).
94
To drive out the tooth (3) from housing (4), cover the
same with a piece of smooth metal or of hard wood
(2).
95
Clean inside of housing and remove dirt and corro-
sion.
Fit new tooth (3) into the housing (4).
96
3-67
SECTION 3
The tooth must be in contact with the housing

(arrow).
Drive in new safety latch (1) into the port (5) of the
housing (4). The latch can be driven into the hous-
ing from either side.
97
3-68
SECTION 4
SUPPLIES AND SERVICE CHART
Case International Quantity (litres) (gal)

Component to refill Suggested Product Viscosity
Standard Standard WX 145 WX 165 WX 185
Water and liquid
AKCELA PREMIUM
26 25 30
Cooling system ORGANIC - - -
(6.80) (6.60) (7.90)
ANTIFREEZE
50% and 50%
TUTELA
Windscreen washer 5
PROFESSIONAL - - -
system (1.30)
SC35
Fuel system 270 360
Decanted and filtered (71.10) 210 (94.80)
- - -
Fuel tank diesel fuel 250 (55.30) 330
(65.80) (86.90)
Oil AKCELA No. 1 API CI-4 SAE 16 13.2 16
Engine (with filter) MS 1121
ENGINE OIL ACEA E7 15W40 (4.20) (3.50) (4.20)
Hydraulic system Oil AKCELA AW MS 1216 MIL-H-24459 ISO VG 68 260 250 260
HYDRAULIC FLUID DIN51524T2 (68.5) (65.80) (68.5)
68 HV
Hydraulic oil tank or ISO VG 46 140 170 140
oil PANOLIN HLP (36.90) (44.80) (36.90)
SYNTH 46
Oil AKCELA API GL5 SAE 3.5 5.5 3.5
Slewing gearbox AXLEPOWER MS 1316
MIL-L-2105D 80W-90 (0.90) (1.40) (0.90)
80W-90
Front steering axle:
- axle body Oil AKCELA 11 11 11.5
SAE
TRANSAXLE FLUID API GL4 (2.90) (2.90) (3.00)
20W-40
- travel gearboxes 20W-40 2x2.5 2x2.5 2x1.5
(2x0.7) (2x0.7) (2x0.40)
Rear rigid axle:
- axle body 7.8 7.8 12
Oil AKCELA (2.10) (2.10) (3.20)
SAE
- gear box TRANSAXLE FLUID API GL4 2.4 2.4 2.4
20W-40
20W-40 (0.60) (0.60) (0.60)
- travel gearboxes 2x2 2x2 2x1
(2x0.5) (2x0.5) (2x0.30)
Air conditioning
system: R 134a - - - 950 g
- coolant (2 lb)
Greasing of grease Grease AKCELA
251H EP-M NLGI2 - - - -
nipples MOLY GREASE
4-1
SECTION 4
FUEL
Use commercially available diesel fuel with less than
0.5% sulphur content. If the sulphur content is
higher, oil change intervals should be reduced. The
following fuel specifications / standards are
approved:
- DIN EN 590
- BS 2869
- ASTM D 975-96; 1-D and 2-D
- NATO Code F-54 / F-34 / F-44 and XF 63
Exhaust emission values which may be determined
in the case of type approval tests always refer to the
fuels prescribed by the authorities for the type
approval test.
WINTER-GRADE FUEL
Waxing may occur at low temperatures, clogging the
fuel system and reducing engine efficiency. If the
ambient temperature is less than 0 °C (32 °F), win-
ter-grade fuel, suitable down to -15 °C (5 °F), should
be used; this fuel is usually available from filling sta-
tions well in advance of the cold months. Diesel fuel
containing additives (Super diesel) is often on sale
as well, for use down to -20 °C (-4 °F).
- At temperatures below -15 °C to -20 °C (5 °F to
-4 °F), petroleum should be added to the diesel
fuel. The relevant percentages are given in the
adjacent diagram.
If summer-grade diesel fuel must be used at temper-
atures below 0 °C (32 °F), up to 60% petroleum can
be added (see diagram).
In most cases, adequate resistance to cold can also
be obtained by adding a fluidizing additive for winter
operation.
Legend:
I Summer-grade diesel fuel
II Winter-grade diesel fuel
A Outer temperature
B Percentage of petroleum
S CAUTION S
Diesel fuels must never be mixed with gasoline
(normal and super grades). 1
4-2
HYDRAULIC OIL
For the first refilling, Manufacturer uses PANOLIN
HLP SYNTH 46.
Hydraulic oil is not soluble in water; this can gener-
ate condensate water in the hydraulic oil tank.
Therefore drain condensate water periodically, par-
ticularly after a long downtime period. Dispose of
drained liquid as used oil.
VISCOSITY
Generally, multi-grade oils shall be used. In closed
heated rooms at temperatures > 5 °C (41 °F), also
single-grade oils can be used. As the viscosity of
lube oil is dependent on temperature, the choice of
SAE grade should be governed by the ambient tem-
perature prevailing at the engine operating site.
Optimum operating behaviour will be attained if you
take the accompanying oil viscosity diagram as a
guide. Should the temperature fall temporarily below
the limits of the SAE grade selected, cold starting
may be affected but the engine will not be damaged.
The application of a certain oil at higher tempera-
tures than those indicated in the chart, should be as
far as possible limited, in order to keep wear to a
minimum.
Synthetic lube oils feature an improved temperature
and oxidation stability.
4-3
SECTION 4
BIODEGRADABLE HYDRAULIC OIL

The hydraulic system of this machine can be filled at
with environmentally compatible, biodegradable
hydraulic fluid too (special equipment). Stickers with
corresponding instructions are then attached to the
machine.
This biodegradable hydraulic fluid “PANOLIN HLP
SYNTH 46” has been tested by the Manufacturer
and approved for application on the machines.
The biodegradable oil must be analyzed every 500
hours of work, to verify that it keeps its features.
With special tools (the hydraulic hammer for
instance) the analysis should be performed every
250 working hours.
Oil can be drawn for analysis by means of the sam-
ple-kit and the relevant instruction delivered by the
Dealer.
The sample should then be sent by the customer to
PANOLIN AG., that will carry out the necessary
checks. The Dealer will care to inform the customer
in case the oil has lost the necessary features for
use.
NOTE: should the Dealer inform the customer that
oil has exceeded the service limits, this must be
replaced. If this indication is not observed, the war-
ranty may become void and null and the machine
may get damaged.
A change from mineral hydraulic oil to this biode-
gradable hydraulic fluid can be performed at a later
date. Environmentally compatible biodegradable
hydraulic fluid must not be simply poured away as
normal waste. It must be disposed of in the same
way as any used oil!
If hydraulic fluid seeps into the ground, the machine
Owner and the Competent Authorities must be
informed. The use of PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46 is
restricted only to hydraulic systems.
Do not mix this hydraulic liquid with oils of other
makes; this kind of mixture will decrease the oil bio-
degradability.
4-4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
No inspection and maintenance work may be car-
ried out until the Operator’s Manual has been read
and understood.
S CAUTION S
There is a risk of serious injury if maintenance or
repairs are not performed correctly. If you do not
understand the maintenance procedures, consult
your Dealer.
Any modification to this machine without prior

authorization could cause serious injury. Do not
make any modifications without authorization. Con-
sult your Dealer.
Respect the maintenance intervals prescribed by
this Manual carefully.
IMPORTANT: if you use the machine under particu-
larly severe conditions (dusty or corrosive atmos-
phere, etc.) reduce the intervals between
maintenance operations.
MACHINE SAFETY
Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work
the machine must be secured as follows:
- park the machine on flat and firm surface;
- place the working equipment on the ground;
- lock the upper structure;
- shut off the engine;
- move both hydraulic control levers in all directions,
to release possible residual pressure inside of the
hydraulic system;
- disconnect the pilot control;
- set the ignition key to position “0” and pull it out;
- secure machine with wheel chocks to avoid its 3
rolling or overturning.
MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
Inspection and maintenance personnel must have
the necessary know-how on the inspection and
maintenance of this or comparable machines.
The necessary know-how can be acquired in sev-
eral days’ instruction, for instance by a specialist fit-
ter or by attending a training course.
4-5
SECTION 4
WORKING HOURS / INTERVALS

A condition for the Manufacturer to take over the
costs of the warranty service, is the regular perform-
ance of all inspection, maintenance and repair oper-
ations prescribed, as instructed by this Operator’s
Manual and the use of genuine spares.
During the warranty period, all inspection works,
maintenance and repair, with exception for the daily
and weekly maintenance, have to be performed by
the After-sales service or by an authorized work-
shop.
To ensure the correct operation and life of the
machine and of its components, a time schedule
has been established, to perform all maintenance
service that has to be done.
The maintenance intervals indicated in this manual
are valid for normal use conditions. If the use condi-
tions are more severe, the intervals are shortened
accordingly.
The working hours (1) necessary to determine the
maintenance intervals, are shown on the multi-func-
tion display inside of the cab.
At machine start, the multi-function display shows
besides an indication of the expiry and next interval
type.
500 HOURS
4-6
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS CHART
Cleaning Oil change Pressure release
Level check and top-up Check Water draining
Greasing Replacement / Change Air bleeding
Every Every Every Every

Every 10 Every 50 When
Maintenance 250 500 1000 3000 Page
hours hours necessary
hours hours hours hours
General checks
General inspection 4-10
Machine 4-71
Cab
Controls functionality 4-12
Windscreen wiper 4-73
Windscreen wiper - Blades 4-53
Windscreen washer liquid 4-19
Air filter 4-26/4-53
Diesel engine and fuel system
Engine speed sensor 4-48
Engine oil 4-13/4-50
Engine oil filter 4-39
Drive belt 4-49/4-73
Belt tensioner 4-54
Valve clearance 4-67
Fuel filter 4-32/4-40
Engine brackets -
4-54
Screws tightening
Injection nozzles 4-74
4-15/4-29/
Fuel tank
4-69
Cooling system
Coolant 4-17/4-68
Cooler 4-28
Air intake system
Air filter - main filter
4-26/4-55
element
Air filter - safety element 4-55
Air filter - dust discharge
4-26
valve
Hoses, pipes and sleeves 4-28
4-7
SECTION 4

Hydraulic system
4-13/4-65/
Hydraulic oil tank
4-74
Return filter 4-41
Bleeding valve 4-56
Pilot control filter 4-61
Upper structure
Upper structure holding
4-12
brake
Slewing gearbox 4-33/4-70
Slewing gearbox - Screws
4-52
tightening
Slewing bearing - Screws
4-51
tightening
Transmission components
Steering axle 4-42/4-56
Steering axle - Steering
4-78/4-58
adjustment
Rigid axle and gearbox 4-44
Axle floating locking
4-79
cylinders
Tyres 4-76
Tyres - Pressure 4-22
Tyres - Nuts tightening 4-24
Brakes system
Service brake 4-11/4-78
Service brake - Plates 4-60
Parking brake 4-11
Electrical system
Lights - Bulbs 4-12/4-83
Fuses 4-80
Battery 4-87
Battery - Electrolyte 4-34
Battery - Charged 4-34
Battery - Clamps 4-34
Heating - Air conditioning
Air conditioning system 4-45/4-61
Filter and panel 4-61
Evaporator and heat
4-61
exchanger
Condenser 4-61
Compressor belt 4-61
4-8

Attachment
Buckets - Teeth 4-88
Clamshell - Wear 4-89
Greasing
Various grease nipples -
4-20
Working attachment
Several grease nipples -
4-21
Off-set boom
Slewing bearing - Cups 4-37
Slewing bearing - Teeth 4-52
Axles floating pins 4-37
Blade and stabilizers joints 4-46
Cardan shaft 4-46
Steering trunnion pins 4-47
Floating axle locking
4-47
cylinders contact face
4-9
SECTION 4
CHECKS BEFORE START-UP AND BEFORE EACH WORKING SHIFT

(10 HOURS)
Level check
SERVICE POINTS Check Cleaning Greasing
and top-up
Machine - General inspection
Service brake
Parking brake
Upper structure holding brake
Lights
Controls and lamps functionality
Engine oil - Level
Hydraulic oil tank - Level
Fuel tank - Level
Cooling system liquid - Level
Screen washer liquid - Level
Working attachment lubrication
Greasing, off-set boom
Tyres - Pressure
Tyres - Nuts tightening
MACHINE GENERAL INSPECTION

Before operating the machine it is advisable to carry
out a general inspection of:
- Check visually the machine and working equip-
ment for possible breaks or damages to compo-
nents or to the machine structure. Should
problems be noticed, address to an authorized
workshop to have the necessary repairs done.
Replace all the damaged or worn parts with origi-
nal spares.
- Check for leaks; and if present, rectify them.
- Keep the machine clean daily from the dirt build-
up during the work.
4-10
SERVICE BRAKE
Before starting the machine, check the proper oper-
ation of:
- service brake.
Check the operation of the service brake by
depressing pedal (1).
5
The service brake operation is always monitored by
the multi-function display.
If during the working stages lamp (2) is on:
- stop the machine immediately;
- place the machine in a safe condition;
- clear off the trouble.
PARKING BRAKE
ation of:
- parking brake.
Check the operation of the parking brake by press-
ing the button (1).
4-11
SECTION 4
UPPER STRUCTURE HOLDING BRAKE

ation of:
- upper structure holding brake.
Check the correct operation in this way:
- Start the engine
The upper structure holding brake can be oper-
ated in AUTOMATIC mode by the centralized
electronic system.
Lamp (B) on button (1) lights up.
The upper structure is braked when the slewing
control lever (2) is not activated and at slewing
end.
8
- Activate the pilot control with the safety lever (3).
- When you shift the hydraulic control lever (2), the
upper structure holding brake is releases and the
upper structure is free to slew.
- Depress button (1) until all lamps switch off.
Upper structure holding brake is released.
The upper structure can be turned freely, even if
the hydraulic control lever (2) is not activated.
- Depress the button (1) once. The lamp (B) lights
up.
The upper structure holding brake is applied.
The upper structure is braked and should not
move.
- Depress the button (1) once more. The lamp (2)
lights up. The upper structure holding brake is
applied in automatic mode. The accurate stop of
the upper structure during slewing is ensured also
under severe use conditions.
LIGHTS
Before operating the machine it is advisable to carry
out a general cleaning and operation check of all
lights.
CONTROLS AND LAMPS OPERATION

ation of all controls and instruments and lamps of
the control dashboard.
Should faults be noticed, shut off the engine and
locate the trouble.
4-12
ENGINE OIL - LEVEL

Park the machine on a level surface and protect the
same against inadvertent movements.
Shut off the engine and wait for about five minutes
before checking the oil level. This down-time allows
the oil to flow into the oil sump.
Open the engine hood.
Remove the oil dipstick (1).
Wipe dipstick (1) clean with a lint-free cloth and rein-
sert.
Pull out again the oil dipstick (1).
If the oil level is close to or under the “min” mark,
perform the top up (2). 9
Top up oil until you reach the notch “max”.

NOTE: the oil level must always be above the notch
“min” and under the notch “max”.
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK - LEVEL
S WARNING S
Before starting to work on the hydraulic system,
make sure that this is not under pressure and
relieve any residual pressure from it.
Never let hydraulic oil to come in contact with the
skin. The skin contact with hydraulic oils is harmful
to health.
Park the machine on a flat surface and place the

working equipment on the ground.
Engage the parking brake. Shut off the engine.
Relieve the pressure from the hydraulic system by
moving both hydraulic control levers repeatedly until
the hydraulic cylinders do not react to controls.
Check that the oil level is above the “min” notch of
the dipstick (1) inside of hydraulic oil tank (2).
If this is not the case, top up the hydraulic oil.
No matter what the position of the working attach-
ment is, the oil level must always be between the 10
notches “min” and “max”.
4-13
SECTION 4
HYDRAULIC OIL TOP UP

The hydraulic oil tank is slightly under pressure at
about 0.3 bar (4 psi).
As mentioned previously, before performing any top
up of the hydraulic oil, it is important to relieve the
residual pressure inside of the hydraulic system.
11
Unscrew the screws (1) paying attention to cover (2)
that is under the spring (4) pre-load.
Reassemble the cover (2) with the spring (4) and
the gasket (3).
In the filter housing can now be seen the return filter
(5).
The top up has to be performed by letting the oil flow
though this filter, until the oil level sets between ref-
erences “min” and “max” of dipstick.
Before replacing the cover (2), check the gasket (3).
If this is damaged, replace it.
Reassemble the cover (2) with the gasket (3) and 12
the spring (4).
4-14
FUEL TANK - LEVEL

Use commercial-grade diesel fuels with a sulphur
content of less than 0.5%.
The following fuel specifications are approved:
- DIN EN 590
- BS 2869
- ASTM D 975-96; 1-D and 2-D
The quantity of Cetane (CZ) inside of fuel should not
be lower than 49.
S WARNING S
Do not smoke and do not use open flames.
Diesel fuel may be harmful to the skin, wear protec-
tive gloves or use a barrier cream.
Never take off the cap or refuel when the engine is
running. While you refuel keep the control of refuel-
ling gun.
Before refuelling, clean the seat of the filler neck to
avoid the introduction of foreign bodies in the tank.
After refuelling, retighten the cap firmly.
Do not spill fuel and do not let it penetrate into the
ground: environmental pollution hazard.
Soak up spilt fuel immediately with rags or binding
agents, then discard without polluting the environ-
ment.
Report accidents involving fuels without delay to
the machine owner or his agent.
LEVEL CHECK
The fuel level must be checked with the multi-func-
tion display.
At the screen side, column (1) is always showing the
fuel quantity contained in the machine.
Indication above the cross line = level OK.
Indication under the cross line = top up fuel. 500 HOURS
13
4-15
SECTION 4
FUEL TOP UP AND REFUELLING

If the machine is refuelled often or regularly with fuel
from cans or barrels, there is an increased risk of
foreign matter and water penetrating into the fuel
system.
In this case:
- always refuel through a fine mesh filter;
- user only intake hoses with a fine mesh filter;
- bleed water and sludge from the fuel tank at more
frequent intervals;
- change all fuel filters at more frequent intervals.
Refuel with following operations:
- open the filler cap cover (1);
- refuel through the filler neck filter (2). Do not
remove the filter.
14
4-16
COOLING SYSTEM LIQUID - LEVEL
S WARNING S
The plug of the cooling system has to be
unscrewed at engine shut off and cold.
Never refill with cold liquid while the engine is still
hot. The abrupt temperature change could damage
the engine components. Let the temperature inside
of the engine lower under 50 °C (122 °F) before fill-
ing the system with coolant.
If the cooling system is leaking, do not mix sealing
additives to the coolant. These could in fact clog
the cooling system. In such a case the coolant
delivery could cause a engine overheating.
The coolant level has to be checked daily, so as to

detect in time liquid leaks and to avoid damages.
Shut off the engine and wait until the engine and the
cooling system reach 50 °C (122 °F).
Open the engine compartment cover.
The coolant level must be between notches “min”
and “max” of the surge tank (1). If necessary, top up
the coolant.
To perform this operation, open with caution the cap
(2) of the surge tank of about half of a turn, to allow
the pressure to relieve from the cooling system.
Only after pressure relief you can unscrew com-
pletely the cap and top up the coolant.
Retighten the cap.
Close the engine compartment cover.
15
4-17
SECTION 4
COOLANT TOP UP
The coolant must consists in a mixture of 50% of
distilled water and 50% of antifreeze.
This mixture offers not only a antifreeze protection
up to -30 / -35 °C (-22 °F / -31 °F), but it protects
also the cooling and heating system from corrosion.
It prevents also the formation of limestone and
increases the boiling point of the cooling system.
Because of this, even during hot season and in hot
countries, coolant has not to be diluted with water.
NOTE: the additive quantity to be added to coolant
should be about 50%.
If for climate reasons a strong antifreeze is required
(for instance in Sweden, Norway, Finland), the anti-
freeze rate can be increases, but only up to 60%
(protection until about -40 °C (-40 °F)).
Otherwise, the antifreeze protection decreases and
the cooling effect gets worse (less radiating effect).
Before performing any top up or additive change,
ask the After-sales Service about the specifications
of the required additive allowed for your machine.
First of all mix the components in a clean container
and then pour the mixture into the cooling system. If
the mixture components are poured into the cooling
system one after the other, it is not possible to
obtain the correct mixture ratio. There is also the
possibility that components do not mix together in
the correct way.
NOTE: do not use not authorized additives. The cor-
rosion produced by this improper use, can cause
leaks in the cooling system and serious damages to
the engine.
COOLANT LEAKS
Leaks of coolant leads to suspect, first of all, to the
lack of tightness. In such a case, have the cooling
system immediately checked by the After-sales
service. The only coolant top up is not sufficient.
If the system is correctly tight, leaks may be found
only if the coolant overheats and boils and because
of this it is ejected out of the system under pressure.
4-18
SCREEN WASHER LIQUID - LEVEL

The operation logic and mode of the liquid container
have been optimized, because the same has been
incorporated in the panel behind the operator’s seat.
The panel is used at the same time as supporting
surface for operator’s tools and personal objects.
The liquid container can also be filled outside of the
cab by unscrewing cap (1).
Fill the liquid container only with clean drink water, if
not the windscreen washer nozzles can get clogged.
In order to obtain the best cleaning of the window
panes, you can add to water a commercial deter-
gent.
16
With cold weather, mix antifreeze to the windscreen
washer system. Observe the mixing ratio suggested
by the Manufacturer.
Remove cap (1) from the back wall of the cab.
Top up liquid up to lower edge of filler neck (2).
Re-tighten the cap (1) and check that the closure is
tight.
4-19
SECTION 4
WORKING ATTACHMENT - GREASING

Before beginning the greasing operation: Clean the grease nipple.
- place the working attachment on the ground, com- Apply the pump nozzle on the grease nipple.
pletely extended;
Now, pump the grease in such a quantity that the
- place the machine in a safe condition. new grease can eject the old one from the articula-
By means of the greasing pump, grease all lubrication points.
tion points of the working attachment. Wipe off used grease with a cleaning rag.
Release the loading area of the articulation joint. After greasing, put protective cap back onto the
grease nipple.
Remove the protection cap from the grease nipple.
17
4-20
Position Lubrication point Quantity

1 Extension/retraction cylinder joint (rod side) 1
Bucket cylinder joint (bottom side) 1
2 Boom cylinder joint (bottom side) 2x1
3 Extension/retraction cylinder joint 2x1
4 Clamshell (optional)
- Joints 10
- clamshell bucket rotation gear teeth 2
- Clamshell bucket / dipper joint 2x1
5 Grease nipples block
- Extension/retraction cylinder joint (rod side) 2x1
- Boom cylinder joint (rod side) 2x1
- Adjusting cylinder joint (rod side) 2x1
- Adjusting cylinder joint (rod side) 2x1
- Boom cylinder joint (rod side) 2x1
- Lifting boom / placing boom joint 2x1
- Monoboom / dipper joint 2x1
6 Joints on the linkage 4
Linkage / placing boom joint 2
Bucket cylinder joint (rod side) 1
Bucket / placing boom joint 2x1
7 Upper structure
- Upper structure locking pin 1
OFF-SET BOOM - GREASING

Grease all articulation pins and cylinders pins.
18
4-21
SECTION 4
TYRES - PRESSURE CHECK
S CAUTION S
Before inflating the tyres, check the tyres, rims and
rim parts for damage, penetrated foreign objects
and proper fitting.
Check the tyre inflation pressure only when the
tyres are cold, as when they are warm, the pres-
sures indicated are higher than usual.
Use inflation equipment with long filling hose, self-
fixing nozzle and pressure gauge.
Inflate the tyres only with compressed ambient air.
Never use inflammable gases: risk of explosion!
During tyre inflation, do not stand near the tyre and
always in the plane of the tyre tread.
Watch the tyre and the pressure gauge of the inflat-
ing equipment permanently during the inflation and
never exceed the prescribed tyre pressures.
If available, place a safety cage around the wheel.
Make sure that nobody is standing near the tyre
when it is being inflated.
Always inflate tyres to the prescribed pressure:
- excessive tyres pressure means poor handling
properties off the road and a risk of bursting tyres;
- insufficient pressure means increased wear on
the tyres and inadequate stability of the machine.
Apply the right tyre pressure for each axle and fore-
seen application.
Do not keep tyres pressure lower than the values
due, so as not to overheat the tyres, because this
could cause:
- tyre breaks;
- tread damage;
- inner damage;
- uneven wear and short life.
19
4-22
Do not overinflate the tyres, because if bumped they

can break easily and under extreme conditions the
rim can get deformed and the tyre can burst.
S CAUTION S
The tyres inflating pressure varies according to the
load applied to axles.
Park the machine on level and firm ground with suf-

ficient strength.
Place the working equipment on the ground.
Attach the self-locking nozzle of the inflating equip-
ment to the tyre filling valve (1).
The device is equipped with a pressure gauge (2),
that when connected, allows to check the pressure
value.
If the pressure results to be lower than expected,
proceed to the inflation. 20
SUGGESTED PRESSURES
Tyres Manufacturer Type Pressure (bar) (psi)

Mitas 10.00-20 PR16 NB38 7.50 (109)
Mitas 11.00-20 PR16 NB38 7.25 (105)
Bridgestone 10.00-20 PR16 FGF 7.50 (109)
Twin Bridgestone 11.00-20 PR16 FGF 7.00 (102)
Bridgestone 10.00-20 PR14 FG 6.5 (94)
Bandenmarkt Excavator PR18 315/80 R 22.5 8.0 (116)
Bandenmarkt Grader PR18 315/80 R 22.5 8.5 (123)
Michelin 18 R 19.5 XF 8.00 (116)
Single
Mitas 600/40 - 22.5 I-331 6.00 (87)
The pressures are valid for the types of tyres and

equipment listed and to following conditions:
- working attachment installed;
- bucket empty;
- tyres at environment temperature (about 20 °C
(68 °F));
- fuel tank full.
4-23
SECTION 4
TYRES - NUTS TIGHTENING

Park the machine on a flat surface and lower the
equipment to the ground.
Secure the machine by placing chocks under the
wheels to prevent inadvertent movements.
Check if nuts (1) are tighten. Tighten to prescribed
torque 450 Nm (331.90 lbf·ft).
21
4-24
WEEKLY SERVICE (50 HOURS)
Level
Air Water
SERVICE POINTS Check check and Cleaning Greasing
bleeding draining
top-up
Cab - Air filter
Air filter: Dust discharge
valve - Main filter element
Air intake system: Intake
pipes
Cooler
Fuel system
Fuel filter
Slewing gearbox - Level
Battery - Electrolyte
Battery - Charge and clamps
tightening
Slewing bearing - Cups
Axles floating pins
Quick coupler
CAB AIR FILTER - CLEANING

The heating blower takes air from outside through
the rear wall of the cab.
The filter element is accessible by opening the
cover (1) on the rear wall of the cab by means of a
square-section tool.
Open the cover.
Take out the filter and shake it slightly or blow it with
a jet of compressed air without oil, lower than 6 bar
(87 psi). Keep the nozzle of the compressed air at a
distance of 3 cm (1.18 in) from the paper.
If dirt is heavy or after 3 cleanings the filter element
has to be replaced.
22
S WARNING S
During the cleaning with compressed air, always
wear protective goggles.
Do not clean the filter element with blows or strikes,

it could get damaged.
Insert the filter element, cleaned or new into the
guide and close the cover.
4-25
SECTION 4
AIR FILTER - CLEANING

Besides the scheduled times for cleaning, the air fil-
ter must also to be cleaned by means of a electronic
vacuum sensor (1), installed on the air filter housing,
the indication of this sensor is shown on the multi-
function display with a fault message.
23
DUST DISCHARGE VALVE - CLEANING

The dust discharge valve (2) collects dust penetrat-
ing into the air filter case.
To discharge the dust, compress the dust discharge
valve repeatedly.
The dirt is crumbled and comes out from the bottom.
24
AIR FILTER - DISASSEMBLY

Open the cover on the left side of the machine.
Push the clip (3) forward, turn the filter cover to the
left (4) and remove it.
Remove the main filter element (5) carefully from
the case.
The safety filter (6) remains in place.
Clean the main filter element (5).
If damaged, the filter element has to be replaced.
Clean the filter case inside.
Assemble the filter element, checked and cleaned,
or possibly a new element. 25
Reassemble the cover (4) and lock it with the fas-
tener (3).
4-26
MAIN FILTER ELEMENT - CLEANING

Never clean filter elements by beating them against
hard objects.
After 3 cleaning cycles or after one year of operation
at the latest, the main filter element must be
replaced.
Never clean filters with petrol and flammable or hot
liquids.
Cleaning with compressed air is suitable if the filter
element is to be re-used immediately.
The air pressure at the nozzle must not exceed
6 bars (87 psi).
The compressed air nozzle has to be held at about 26
3 cm (1.18 in) from the filter element.
Start cleaning the filter surface by blowing dry com-
pressed air diagonally from outside into the filter ele-
ment.
Continue cleaning by blowing compressed air from
inside against the element.
Cleaning is finished when all visible dust has been
removed from the element.
CHECKS
Checks before installation of the main filter element:
Check the filter paper with the help of a lamp bulb.
Filter damage is indicated where the light shines
brightly through the paper. If damaged, replace the
main filter element immediately.
27
Check the seal visually. If the seal is damaged,
replace the main filter element immediately.
28
4-27
SECTION 4
AIR INTAKE LINE - CHECK

Hoses and tubes for air intake damaged or leaking,
influence enormously the performance and life of
the engine.
Dirt or pieces of the intake air can reach the engine
and damage it heavily.
The feeding pressure created by the turbocharger
could dissipate with the consequence that the
engine does not develop its full power.
The engine must not be allowed to draw in unfiltered
air, therefore:
- check the tightness of all hoses and pipes of fil-
tered air;
29
- check that all clamps are in place and well tight;
- check that all fittings of hoses and pipes are not
rusty under the clamps. Rust could detach from
hoses and pipes and reach the engine.
Remove immediately possible damages and
replace at once the damaged components.
MULTI-COOLER - CLEANING
CAUTION
Start the cleaning operation only after the standstill
of all moving components, assemblies and after the
engine, silencer and cooler have cooled down.
Wear protective gloves and goggles before starting
to clean with compressed air.
If the machine is working in a very dusty environ-
ment, the cooler has to be cleaned more frequently
as prescribed by the service schedule.
Do not use pointed or hard tools to clean the cooler,
as for instance, metallic brushes and screwdrivers.
They could damage the cooling fins.
The cooler for the turbocharger air, is installed inside
of a hood containing draining holes for condensate.
If the holes are clogged and the condensate accu-
mulated, when it freezes, the cooler could get dam-
aged.
Check periodically, before and during the cold sea-
son, that the draining holes are free.
4-28
CLEANING
The multi-cooler contains radiating elements for the
engine coolant (3), for hydraulic oil (2) and for the
turbocharger air (1).
Open the cover on the right side of the upper struc-
ture.
Now the cooler is accessible.
Brush and suck the dirt from the radiator fins.
Resistant dirt build-ups can be removed with water
jets or compressed air jets.
The cooler has to be cleaned by directing the jets
from the top to the bottom. Remove the dirt residu-
als.
30
In case of dirt build-up, clean the hood and the
draining holes.
FUEL SYSTEM - AIR BLEEDING AND

WATER DRAINING
CAUTION
The fuel vapours are readily flammable. For this
reason, avoid any formation of sparkles and use
only protected lamps and not open flames like
lighter or matches.
If you are to work on the fuel system:
- shut off the engine and the additional heating
fault;
- place the machine in a safe condition.
Fuels can be harmful for health:
- do not swallow;
- avoid long contact with the skin;
- do not inhale vapours;
- wear a protective mask and gloves.
Collect escaping fuel and discard without polluting
the environment.
Discard the fuel filters and the rags soaked with fuel
in the prescribed way for polluting waste.
4-29
SECTION 4
AIR BLEEDING
When components on the fuel delivery line are
replaced, the air bleeding from the system is per-
formed automatically.
When the fuel line under high pressure is disassem-
bled or replaced, the air bleeding is not required for
engine start-up. The fuel pump during start-up gen-
erates high pressure inside of fuel and discharges
the air through the injectors at high pressure side.
31
If such an amount of air, plenty exceeding the aver-
age required, should penetrate into the system,
bleed the fuel system immediately.
Loosen the delivery line on the injection pump (1).
Activate repeatedly lever (2) on the delivery pump,
until air is completely bleeded from the system.
Once the air has been completely relieved, connect
the fitting again. The fuel pump is activated by the
camshaft of the engine block at the side directed
towards the cab. The fuel pump is accessible
through the rear cover of the panelling right.
If air bubbles are still noticed for several minutes, air
is penetrating into the system. Because of breaks or 32
pores in the welding link, fastening the hose to the
connector, air can penetrate into the fuel system.
Check for the presence of leaks on all hoses and
connections, as well as on the fuel filter.
An injector jammed to open position, can generate
the return of exhaust gas to the pump, and the pres-
ence of too much air into the system. Start the
engine and check the hoses. If exhaust gas returns
through the hoses, the injector is still open or
jammed.
4-30
WATER AND SLUDGE BLEEDING

Dirt and water settle on the bottom of the fuel tank.
This happens especially when the machine refuel-
ling is often or periodically performed with fuel
stored into cans or barrels, or when the machine is
employed in areas with strong thermal differences
between day and night. In such a case there is the
formation of condensate, in particular when the tank
is not completely full. With temperatures lower than
0 °C (32 °F), the condensate freezes and the drain-
ing, through the threaded cap (1), is impossible.
Because of this, bleed water and sludge at the end
of the work-shift and then refuel the tank.
Remove the base-plate for maintenance below the 33
fuel tank.
Now the drain sleeve is accessible.
Place a collecting container below the tank drain
plug (1).
With caution unscrew the drain plug (1) under the
fuel tank and drain water and sludge. Retighten the
drain plug. Reinstall the maintenance base-plate.
4-31
SECTION 4
FUEL FILTER/S - WATER DRAINING
S WARNING S
Water contained in the fuel can corrode, damage or
wear the engine injection system.
NOTE: the WX 145 excavator is equipped with fuel

filter. The WX 165 and WX 185 excavators are
equipped with two fuel filters.
The fuel filters have the aim to filter impurities and to
separate the water contained in the fuel. The fuel fil-
ters are equipped with a preheating device and with
a water sensor.
The fuel filters are installed inside of the engine
compartment, in front of the engine and are accessi-
ble through the rear right cover.
A sensor (1) is fastened on the draining valve (2) of
the filters (3), this sensor activates the yellow lamp
(5) on the multi-function display, when the presence
of water is detected inside of the fuel filter separator.
34
A brief warning is sounded at the same time.
Beyond the error code 7048, in the middle lower
section of the multi-function display (4) appears a
short description of the error code:
“Error water in fuel sensor”.
Fault no.7048
Error water in fuel sensor
S WARNING S
Drain immediately water from the filter, when on the
multi-function display lights up the yellow lamp (5)
and the error code 7048 is shown. If within 30 min-
utes the error code is shown again, water has nec-
essarily to be drained from the tank.
Open the cooler side cover on the right side of the 35

upper structure.
Now the fuel filters (3) are accessible.
Place a container below the filters to collect the
water to be drained.
Take out from the draining valve the connector by
pulling it downward.
Open the draining valve (2), located on the bottom
of the filter. Water drains.
When only fuel comes out, close the draining valve
(2).
Refit the connector with a slight pressure.
Check the filter housings for leaks.
4-32
SLEWING GEARBOX - OIL LEVEL

Place the machine in a safe condition.
Unscrew cover (1) of the expansion tank (2).
The expansion tank must be filled with oil for at least
1-2 cm (0.39-0.79 in). If necessary, top up the oil.
36
4-33
SECTION 4
BATTERIES - LEVEL - CHARGE CHECK

AND CLAMPS TIGHTENING
S CAUTION S
Batteries give off explosive gases.
Never handle naked flames and unshielded light
sources near batteries, never smoke.
Battery acid is toxic and corrosive.
Avoid any contact with the skin, mouth, eyes and
clothing. Avoid spilling battery acid. Avoid inhaling
the vapours.
Wear acid-proof gloves, firm protective clothing and
goggles.
If the skin is splashed with acid, rinse thoroughly
with water and consult a doctor.
Never wear metal necklaces, bracelets or watch-
straps when working on the battery. The metal parts
may induce a short circuit resulting in burns.
If the eyes are splashed with acid, rinse thoroughly
with running water and consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
Never set tools down on the battery. They may
induce a short circuit, causing irreparable damage
to the battery and injuring persons.
Batteries are stored on the right front side of the

machine.
The batteries (1) are accessible though the engine
hood (2).
37
CHECKING THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

Remove the caps (1).
When the undercaps (2) are present:
- electrolyte level should reach base of these.
Without undercaps:
- electrolyte level should be 10 - 15 mm (0.39-
0.59 in) above top of plates.
If necessary, top up with distilled water.
Retighten the caps (1).
38
4-34
CHARGE CHECK
Unscrew caps (1) and undercaps (2) if installed.
Measure electrolyte density of individual cells with
commercial hydrometer (3).
Hydrometer reading (see table on following page)
indicates battery’s state of charge.
During measurement, temperature of electrolyte
should preferably be +20 °C (68 °F).
Electrolyte density
in kg/dm3 (lb/foot3) Charge
Normal Tropical 39
1.28 (80) 1.23 (77) correct
1.20 (75) 1.12 (70) low: charge
discharged: recharge
1.12 (70) 1.08 (67)
immediately
CLAMPS CHECK
Keep battery clean and dry.
Disconnect dirty clamps.
Clean battery poles (+) and (-) and clamps and
grease with acid-free and acid resistant grease.
When reassembling, ensure that clamps make good
contact. Tighten the wheel nuts by hand.
40
CHARGE
Top up / recharge
When the charge is performed with low current
intensity (top up charge with small battery charger) it
is not necessary to detach the connection cables of
the on board net. Respect anyway the prescriptions
of the Manufacturer of the battery charger. If the bat-
teries are not installed, use a battery charger with a
charging voltage of 24 V (batteries are serial con-
nected).
To recharge the battery, do not exceed the maxi-
mum charge current of 10% of the battery rated
capacity.
Recharge time maximum 30 hours, in case of bat-
tery completely flat.
4-35
SECTION 4
Quick recharge
Respect the prescriptions of the Manufacturer of the
battery charger.
Before performing the quick recharge, that is, a
recharge with high density voltage, disconnect both
connecting cables and disassemble the batteries.
Before performing the battery charge, unscrew the
plugs to allow the release of gas from all battery
cells.
A flat battery can freeze already at -10 °C (14 °F). If
the battery is frozen, it must absolutely be defrosted
before quick recharge; otherwise it could explode.
The battery charger net cable has to be plugged-in
to the electric socket, only after the battery charger
clamps have been correctly connected to the battery
poles.
red = positive
black = negative
Once the recharge is complete, reinstall the battery
and perform correct connection (first the positive
pole and than the negative).
4-36
SLEWING BEARING CUPS AND AXLE

FLOATING PINS - GREASING
Before starting with the greasing operations place
the machine in a safe condition.
By means of the greasing pump, grease all lubrica-
tion points of the upper structure.
Clean the grease nipple.
Apply the pump nozzle on the grease nipple.
new grease can eject the old one from the articula-
tion points.
Wipe off used grease with a cleaning rag.
After greasing, put protective cap back onto the
grease nipple.
SLEWING BEARING CUPS

(1) = No. 2 grease nipples
Slew the upper structure three times and repeat the
greasing procedure.
41
AXLES FLOATING PINS

42
4-37
SECTION 4
QUICK COUPLER - GREASING

LOCKING CYLINDER
(1) = No. 1 grease nipple
43
44
LOCKING HOOK PIN

45
4-38
MONTHLY SERVICE (250 HOURS)
Level check Replacement

SERVICE POINTS Check Greasing
and top-up / Change
Engine oil filter
Fuel filter
Hydraulic oil return filter
Steering axle
Rigid axle and gearbox
Air conditioning system
Blade and stabilizer joint
Cardan shaft
Steering trunnion pins
Axle locking cylinders contact face
Stabilizers brackets
ENGINE OIL FILTER - CHANGE
S WARNING S
To replace the engine oil filter shut off the engine
and wait until it is cool. Collect oil, rags, old filter
and discard them without polluting the environment.
Remove the base-plate for maintenance below the

engine compartment.
Unscrew the filter cartridge (1) and drain old oil into
a collecting container.
Discard the filter separately.
Clean the sealing surface on the engine and remove
completely possible residuals of the old seal.
46
4-39
SECTION 4
Fill the new filter cartridge with clean oil.

Lightly oil the gasket of the new filter cartridge.
Screw in the new cartridge until the gasket is flush.
At this point tighten the filter by hand.
Fill in engine oil into filler neck (2) until the oil level
reaches the “max” mark of dipstick (3).
Start the engine and check that the connection
between the filter cartridge and the engine is tight.
Check oil level.
Reassemble the base-plate for maintenance below
the engine compartment.
47
FUEL FILTER/S - CHANGE
S WARNING S
For this kind of replacement shut off the engine and
wait until it is cool.
Collect fuel, rags and old filters and discard them
without polluting the environment.
The fuel filters are installed inside of the engine

compartment at the engine side and are accessible
through the rear right hood cover.
There is no need to clean these filters, but they have
to be replaced according to service schedule.
Open the cooler side cover (1) on the right side of
the upper structure.
Now the fuel filters (2) are accessible.
Unscrew the filter cartridges (2), paying attention not
to spill the fuel over, but to collect it in a container.
Discard the old cartridges.
Clean the seal face of the filter head. 48
Fill the new cartridges with fuel.

Lightly oil the gasket of the new cartridges.
Screw in the new cartridges, until the gasket is flush
and then tighten by hand.
After a while, check the tightness of connection
between filter head and cartridges.
If the engine does not start, bleed the air from the
fuel line.
4-40
HYDRAULIC OIL RETURN FILTER -

CHANGE
S WARNING S
Before starting to work on the hydraulic system,
make sure that this is not under pressure and
relieve any residual pressure from it.
Never let hydraulic oil to come in contact with the
skin.
Discard used oil, rags and the old filter without pol-
luting the environment.
Beyond respecting the maintenance intervals for

return filter change, replace the same also:
- when on display appears the relevant error mes-
sage. This means that the filter is very dirty;
- after a repair on the hydraulic system.
Relieve the pressure from the oil tank.
Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the cover (2)
with spring (4) and gasket (3).
Take out the old return filter (5) and replace it with a
new one.
Reassemble the cover (2) with a new gasket (3) and
spring (4).
49
4-41
SECTION 4
STEERING AXLE - OIL LEVEL
S WARNING S
The axle and the differential box may also be hot
after a long journey.
Leave the axle and differential box to cool down
and wear working gloves.
The axle and differential may be slightly over pres-
surized, so turn the control plug carefully, just far
enough to release the excess pressure (audible
hissing sound).
Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting
the environment.
Park the machine on a level and firm surface. Block

the wheels of the rigid axle by placing chocks under
them.
Raise the machine with the levelling blade or the
working equipment until the wheels of the steering
axle are clear of the ground and turn freely.
DIFFERENTIAL - OIL LEVEL

Clean the area around screw plug (1).
Unscrew the screw plug slowly, until the inner pres-
sure is completely released.
Only after this operation, unscrew the screw plug (1)
completely.
Oil level should be flush with the plug hole.
If necessary, top up oil through the hole.
Screw up the screw plug (1).
50
4-42
TRAVEL GEARBOXES - OIL LEVEL

Bring the screw plugs (1) and (2) into position
depending on the wheel-hub installed.
Screw plug (1) must be above the centreline.
The line under the word “Front” must be in horizon-
tal position.
Clean the area around screw plugs (1) and (2).
Unscrew the screw plug (1) slowly, until the inner
pressure is completely released. Only after this
operation, unscrew the plug completely.
The oil level must be flush with the hole edge. If nec-
essary, top up oil to level of drilled hole.
51
Repeat check on other wheel-hub gear.
52
4-43
SECTION 4
RIGID AXLE AND GEARBOX - OIL

LEVEL
S WARNING S
The axle and the gearbox may also be hot after a
long journey.
Let the axle and the gearshift box cool down and
wear working gloves.
The axle and the gearshift box may be slightly over
pressurized, so turn the control plug carefully, just
far enough to release the excess pressure (audible
hissing sound).
the environment.
Park the machine on a level and firm surface.

Block the wheels of the axle by placing chocks
under them.
working attachment until the wheels of the rigid axle
are clear of the ground and turn freely.
DIFFERENTIAL AND GEARBOX - OIL LEVEL

Clean the area around screw plug (1) of axle and
screw plug (2) of gearbox.
Unscrew the screw plugs (1) and (2) slowly, until the
inner pressure is completely released. Only after
this operation unscrew the plugs completely. The oil
level must be flush with the hole edge. If necessary,
top up oil through the hole.
Retighten screw plugs (1) and (2).
53
54
4-44
TRAVEL GEARBOXES - OIL LEVEL

depending on the wheel-hub installed. The line
under the word “REAR” or “OIL” must be in horizon-
tal position.
operation, unscrew the plug completely. The oil level
must be flush with the hole edge. If necessary, top
up oil through the hole.
Repeat this check on the wheel-hub at the opposite
55
axle end.
Lower the machine.
56
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

If the system is not used at least once a month (for
instance during winter), it is necessary to perform a
visual check of the system status and of its main
components.
Moreover, it is necessary to let it run for at least 10-15
minutes.
In this way you avoid that the oil seal on the com-
pressor shaft dries and becomes fragile. In this case
coolant leaks may take place. Besides, in this way
all compressor components are periodically lubri-
cated.
4-45
SECTION 4
BLADE AND STABILIZERS JOINTS,

CARDAN SHAFT, STEERING TRUNNION
PINS - GREASING
Before starting with the greasing operations place
the machine in a safe condition.
By means of the greasing pump, grease all lubrica-
tion points.
Clean the grease nipple.
Apply the pump nozzle on the grease nipple.
new grease can eject the old one from the articula-
tion points.
Wipe off used grease with a cleaning rag.
After greasing, put protective cap back onto the
grease nipple.
BLADE AND STABILIZERS JOINTS

57
CARDAN SHAFT
58
4-46
STEERING TRUNNION PINS

59
FLOATING AXLE LOCKING CYLINDERS

CONTACT FACES - LUBRICATION
The contact faces of floating axle locking cylinder
must be lubricated.
If the contact faces are dry, noise is heard during the
axle floating.
The pistons rounded ends can not glide, therefore
their motion generates friction and strikes.
The contact faces can get seized.
Clean the pistons ends and the upper faces of the
gliding element.
Spray some lubricant between the cylinder rod and
the gliding element.
Repeat this operation also with the other cylinder of 60
the floating axle.
4-47
SECTION 4
SERVICE EVERY 12 MONTHS (500 HOURS)
Replacement
SERVICE POINTS Check Cleaning Oil change Greasing
/ Change
Engine - revolutions sensor
Engine - Drive belt
Engine oil
Slewing bearing - Screws
tightening
Slewing bearing - Teeth
Slewing gearbox - Screws
tightening
ENGINE REVOLUTIONS SENSOR -

CLEANING
S WARNING S
Injuries hazard, because of the motion of blower
blades, belts and of hot components of the engine
and silencer.
Shut off the engine and let it cool down, before
opening the engine compartment.

Open the engine compartment cover. The engine
revolutions sensor (1) is fitted on the flywheel case
and is accessible from the bottom, after dismantling
the panels, that are placed under the pumps and
engine compartment.
Disconnect the connector of the sensor linkage
cable.
Loosen the lock-nut (2) and unscrew the sensor (1).
Clean the front side of the sensor.
Check the electric contacts of connector. If neces- 61
sary, clean them and remove rust, if present.
To reassemble the sensor, carry out following opera-
tions:
Screw up sensor (1) manually in the fly-wheel case,
until a certain hardness is felt. Now the front face of
sensor is going to lean against the fly-wheel tooth.
Now unscrew the sensor of half a turn. In this way
the correct distance of the fly-wheel is set.
Tighten the lock-nut (2), paying attention not to mod-
ify the sensor tightening depth.
Connect again the connector of the linking cable.
4-48
DRIVE BELTS - CHECK
S WARNING S
Accidents hazard, caused by the blower blades and
by the belts in motion.
Shut off the engine before opening the engine
hood.
Risk of burns caused by engine, silencer and cool-
ers hot components.
Start the maintenance works and repair only after
the engine, the silencer and the radiators are cool.

Shut off the engine. 62
Open the engine compartment cover.
Carry out a visual check of all engine belts, after the
opening of the side door, at the right in travel direc-
tion.
Check that the belts have no cracks crossing over.
Transversal cracks (1), parallel to the belt width are
allowed. Cracks parallel to the belt length (2), cross-
ing the transversal ones (1) are not allowed.
In this case the belt has to be replaced. The belt
must be replaced also in case of frayed edges or if it
is losing pieces.
Check that the belts have no shiny or worn out
spots. In this case the belt is loose or it slips.
4-49
SECTION 4
ENGINE OIL - CHANGE
S WARNING S
Risk of burns caused from hot engine oil.
the environment.
DRAINING HOSE FOR OIL CHANGE

The engine is equipped with a special filler neck (1)
for oil discharge.
In this way the oil change can be performed in a
clean and not polluting way.
Perform the oil change in this way:
- place under the drain sleeve a collecting container
for old oil;
- take from the equipment available the relevant
draining hose;
- unscrew the blanking plug (3) from the oil drain
sleeve (1);
- screw up the hose (2). The sleeve (1) opens auto- 63
matically and oil is discharged;
- once oil has been drained, unscrew the hose (2).
The drain sleeve (1) closes independently;
- retighten the protection cover (3).
OIL DRAINING
Bring engine oil to operating temperature.
Park the machine on a level surface, and secure it
against inadvertent movements.
Disassemble the base-plate for maintenance below
the engine compartment. Now the oil drain sleeve
(1) is accessible.
Drain the engine oil through the drain sleeve. For
this operation, use the proper hose.
64
4-50
OIL FILLING
Screw up the hose.
Reassemble the base-plate for maintenance below
Engine oil filter change.
Carry out the oil filling by unscrewing the plug (4),
until you reach the reference “max” of the dipstick
(5).
65
66
SLEWING BEARING - SCREW

TIGHTENING CHECK
The fastening screws of the slewing bearing (1) and
undercarriage (2) are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
The loosen screws have to be unscrewed first and
then tightened by means of a dynamometric key or
another tightening tool (electric / hydraulic) at the
prescribed tightening torque.
WX 145 = 270 Nm (199.14 lbf·ft)
WX 165 - WX 185 = 280 Nm (206.51 lbf·ft)
67
4-51
SECTION 4
SLEWING BEARING TEETH -

GREASING
S WARNING S
Perform the upper structure slewing only after
ensuring that nobody is staying in the slewing
range.
The slewing bearing teeth and the slewing gearbox

pinion, are enclosed into a housing filled with
grease.
Disassemble the cover (2) by untightening the
screws (3).
Check the presence of possible damages on the
pinion teeth.
Check the grease filling.
The height of the grease filling in the tank must be of
about 13 mm (0.51 in) on WX 145 and WX 165
excavators and of 20 mm (0.79 in) on WX 185 exca-
vators.
68
If this is not the case, add grease.
Check that water is not penetrated. You can recog-
nize this event by the fact that grease becomes
lighter. Great quantities of water create some bags,
that have absolutely to be cleared, by draining or
sucking the water.
Check the teeth coating and the seal of the upper
structure rotor. If there are leaks or damages, water
could penetrate or cause breaks or grease leaks.
These troubles have to be cleared immediately.
Replace the gasket (1) and reinstall the cover (1) by
fixing it with screws (3).
SLEWING GEARBOX - SCREWS

TIGHTENING CHECK
The fastening screws (1) of the slewing gearbox (2)
on the upper structure are tightened at prescribed
tightening torques.
The loose screws have to be completely loosened
and then tightened at the prescribed tightening
torque by means of a torque wrench.
WX 145 = 270 Nm (199.14 lbf·ft)
WX 165 - WX 185 = 250 Nm (184.39 lbf·ft)
69
4-52
SERVICE AFTER 1000 HOURS
Replacement /
SERVICE POINTS Check Cleaning Oil change
Change
Cab - Air filter Q
Windscreen wiper - Blades Q
Engine brackets - Screws tightening S
Engine - Belt tensioner S
Air filter: Main and safety filter elements Q
Hydraulic system - Bleeding valve Q
Steering axle W
Rigid axle and gearbox W
Service brake - Plates S

Pilot control filter Q
Air conditioning system SD
Compressor belt Q
Heat exchanger - Evaporator - Condenser D
Filter and panel D
CAB AIR FILTER - CHANGE

The filter element is accessible by opening the
cover (1) on the rear wall of the cab by means of a
square-section tool.
Open the cover (1).
Withdraw the old filter element and discard it without
polluting the environment.
Install the new filter.
Close the cover (1).
70
WINDSCREEN BLADES - CHANGE

For a good visibility from the operator’s side a good
cleaning of the cab windows is required.
In order to maintain this status, the good condition
and operation of the windscreen wiper blades is cru-
cial.
Change the blades for safety reasons.
4-53
SECTION 4
ENGINE BRACKETS - SCREWS

TIGHTENING CHECK
Shut off the engine and wait that it cools down.
Check that rubber pads and the screws of the
engine brackets are not damaged or missing.
If some components are broken or weakened or
cracked, the dampers have to be replaced. The
damaged screws have to be changed and the miss-
ing ones, replaced.
Check the tightening of the screws with a torque
wrench checking that the torques are the prescribed 71
ones.
Torques (Nm) (lbf·ft)

Position Screw
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185
104 60
1 M12
(76.71) (44.25)
270 105
2 M16
(199.14) (77.44)
490 250
3 M20
(361.40) (184.39)
ENGINE BELT TENSIONER - CHECK
S WARNING S
Danger of injuries caused by blower and belts in
motion.
ers hot components.
Shut off the engine and wait that it cools before
opening the hood.
Make sure that the belt tensioner bracket (1) does

not touch neither the upper point nor the lower one
of the crankcase stop.
If one of the stop points is touched, the belt (2) must
be changed.
If replacement is necessary, pay attention to use a
belt with the proper length.
Check that the belt tensioning roller (3) and the
crankcase do not show brakes.
If damaged, the belt tensioner (1) has to be
replaced. Address in this case to an authorized
workshop.
72
Check the belt tensioner (1) for dirt build-ups. In
case of dirt build-ups, disassemble it and clean it
with steam jets.
4-54
Check that the spring seat, the belt tensioner and

the cranckase are one above the other. If they are
remarkably spaced or tilted one against the other,
the belt tensioner has to be replaced.
Check for signs that the tensioner bracket touches
the spring seat. If they touch each other, this means
that the bracket bushing is faulty and that the belt
tensioner has to be changed.
A worn belt tensioner, showing some backlash, or a
belt slipping from the pulley, indicate the possibility
of a wrong pulley alignment.
The maximum allowable pulley alignment is of 3°.
The measurement can be performed by means of a
blade scale and a goniometer.
AIR FILTER - REPLACEMENT OF MAIN

FILTER ELEMENT AND OF SAFETY
ELEMENT
Shut off the engine and wait that it cools down.
Open the cover on the left side of the machine.
Push the clip (1) forward, turn the filter cover to the
left (2) and remove it.
Remove the main filter element (3) carefully from
the case (5).
Remove from the case (5) also the safety element
(4).
NOTE: beyond maintenance the safety element (4)
according to time schedule, this has to be replaced
after the main element (3) has been cleaned three
times.
Clean the inside of the filter case (5) and the cover 73
(2) accurately, by means of a vacuum cleaner.
Install the new safety element (4) and then the main
new element (3).
Reassemble the cover (2) and lock it with the fas-
tener (1).
4-55
SECTION 4
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING VALVE

- CHANGE
The air bleeding and sucking valve (1) ensures this
operation inside of the hydraulic oil tank (2), so as to
compensate the hydraulic oil level floating.
This valve maintains a pressure of about 0.3 bar
(4 psi) inside of the tank.
The valve (1) contains a filter element (4), that can-
not neither be cleaned nor replaced. This is the rea-
son why the valve has to be replaced completely.
The filter head is connected to the lower side, so as
to be free to turn. In this way, you avoid that the
valve is removed without authorization.
74
To unscrew the valve, insert laterally the locking pin
(3), that is delivered with the new valve. Now the old
valve has to be unscrewed with great care (the pres-
sure inside of the hydraulic oil tank is released).
Insert the locking pin (3) inside of the new valve and
tighten the valve manually.
Take out the locking pin and store it (for instance in
the keys bunch) for a future use.
75
STEERING AXLE - OIL CHANGE
S WARNING S
The axle and the differential box may also be hot
after a long journey.
Leave the axle and differential box to cool down
and wear working gloves.
The axle and differential may be slightly over pres-
surized, so turn the control plug carefully, just far
enough to release the excess pressure (audible
hissing sound).
Collect the escaping oil and discard it without pol-
luting the environment.

Block the rigid axle wheels by placing chocks under
them.
working equipment until the wheels of the steering
axle are clear of the ground and turn freely.
4-56
DIFFERENTIAL - OIL CHANGE

Place a container under the screw plug (2) to collect
old oil.
operation, unscrew the plug (1) completely.
Unscrew the screw plug (2).
Oil flows out of the screw plug (2).
Fill new oil through the screw plug (1) hole. The oil
level must be flush with the hole lower edge.
Screw up the screw plug (1). 76
TRAVEL GEARBOXES - OIL CHANGE

According to the type of wheel-hub, set screw plugs
(2) for oil drain into the shown positions.
Screw plug (1) must be above the centreline.
The line under the word “Front” must be in horizon-
tal position.
Clean the area around the screw plugs (1) and (2).
old oil.
pressure is completely released.
Only after this operation, unscrew the screw plug (1)
completely. 77
Unscrew the screw plug (2). Oil flows out of the

screw plug (2).
Fill new oil through the screw plug (1) hole.
The oil level must be flush with the hole lower edge.
Perform the oil change in the same way also for the
other travel gearbox.
78
4-57
SECTION 4
RIGID AXLE AND GEARBOX - OIL

CHANGE
S WARNING S
The axle and the gearbox may also be hot after a
long journey.
Let the axle and the gearshift box cool down and
wear working gloves.
The axle and the gearshift box may be slightly over
pressurized, so turn the control plug carefully, just
far enough to release the excess pressure (audible
hissing sound).
the environment.

Block the steering axle wheels by placing chocks
under them.
working attachment until the wheels of the rigid axle
are clear of the ground and turn freely.
GEARSHIFT BOX - OIL CHANGE

Place a container under the gearshift box screw
plug (1) to collect old oil.
operation, unscrew the screw plug (2) completely.
Oil flows out from the plug (1) hole.
Fill new oil through the plug (2) hole.
The oil level must be flush with the hole lower edge. 79
4-58
DIFFERENTIAL - OIL CHANGE

Clean the area around the plugs (1) and (2).
old oil.
Oil flows out of the screw plug (2).
The oil level must be flush with the screw plug (1) 80
lower edge.
TRAVEL GEARBOXES - OIL CHANGE

depending on the gearbox installed. The line under
the word “REAR” or “OIL” must be in horizontal posi-
tion.
old oil.
Oil flows out of the screw plug (2). 81
The oil level must be flush with the hole lower edge.
Perform the oil change in the same way also for the
other travel gearbox.
4-59
SECTION 4
SERVICE BRAKE - PLATES CHECK

The check to carry out is the thickness of coatings.
To purchase the measurement device address to
your Dealer.
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Measurement of 3.8 4.5
maximum gap (mm) (0.15 in) (0.18 in)
The measurement has to be carried out on all

wheels and by following this procedure.
Move the machine so that the plugs (1) set to shown
position.
Lock the service brake.
82
Screw the measuring device (2) in the screw plug.
Loosen the lock-nut (4) of measuring device.
Screw the threaded shaft (5) up to stroke end by
means of star knob.
Bring the scaled ring nut (3) to position “0” and then
lock the lock-nut (4).
Release the service brake.
Screw the threaded shaft (5) up to stroke end by
means of star knob.
During the tightening determine the quantity of full
turns (see “0” reference of the graduated scale) and
the value of the last half-turn. A complete turn corre- 83
sponds to 1 mm (0.039 in) of shaft stroke, while
each notch of the graduated scale corresponds to
0.1 mm (0.0039 in).
Perform the measurement and check the value
detected with the reference one.
If the value detected is higher or equal to the refer-
ence value, replace the brake plates. In such cases,
contact the After-sales service.
Unscrew the measuring device (2) and tighten the
screw plug (1).
4-60
PILOT CONTROL FILTER - CHANGE

Activate the parking brake.
Relieve the pressure from the hydraulic system.
The filter of the pilot control is built-in in the valves
block (1), installed in the frame between the cab and
84
Unscrew the case (2) and move it downward as far
as possible. Do not let hydraulic oil flow out.
Remove the filter (3) with one turn.
Clean the filter case (2) and the seal surfaces on the
filter head.
Fit the new filter (3) with one turn.
Tighten the case (2) in the filter head.
Once the hydraulic system is operating, check the
tightness of the filter case.
Discard used filters according to environment legis-
lation.
85
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM -

CLEANING AND OPERATION CHECK -
COMPRESSOR BELT CHANGE
S WARNING S
Shut off the engine and let it cool down before car-
rying out any maintenance work.
Disconnect the blower from electric power supply.
In this case possible injuries caused by the acci-
dental activation of the blower are avoided.
Some parts of the air conditioning system (e.g. the
heat exchanger and the resistor of the blower) may
still be hot after shutdown. Risk of scalding! Let
them cool before restart working.
Avoid any skin contact with the coolant.
Wear goggles to protect your eyes. If, although you
wear goggles, some coolant gets in contact with
your eyes, seek medical advice immediately.
4-61
SECTION 4
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The air conditioning system consists of:
- blower (1);
- heat exchanger (2);
- evaporator (3);
- panel filter (4);
- heating valve (5);
- draining sleeve for condensate discharge (6);
- motor for air re-circulation and outer air intake (7);
- thermostat, electronic control unit (8);
86
- feet area air outlets (9);
- air outlet on front and rear window (10);
- coolant inlet (11);
- coolant outlet (12);
- connection of air conditioning hoses (13);
- air from outside (14) inlet;
(these elements are accessible by removing the
upper cover)
- condenser (15): it is visible from the cab, being
installed in front of the multi-cooler;
87
- cooler tank with dehumidifier (16): it is installed in
the batteries compartment;
88
- compressor (17): it is installed in the engine com-
partment on the front;
- compressor belt (18).
89
4-62
OPERATION CHECK AND CLEANING

Perform a general check of the system and of its
components.
Check the coolant level.
Check hoses and connections for tightness and
proper laying.
Check the good conditions and the correct fastening
of connectors and of electric wires.
Check that evaporator fins (3) are not bent: if this is
the case, straighten them again.
Check that the antifreeze probe is not bent or shows
leaks.
Check if the condensate of the sleeve (6) is able to 90
drain.
Clean the panel filter (4).
Check the operation of the heating valves (5).
Clean the heat exchanger (2), the evaporator (3)
and the blower (1).
Clean the condenser (15).
When the condenser is dirty, its performance is
poor. Clean with compressed air or with a sprayer
(do not use high-pressure jet cleaners). Possible
bent fins must be straightened again.
91
Check the operation of the compressor (17). Check
the tightening of the fastening screws.
Check the condition and the tension of belt (18).
92
4-63
SECTION 4
Check the operation of the selector for temperature

adjustment (19).
If the selector is hard to move, check that the tie-rod
is not bent or rusted, eventually replace it.
93
COMPRESSOR BELT - REPLACEMENT
S WARNING S
Risk of injury from hot or rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
Shut off the engine before opening the engine
hood.
After operation, even the compressor can be hot.
Let it cool down before performing any work.
IMPORTANT: if the belt tension is not correct, the

compressor performance may be impaired.
This can also cause damages to the belt and to the
compressor.
The compressor (1) is fastened to the engine block.
Loosen the lock screw (3).
Loosen the belt tension (2), by shifting the compres-
sor (1) toward the engine with swinging movements.
Replace the damaged belt (2) with a new one.
By shifting the compressor (1) to the right with
swinging movements, tension the belt (2).
Tighten the lock screw (3) again.
Check belt tension.
Press with the thumb the belt in the centre between 94
the pulleys. It must flex of about 10 mm (0.39 in). If
the tension does not correspond to this parameter,
you must loosen or tension the belt accordingly.
Check that the fastening screws (4) of compressor
(1) to the support and to the engine support, are
tightened correctly. tighten them, if necessary.
After some hours of operation, check the belt (2)
condition and tension.
4-64
SERVICE AFTER 3000 HOURS
Replacement
SERVICE POINTS Check Oil change Cleaning Air bleeding
/ Change
Oil tank
Engine - valves clearance
Cooling system liquid
Fuel tank
Slewing gearbox
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK - CLEANING

AND OIL CHANGE
S WARNING S
Never let hydraulic oils to come in contact with the
skin.
Wear protective gloves.
the environment.
HYDRAULIC OIL DRAIN
S WARNING S
Do not start the engine if hydraulic oil has been
drained.
By turning dry, the hydraulic pumps get damaged or
broken.
Bring engine oil to operating temperature (about

50 °C (122 °F)).
Retracting the cylinders as much as possible and
lay the working attachment on the ground.
95
Release the pressure from the hydraulic oil tank.
Place a collecting container under the hydraulic oil
tank (1) and the multi-cooler (5).
Drain the hydraulic oil from the tank (1) by means of
proper hose (2).
The oil drain sleeve (3) of the tank is accessible
from the bottom though an opening on the counter-
weight.
To drain the oil from the cooler, unscrew the filling
cap (4) cautiously, to allow that the pressure con-
tained in the oil cooling system, can be released. 96
Only after this operation, unscrew the plug com-
pletely. Collect the hydraulic oil in the container at
disposal.
4-65
SECTION 4
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK - CLEANING
S WARNING S
Do not use petroleum, paraffin oil or other solvents
to clean the tank.
This can cause the formation of gas easy flamma-
ble and explosive.
Use therefore only hydraulic oil or paraffin oil for the
special detergent for cleaning and washing the
tank.
Discard hydraulic oil and dirty rags according to
environment legislation.
Unscrew all screws (1) and remove the cover (2).

Place a container to collect detergent oil under the
hydraulic oil tank.
Clean the tank (3) inside with hydraulic oil or deter-
gent oil.
Remove all deposits and detergents residuals.
Replace the gasket under the cover (2).
Reassemble the cover (2) and fasten it with the
screws (1).
97
HYDRAULIC OIL FILLING

Remove the return filter cover.
Loosen the bleeding plug on the hydraulic oil tank
(1).
Fill hydraulic oil inside of filter chamber, until oil
comes out from the bleeding plug (1). Tighten the
bleeding plug.
Carry on with the hydraulic oil filling, until the level
on the gauge (4) reaches the “max” reference.
Bleed air from the hydraulic system.
Check the oil level on the gauge (4) inside of the
hydraulic oil tank (3).
98
99
4-66
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - AIR BLEEDING

Beyond respecting the maintenance intervals, air
must be bled from the hydraulic system after each
oil change: pumps, engines and cylinders have to
be accurately bled of air. If this is not the case, their
performance during intake and operation will be
seriously affected.
Unscrew the breather plugs (1) on the working
pump and the breather plugs of the slewing pump
(2) on the regulator side, in front of the flange.
Hydraulic oil flows from the tank into the pumps, by
releasing the air outside.
Tighten again the bleeding plugs (1) and (2), as
soon as hydraulic oil starts to flow out from the hole 100
without air bubbles.
Start the engine and let it run idle and middle speed
for about two minutes.
Extend and retract all hydraulic cylinders repeatedly,
until their movements stop to knock.
Slew the upper structure repeatedly by reversing the
slewing direction.
ENGINE - CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

OF VALVES CLEARANCE
Consult your Dealer.
4-67
SECTION 4
COOLING SYSTEM LIQUID - CHANGE
S WARNING S
Drain the coolant only after it has cooled down suffi-
ciently.
Discard used coolant according to environment leg-
islation.

Activate the parking brake.
101
Open the cover of the engine compartment and the
door in front of the multi-cooler.
Prepare a collecting container for the coolant.
Unscrew plug (1) of expansion tank (2).
Unscrew screw plug (3) carefully just to release the
exceeding pressure from the system. Only after this
operation, unscrew the plug completely. Collect the
coolant in the prepared container.
Once the coolant has been completely released,
tighten the plug (3) again. Fill the new liquid inside
of the expansion tank (2), until the level sets 102
between references “min” and “max”.
Tighten the plug (1) again.
After a short test, check again the liquid level and, if
necessary, top up.
4-68
FUEL TANK - CLEANING
S WARNING S
Do not use petroleum, paraffin oil or other solvents
to clean the tank.
This can cause the formation of gas easy flamma-
ble and explosive.
Use therefore only hydraulic oil or detergent oil spe-
cially suited for the tank cleaning.
Follow the operator’s manual for detergent oil.
Do not spill fuel or detergent oil into the soil.
Store these products to reuse or to discard them,
according to environment legislation.
Empty the tank beforehand by using up as much

fuel as possible.
Check the residual quantity of fuel inside of the tank
and place a container, sufficiently big, under the
drain plug (3) of the tank (4) to collect fuel.
Remove the base-plate for maintenance below the
fuel tank. Now the drain plug (3) is accessible.
Unscrew the drain plug (3), located under the fuel
tank (4) and drain the fuel.
Place the container under the tank (4) to collect the
detergent liquid.
Unscrew the cover of the filling neck (1). 103
Remove the little filter (2).
Clean the tank by means of the proper device and
wash it.
Screw the drain plug (3).
Reinstall the maintenance base-plate.
Refit the little filter (2) into the filler neck.
Refuel through the little filter (2) installed inside of
the filler neck.
Tighten the plug (1) again.
4-69
SECTION 4
SLEWING GEARBOX - OIL CHANGE
S WARNING S
the environment.
Perform the oil change with the machine at opera-
tion temperature; hot oil drains more easily.
DRAINING HOSE FOR OIL CHANGE

The gearbox is equipped with a special sleeve (1)
for oil discharge.
In this way the oil change can be performed in a
clean and not polluting way.
Perform the oil change in this way:
- place under the drain sleeve a collecting container
for old oil;
- take from the equipment available the relevant
draining hose;
- unscrew the blanking plug (3) from the oil drain
sleeve (1);
104
- screw up the hose (2). The sleeve (1) opens auto-
matically and oil is discharged;
- once oil has been drained, unscrew the hose (2).
The drain sleeve (1) closes independently;
- retighten the protection cover (3).
OIL CHANGE
Prepare a collecting container for used oil.
The oil drain sleeve (1) is accessible from the bot-
tom though an opening on the upper structure.
Unscrew cover (4) of the expansion tank (5).
Unscrew the blanking plug (3) from drain sleeve (1). 105
Drain oil through the drain hose (2).
Raise the oil drain hose on the travel gearbox.
Fill in the new oil through the drain hose, until the
level inside of the expansion tank reaches an height
of about 1-2 cm (0.39-0.79 in).
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw up the cover (4) of the expansion tank (5).
106
4-70
SERVICE WHEN NECESSARY
Pressure
SERVICE POINTS Check Cleaning Air bleeding Replacement
release
Machine
Windscreen wiper
Engine - Drive belt
Engine - Injectors
Hydraulic system
Tyres
Service brake
Steering axle - Steering
adjustment
Axle floating locking cylinders
Fuses
Lights - Floodlamps - Bulbs
Batteries
Buckets teeth
Clamshell - Wear
MACHINE - CLEANING
A periodical cleaning, correctly executed, allows the The best protection for the machine against the
machine to maintain its performances. harmful influences of the environment, can be
It can moreover be one of the reason for claiming a achieved only by washing it frequently and by treat-
guarantee service, if corrosion damages take even- ing it with proper preservatives. How often the
tually place. machine must undergo to the above mentioned
treatment, depends also by the operative condi-
The necessary products for machine care can be tions, by the seasons and weather and environment
required from the After-sales service or from the conditions.
Spares Parts Department. The use instructions
The greater is the time, resin of the trees, road pow-
printed on the packages must be strictly observed.
ders, yards and industries powders, tar spots, soot
deposits, antifreezing salt and other aggressive liq-
S WARNING S uids stick to the varnish, the greater and persistent
If used in the wrong way, the machine cleaning is their destructive effect. High temperatures, due
products may become harmful for health. They for instance to intensive solar radiations, increase
have to be stored always with the outmost care and the corrosive effect. It can therefore happen, that
safely. the machine washdown is daily necessary, as well
The machine cleaning products residuals have to as that a monthly washdown with the relative pre-
be disposed of according to the environment legis- servative treatment, is sufficient. When performing
lation. the washdown, wash accurately also the part below
the machine.
4-71
SECTION 4
DAMAGES TO THE VARNISH

S WARNING S Small damages to the varnish, like scratches,
To protect the environment, wash the machine only
grooves or stone blows, have to be covered imme-
at washing stations, duly equipped for this job, and
diately with stick, spray or touch up varnish, before
possibly also equipped with oil and grease collect-
the formation of rust. In case of a light formation of
ing tanks for disposal. To wash the machine outside
rust, this should be accurately eliminated. Finally,
these stations, could in some territories and nations
on the concerned spot, apply a anticorrosion base
even be forbidden.
and then the varnish coat.
IMPORTANT: when washing the machine, do not
direct the water jet toward electric or electronic com- CAB GLASSES AND MIRRORS
ponents or assies or on ports. The water sprays and Snow and ice have to be removed from glasses and
jets can cause misfunctioning or damage of the mirrors with rubber blades. To avoid the scratches
whole electronic system. caused by dirt, do not move the blades forward and
back but let them only slide. Clean the glasses also
WASHING OF THE MACHINE BY HAND inside.
With plenty of water soften first all dirt and rinse as Residuals of rubber, oil, wax, grease or silicone can
well as possible. be removed with a detergent for glasses or silicone.
Clean up the machine at last with a sponge or a
suitable brush. PLASTIC AND IMITATION LEATHER
COMPONENTS
Finally wash the wheels, the undercarriage and the
stabilizers. For this operation use, if possible, a sec- The outer plastic components have to be cleaned
ond sponge or brush. up with water, while the inner ones with a humid
cloth.
Use shampoo only in case of hard dirt.
If this is not sufficient, the plastic components and
If the machine is sprayed with a hose, the water jet the leather imitation ones have to be treated only
should not be directed toward the locks and hinges with specific products without solvents, suitable for
of doors and hatches or toward other openings. In the cleaning and care of plastic.
winter they could freeze.
PADDINGS AND FABRIC UPHOLSTERING
WASHING THE MACHINE WITH HIGH
PRESSURE CLEANER The paddings and the fabric upholstering of the
operator’s seat and cab roof, have to be cleaned
Strictly observe the manufacturer operator’s manual with specific detergents of with dry-chemical foam
of the cleaner, particularly for what it concerns the and with a soft brush.
pressure and jet distance.
Do not use rotary nozzles or the so-called “dirt-eat- SEAT BELT CLEANING
ing nozzles”. Keep seat belt clean! Dirty belts have to be cleaned
The water temperature should not exceed 60 °C only with soaped water, without to take them apart.
(140 °F).
RIMS
POLISHING The wheels rims have to be cleaned accurately dur-
Polishing is necessary only if the varnish has ing the machine wash. You avoid in this way the dirt
become opaque and if even with the use of preserv- and aggressive materials build-up. Very hard dirt
atives the brilliance cannot be achieved. build-ups can be removed with an industrial cleaner.
Damaged varnish has to be reworked, before the
NOTE: the components coated with opaque var- formation of rust.
nishes and plastic have not to be treated with pol-
ishers and hard waxes.
4-72
WINDSCREEN WIPER - CHECK AND

CLEANING
For a good visibility from the operator’s side a good
cleaning of the cab windows is required.
In order to maintain this status, the good condition
and operation of the windscreen wiper blades is cru-
cial.
For a perfect visibility, a long glasses life and a cor-
rect operation, it is absolutely necessary to use
quality blades. To avoid the formation of scratches,
the windscreen wiper blades, should be cleaned
periodically with a specific detergent. With hard dirt,
the blades cleaning has to be performed with a
sponge or a rag.
After the cleaning, activate the screen wiper to
check the reaction on the glasses.
NOTE: with ice, before setting the machine in oper-
ation for the first time, check that blades are not fro-
zen.
DRIVE BELT - CHANGE
S WARNING S
Danger of injuries caused by blower and belts in
motion.
Before opening the hood, shut off the engine.
ers hot components.
Open the cooler side cover on the right side of the

upper structure.
Now the drive belt is accessible.
Activate the automatic belt tensioner (3) with a spe-
cial wrench (1) and remove the old drive belt (2)
from the alternator, from the pumps and the pulley.
Place the new drive belt (2) to correct position on
the pulley, pumps, alternator and idle rollers.
Restore the tensioning operation of the automatic
belt tensioner (3).
Other kinds of adjustment are not required.
107
4-73
SECTION 4
INJECTORS - REPLACEMENT - On adjusting cylinders with break protection valve

at cylinder head side. This residual pressure may
Consult your Dealer.
release, by retracting nearly completely the con-
cerned cylinder and by lifting the undercarriage of
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND TANK - about 10 cm (3.93 in) with the attachment com-
pletely extended. During this operation the
PRESSURE RELEASE machine leans on the cylinder bottom side allow-
ing the cylinder head to release the pressure.
S WARNING S
Only unpressurized hydraulic systems may be
opened. Even if the machine is parked in horizontal
position, with its attachment supported on the
ground and the engine shut off, there may still be
substantial residual pressure in parts of the hydrau-
lic system:
- the primary pressure of the last hydraulic move-
ments, before the machine stop;
- the secondary pressure, produced by the
machine own weight or by the attachment single
elements. The secondary pressure is present,
until the component creating the pressure is set
to rest position, for instance by means of
mechanical supports, that allow to clear off the
supporting function of the hydraulic system.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE

Turn the ignition key to position “I” (ignition ON).
Activate the pilot control.
Activate both hydraulic control levers or pedals in
both directions required for the works at hand.
Set the ignition key to position “0” (ignition OFF).
Disconnect the pilot control.
Before activating the cylinders, equipped with break
protection valves, pay particular attention, because
after the activation of the hydraulic control lever or
pedals, some residual pressure may be present
inside of the cylinder.
- On lifting cylinders with break protection valve at
bottom side. This residual pressure can be dis-
charged by lifting the undercarriage of about
10 cm (3.93 in).
During this operation the machine leans on the
cylinder head side allowing the cylinder bottom to
release the pressure.
4-74
PRESSURE RELEASE FROM HYDRAULIC OIL

TANK
For this operation fit the locking pin (2) laterally into
the bleeding valve (1) and air intake. Now unscrew
the valve (1) with care, until the bleeding hole opens
(you hear a hissing).
Now the residual pressure inside of working attach-
ment and of hydraulic pilot control has been
released.
108
Tighten the valve (1) manually and take out the lock-
ing pin (2).
109
4-75
SECTION 4
TYRES - CHANGE
Loosen the wheel nuts (1) of the wheel (2) by
approximately 1 full turn.
Raise the axle with the defective wheel slightly, until
the wheels come clear of the ground. For this opera-
tion the machine can be lifted at the concerned side
either with the working equipment or with the stabi-
lizers.
Place wooden chocks under the lifted axle, to avoid
that it lowers.
Relieve the pressure from the tyres.
Unscrew nuts (1) from the concerned wheel (2) and
the middle ring (optional).
Mark the inner wheel and the outer one. Do not lose 110
the centering rings, the spring washers and the
wheel nuts. They have to be reused for reassembly.
Fit the new tyres and inflate both of them at about
1 bar (14.5 psi).
Observe the assembly sequence:
- inner wheel (rims with greater camber angle);
- intermediate ring (optional);
- outer wheel (rims with minor camber angle).
Observe the sequence absolutely, because in
case of wrong assembly of the wheels, the maxi-
mum allowable with of the machine can be
exceeded;
- pay attention to the tread position;
- do not damage the threads of the wheel studs;
- centre the intermediate ring;
- no foreign body must be stuck between the tyres
and the intermediate ring.
Tighten the nuts (1) of the wheel (2) by hand.
Remove the wooden chocks under the raised axle
and lower it.
Tighten the nuts (1) of the wheel (2) to the pre-
scribed torque.
Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure.
Check, after some service hours, the tightening of
the wheel nuts by means of a torque wrench.
4-76
WHEELS TREAD POSITION

Observe the tread position when fitting the wheels.
(A) = Shows the tread position recommended for all-
wheel driven machines which must have the same
traction power for both driving directions.
111
(B) = Shows the tread position of the tyres when the
all-wheel-driven machine needs especially good
traction in one direction, e.g. during work with the
levelling blade.
112
4-77
SECTION 4
SERVICE BRAKE - AIR BLEEDING

The braking system of this machine consists of two
braking circuits. One circuit is designed for the pair
of wheels of the steering axle, while the other circuit
is designed for the pair of wheels of the rigid axle.
If works have been performed on the braking sys-
tem, causing the penetration of air inside of the sys-
tem, for instance during a hose replacement, once
these works have been completed, bleed the air
from the concerned circuit.
Secure the machine so that it cannot move acciden-
tally.
Link a hose on the connection (1) of a multi-plate
brake.
Connect the other end of the hose with a container,
previously filled with hydraulic oil.
Start the engine.
Depress the pedal and hold, until hydraulic oil, flows
out from the hose without air bubbles.
Repeat this operation also with the other brake of
the same axle. In this way air is bleeded from one
braking circuit. 113
STEERING ADJUSTMENT
To ensure the correct travel and steering operation,
the steering stop has to be adjusted according to
machine type. According to the axle and tyres type,
also the steering stop changes.
At each axle or tyres change, adjust correctly the
steering stop and keep it constantly under control.
Through the axle joint rotation (4), the steering force
are transferred to the wheel, which on its turn, is
steered by the stub axle. The steering stop is limited
by a spacer (1), fastened to the joint by means of a
screw (2) and a thrust stop (3), placed on the axle
body. In this way the steering wheels can turn safely
without coming in touch with other elements, even
when they are completely steered and the axle is
fully inclined.
114
4-78
AXLE FLOATING LOCKING CYLINDERS

- AIR BLEEDING
Unscrew the plugs (2) on both cylinders.
Push the pistons down, until they lean on the thrust
block of the axle.
Fill both cylinders with hydraulic oil and retighten the
plugs (2).
Unscrew both breather screws (1) and fill the ports
with hydraulic oil. 115
Screw up the breather screws (1) without tightening
them.
Start the engine and release the brake.
Disconnect the floating axle lock by depressing
push-button (3), the lamp and the symbol turn off.
When the flowing out oil is without air bubbles,
tighten the bleeding screws (1).
116
4-79
SECTION 4
FUSES - REPLACEMENT
Shut off the engine and turn the ignition key to posi-
tion “0”, before removing the fuses.
Replace faulty fuses only with fuses of the same
amperages.
The fuses are placed in two fuse boxes (A) and (B):
a box (A) under the seat on the left side and the
other (B) on the right side of the cabin under the
control panel.
Remove the transparent cover (2) of the fuse holder,
after prior removal of the two side clamps (1).
Now you can have access to fuses.
117
118
If an electric control does not react, check the rele-
vant fuse as first thing.
Take out the fuse from the fuse holder. A suitable YES NO
tool for this operation is located in the fuse box.
Check the fuse. Nearly always it is possible to check
visually if a fuse is burnt out. In case of doubt, check
with an Ohmeter or replace the burnt fuse with a
new one.
If the fuse is burn out, fit in the fuse holder another
fuse with the same amperage.
If the fuse is still intact, check the relevant electric
unit, the connectors and cables.
119
4-80
FUSES LEGEND
Cab - Fuse box (A)
Power-Relay (main switch function), electronic control unit, engine stop solenoid
FA.1 5A
shrinkage coil
FA.2 5A Start-Relay, optional: Grid-Heater-Controller
FA.3 5A Free
FA.4 2A Sensors earthing
FA.5 15A Optional: Filling system
Electric-hydraulic pilot control safety switch, Relay for main unit voltage supply,
FA.6 5A
work pilot control lamp, travel pilot control lamp
FA.7 5A Box Voltage Supply - Power Control System
FA.8 5A Parking brake switch, brake lamp (lamp), alternator (energizing voltage)
FA.9 10A Optional: seat compressor, additional heating gauge
FA.10 5A Optional: stabilizers/blade
FA.11 10A Main beams
FA.12 1A Voltage supply for left and right hydraulic control levers
FA.13 2A Voltage supply - Electro-Hydraulic Controller
FA.14 30A Voltage supply - Electro-Hydraulic Controller
FA.15 1A Voltage supply for travel pedal and key-pad module on flywheel
FA.16 5A Optional: lubrication pump voltage supply
FA.17 15A Optional: Additional heating
FA.18 5A Optional: Additional heating
FA.19 7.5A Optional: blower level 1 for additional heating
FA.20 5A Optional: quick coupler
FA.21 5A Optional: heating filter relay, Grid-Heater-Controller
FA.22 30A Optional: heating filter
FA.23 25A Stop solenoid shrinkage coil
FA.24 5A Diagnostics electric socket
FA.25 10A Voltage supply for 24 V/12 V radio and socket transformer
FA.26 2A Relay for cab inner light
FA.27 2A Power-Relay (main switch operation)
FA.28 15A Ignition start lock
FA.29 5A Emergency direction indicators
FA.30 15A Blower / compressor for air conditioner
FA.31 - Free
FA.32 - Free
4-81
SECTION 4
Cab - Fuses box (B)
FB.1 10A Optional: rotary light

FB.2 10A Optional: cab rear working floodlamps
FB.3 10A Front cab working floodlamps
FB.4 10A Screen wiper and glasses wash pump
FB.5 5A Cab inner light
FB.6 7.5A Voltage supply for 24V/12V radio and socket transformer
FB.7 2A Voltage supply for display and key-pad module in the cab
FB.8 5A Optional: frequency switching valve
FB.9 5A Lights and switches function
FB.10 - Free
FB.11 - Free
FB.12 - Free
FB.13 - Free
FB.14 - Free
FB.15 - Free
FB.16 - Free
Engine compartment
F20 125A Grid-Heater
4-82
BULBS - REPLACEMENT
Burnt bulbs have to be replaced with bulbs of same
power.
Before installing a new bulb, remove all traces of
corrosion from the holder and the electrical con-
tacts.
This helps avoid contact problems and high contact
resistances.
Never touch new bulbs with bare fingers. Finger
marks and dirt will burn in when the bulb is hot and
may reduce the service life of the bulb.
Because of this, wrap a clean rag or a piece of the
packing around the bulb and fit the same into the
bulb holder.
CAB LIGHT
Unlock and remove the light cover (1).
Now the bulbs are accessible and can be replaced.
Refit the cover (1) and lock it.
120
4-83
SECTION 4
FRONT WORKING FLOODLAMPS

Remove the light from the cab roof.
With your fingers, compress the safety bracket
(arrows) on connector (2) and remove the connec-
tor.
Unscrew the nut (1) with a spanner.
Remove working floodlamp (4) with the cap (3).
Holding the working floodlamp (4) still, turn the cap
(3) to the left and remove it.
Press one side of the safety bracket (6) and move it
upwards.
Replace the lamp (5).
Assemble by following procedure in reverse order.
121
122
BOOM WORKING FLOODLAMP
Unscrew the fastening screws (1) of the covering
glass (2).
Open the locking clamp (3) and replace the bulb (4).
123
124
4-84
TRAVEL FLOODLAMP
Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the floodlamp
(2) from the upper structure frame.
Remove the large rubber cap (6) from the floodlamp
back.
Disconnect the electric connector (4).
Remove the protection cap (3) from the bulb holder.
Open the lock bracket (5) of the bulb.
Replace the bulb.
125
126
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS
glass (2).
The bulb (3) is fitted inside a plug-in bulb holder (4):
- press the bulb (3) and turn it to the left;
- take out the bulb (3);
- lock the new bulb (3) firmly inside of the bulb
holder (4).
Reassemble the covering glass (2) and fasten it with
screws (1).
127
128
4-85
SECTION 4
REAR FLOODLAMPS
glass (2) of the lamps.
Remove the covering glass (2) of the lamps.
The bulbs are fitted inside a plug-in bulb holder.
Press the bulb and turn it to the left.
Remove the bulb.
Insert and correctly block a new lamp into the bulb
holder.
Screw in the covering glass of the lamps.
A. Tail light
B. Rear fog lights
C. Turn lights
D. Stop light 129
130
4-86
BATTERIES - REPLACEMENT
S WARNING S
Shut off the engine before removing batteries, to
prevent damaging the alternator and regulator or
the electronic modules.
Disconnect clamps from poles in the correct
sequence.
A sequence error can cause a short-circuit.

Set the ignition key to position “0” (start OFF).
Open the hood (1): is held open thanks to gas
springs (2).
Now batteries are accessible (3).
131
Unscrew the screws (5) and remove the locks (4).
Remove the cap (6).
Disconnect the clamp of the battery negative pole (-
).
Disconnect the clamp of the battery positive pole
(+).
Insulate the clamps.
Remove the batteries (3).
Before installing the new batteries, polish the con-
tact faces of the battery poles and clamps.
Install the new batteries (3). 132
Connect the clamp to the battery positive pole (+).
Connect the clamp to the battery negative pole (-).
Tighten the clamps screw firmly.
Avoid to overtighten the screws so as not to damage
them.
Finally apply grease or non-corrosive Vaseline to
the battery poles and clamps.
The presence of loosen or corroded clamps gener-
ates overloads on the generator and regulator.
Reassemble the cover (6) and the locks (4) and fas-
ten them with screws (5).
Close the hood (1).
4-87
SECTION 4
BUCKETS TEETH - CHANGE
S WARNING S
Nobody must stay in the way of the tooth or tooth
safety latch that has to be extracted.
The safety latch or the tooth can suddenly be
ejected when driven out and hit persons.
Metal splinters may cause injury.
Wear your personal protective equipment and gog-
gles.
Drive out tooth safety latch (1) using a piece of

smooth metal or of hard wood (2).
133
To drive out the tooth (3) from housing (4), cover the
same with a piece of smooth metal or of hard wood
(2).
134
Clean inside of housing and remove dirt and corro-
sion.
Fit new tooth (3) into the housing (4).
135
4-88
The tooth must be in contact with the housing

(arrow).
Drive in new safety latch (1) into the port (5) of the
housing (4). The latch can be driven into the hous-
ing from either side.
136
CLAMSHELL - WEAR CHECK

When the normal wear of the clamshell blades and
end stroke stops exceeds the allowed value, the
clamshell cylinder may get damaged. In such a case
the allowed cylinder stroke is exceeded; cylinder
piston and liner bump one against the other at
stroke end.
To verify the wear status on clamshells for trenches,
reference marks are applied in the factory:
- on the guide rod (1) by means of a punch;
- on the cylinder rod (2) by means of a tool.
Repair the bucket prior that the cylinder rod (2)
aligns with one of the marks on the guide rod (1).
The lower mark indicates the clamshell blades wear,
while the upper mark indicates the wear of the end
stroke stops of the clamshell clams.
137
4-89
SECTION 4
NOTES:
4-90
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults are often due to the machine not having been
operated or serviced properly.
When dealing with faults, it is therefore necessary to
read the corresponding chapter of the operating
instructions once again.
If you cannot find the cause of a fault or rectify it,
contact the After-sales service.
Describe the fault and the accompanying circum-
stances as precisely as possible when contacting
our After-sales service. Exact information helps to
locate and to rectify faults as fast as possible.
Never do work for which you are not qualified.
The present fault table lists the faults reported to
date, their possible causes and the remedial action.
In exceptional cases, a described fault may also
have another cause.
FAULT
The fault is described as a result of an observation
or of a preceding activity.
Observe the machine carefully.
Examine the problem thoroughly.
Ask yourself the following questions:
- Which warning signs preceded the fault?
- Which repair and maintenance work had been
performed beforehand?
- Has this defect already been noticed in the past?
- Are we faced with one or with several defects
occurring at the same time?
POSSIBLE CAUSES
This column describes the possible causes of the
fault observed. The causes are listed in the order of
their probability of occurrence, the possible cause
applying in most of the cases is mentioned in first
place.
CORRECTION
This column informs about how to detect the causes
of faults and how to remedy them.
5-1
SECTION 5
ERRORS INDICATION ON THE DISPLAY

When a fault occurs, the multi-function display
shows on the upper section an error code (for
instance # 7004), at the same time two lamps one
yellow (2) and one red (3) light up; according to the
fault they can light up either singularly or together. ERROR CODE
According to the fault seriousness, also an acoustic
warning can be released. Error explanation
(rows of 25 digits)
RED Serious fault
+ The persons safety and/or the

operation of the machine’s
CONTINUOUS main assemblies are endan-
SOUND gered.
1
Fault insignificant for the

safety of persons and for
YELLOW machine operation.
+ These faults have to be
SINGLE cleared as soon as possible.
SOUND In the majority of cases
though, the full machine func-
tionality remains unchanged.
S WARNING S
The serious faults have to be cleared immediately.
Shut off the machine immediately.
Beyond the error code, in the lower section of the

multi-function display, appears a short explanation
of the error code.
In some particular cases, some faults can occur
concurrently.
In such a case, the relevant error codes are indi-
cated, by alternating one after the other in the usual
visualization.
5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
The engine does start at all or Improper starting procedure. Revise the starting procedure.
starts only with difficulty.
Starting temperature too low. Perform preheating.
Troubles at start-up. Consult your Dealer.
Fuel unsuitable. Drain fuel tank and refill with fuel of

correct type.
Dirty or contaminated fuel. Drain fuel tank and refill with clean
fuel.
Lack of fuel. Add fuel. Perform air bleeding.
Air filter dirty or clogged. Clean or replace the filtering

elements.
Fuel filter dirty or clogged. Replace fuel filter.
Batteries defective or discharged. Charge or replace batteries.
Starter motor faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Cable for starter connection loose or Check and replace the cable.
oxidized.
Starter fuse or relay faulty. Replace.
Defective wiring connections. Clean and tighten battery and starter

motor terminals.
Stop solenoid locked or seized. Consult your Dealer.
Engine stop solenoid wiring faulty. Check and/or repair wiring

connections.
Wrong valves clearance. Consult your Dealer.
Air in the feeding system. Bleed the feeding system.
Injector/s dirty or faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Injection line leaks. Check for leaks and rectify.
The engine starts but it does Inside mechanics blocked. Consult your Dealer.
not run.
Engine coupling side locked. Consult your Dealer.
The engine runs irregularly or Fuel system contaminated. Clean the system.
fails.
Fuel injector/s faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Leaks in the feeding system. Check system hoses and fittings.
5-3
SECTION 5
The engine runs irregularly or Fuel unsuitable. Drain fuel tank and refill with fuel of
fails. correct type.

elements.
The engine overheats. Multi-cooler dirty. Clean cooler.
Cooler fan faulty. Check and replace the cable.
Low coolant level. Add coolant.
Engine output is poor. Oil level too high. Top up oil level.

correct type.

elements.
Leaks in the feeding system. Check system hoses and fittings.
The engine does not run with Wrong valves clearance. Consult your Dealer.
all cylinders.
Engine oil pressure is non- Engine oil level low. Top up oil in correct quantity.
existent or excessively low.
Engine oil not suitable. Drain and refill with correct engine oil.
Excessive inclination of engine. Check and modify the engine

position.
Engine oil consumption Engine oil level too high. Decrease oil level.
excessive.

position.
Engine oil not suitable. Drain and refill with correct engine oil.
5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Exhaust smoke: blue. Engine oil level too high. Decrease oil level.

position.

elements.
Defective head gasket. Replace the gasket.
Exhaust smoke: white. Oil level too high. Decrease oil level.
Starting temperature too low. Engine preheating.

correct type.
Defective head gasket. Replace the gasket.
Exhaust smoke: black. Air filter dirty or clogged. Clean or replace the filtering
elements.
Leaks in the feeding system. Check for leaks and rectify.
Engine cannot be shut off, Stop solenoid locked or seized. Consult your Dealer.
lamps extinguished.
Engine power lowering. Fuel unsuitable. Drain fuel tank and refill with fuel of
correct type.

elements.
Charge-air line leaking. Check for leaks and rectify.
Control system not operational. Consult your Dealer.
Excessive fuel consumption. Fuel unsuitable. Drain fuel tank and refill with fuel of
correct type.
Air cleaner dirty or clogged. Clean or replace the filtering

elements.
Engine temperature low. Engine heater.
Injector/s dirty or clogged. Consult your Dealer.
5-5
SECTION 5
STEERING SYSTEM
Steering not operational. Air in the hydraulic system of the Bleed the system.
steering.
Steering wheel hard. Double pump without frictional Consult your Dealer.
connection.
Steering wheel hard to turn Oil level too low. Top up hydraulic oil in correct
when travelling on level quantity.
ground.
Defective valves. Consult your Dealer.
Tyres pressure too low. Check and inflate tyres at correct

pressure.
The steering floats (needs Air in the hydraulic system of the Bleed the system.
constant adjustments). steering.
Internal leaks in the power steering or Consult your Dealer.

cylinders.
Steering wheel easy to turn at Internal leaks in the power steering or Consult your Dealer.
limit stop. cylinders.
Steering wheel turns fast and Air in the hydraulic system of the Bleed the system.
uneven during steering action steering.
(steering discontinuous).
Internal leaks in the power steering or Consult your Dealer.

cylinders.
Oil supply rate insufficient. Consult your Dealer.
5-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKES SYSTEM
SERVICE BRAKE
Insufficient braking action or no Brake pedal valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
braking action at all.
Air in the accumulator. Consult your Dealer.
Air in the hydraulic braking system. Check for leaks and rectify.
Brake discs worn out. Replace the plates.
Air in the braking system. Bleed the system.
Brake valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Insufficient braking action or no Brake valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.

braking action at all.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake does not Malfunction of the parking brake Consult your Dealer.
release. valve.
Brake release pressure too low. Consult your Dealer.
Switch defective. Consult your Dealer.
Gearbox blocked. Consult your Dealer.
Parking brake not breaking. Malfunction of the parking brake Consult your Dealer.
valve.
5-7
SECTION 5
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Working and slewing Pilot control lever not in working Check and position lever correctly.
movements not operational. position.
Pilot control lever defective. Consult your Dealer.
Hydraulic oil level too low. Top up hydraulic oil in correct

quantity.
Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.

faulty.
Pilot control pump defective. Consult your Dealer.
Pumps drive coupling defective. Consult your Dealer.
Pressure relief valve defective. Consult your Dealer.
Working operation too slow. LOW IDLE too low. Check and adjust.
Fuel filter dirty or clogged. Clean or replace fuel filter.
Engine lacks power. Consult your Dealer.
Hydraulic oil temperature too high. Check.
Dirty oil cooler. Clean oil cooler.
Coolant temperature too high. Consult your Dealer.
Malfunction of pilot control valve. Consult your Dealer.
Power losses in working Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
hydraulics. faulty.
Malfunction of primary and secondary Consult your Dealer.

pressure limiting valves.
Independent working Pilot valve defective. Consult your Dealer.

movement after hydraulic
control lever activation.
Boom not operational. Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
faulty.

Right hydraulic control lever Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Boom lifting and lowering not Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
operational. faulty.


defective.
5-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Standard bucket inoperative. Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
faulty.


defective.
Standard bucket opening/ Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
closing not operational. faulty.


defective.
Dipper not operational. Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
faulty.

Left hydraulic control lever defective. Consult your Dealer.
Dipper extension and Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
retraction not operational. faulty.

pressure limiting valve.
Left hydraulic control lever defective. Consult your Dealer.
Boom adjusting cylinder Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
inoperative. faulty.

Auxiliary travel pedal defective. Consult your Dealer.
Boom adjusting cylinder exten- Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
sion/retraction not operational. faulty.

Auxiliary travel pedal defective. Consult your Dealer.
Bucket cylinder (clamshell) Switching valve from standard bucket Consult your Dealer.
extends without control. to clamshell does not close
completely.
Clamshell opens and closes Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
too slowly. faulty.

LOW IDLE too low. Check and adjust.
Fuel filter dirty or clogged. Clean or replace the fuel filter.
Engine lacks power. Consult your Dealer.
5-9
SECTION 5
TRAVEL
Machine does not move: no Hydraulic oil level too low. Top up hydraulic oil in correct
forward travel, nor reversing. quantity.
Travel fuse faulty. Replace fuse.
Parking brake blocked. Release parking brake.
Storage pressure too low. Consult your Dealer.
Control spool faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Travel direction pedal valve defective. Consult your Dealer.
Travel direction lever faulty. Check and/or replace lever.
Maximum speed not reached. Travel direction pedal valve defective. Consult your Dealer.
Travel motor operation and Consult your Dealer.

adjustment incorrect.
Low engine speed. Consult your Dealer.
Wheels brake setting incorrect. Check and adjust.
Insufficient engine power. Check and adjust.
Tyres pressure too low. Inflate tyres at correct pressure.
Hydraulic oil temperature too high. Cool oil.
Coolant temperature too low. Engine preheating.
Travelling power is insufficient. Pilot control pump defective. Consult your Dealer.
Travel direction pedal valve defective. Consult your Dealer.
Wheels brake setting incorrect. Check and adjust correctly.
Travel motor operation and Consult your Dealer.

adjustment incorrect.
5-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
SLEWING
Slewing not operational. Pilot control lever not in working Check and position lever correctly.
position.

quantity.

faulty.
Slewing pump supply system Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Upper structure parking brake locked. Check and release the brake.
Upper structure locking pin jammed. Remove the locking pin.
Upper structure slewing fuse faulty. Replace fuse.
Solenoid defective. Replace the solenoid.
Hydraulic control lever not Consult your Dealer.

operational.
Switch defective. Replace switch.
Slewing left or right not Pump adjustment slewing wrong. Check and adjust correctly.
operational.
Slewing power insufficient. Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
faulty.
Slewing pump supply system Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Slewing high pressure system Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Slewing motor leaking excessive. Consult your Dealer.
Display setting wrong. Perform correct display setting.
Spontaneous slewing. Slewing pump adjustment incorrect. Check and adjust correctly.
Air in the system. Bleed the air.
Upper structure brake not Pilot control pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.
operational. faulty.
Brake discs worn out. Replace the brake plates.
5-11
SECTION 5
FLOATING AXLE BLOCKING
Floating-axle support not Floating-axle blocking valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
blocking.
Pilot valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Floating-axle not blocking. Floating-axle blocking valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Pilot valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
Switch in blocked position. Check and remove switch from

blocking position.
Floating-axle blocking not Floating-axle blocking valve faulty. Consult your Dealer.
stable.
Blocking valve not vented. Vent blocking valve.
Noises during floating of axle. Contact faces of blocking cylinder not Lubricate contact faces of cylinders.
lubricated.
5-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
STABILIZERS
Stabilizer not operational. Pilot control lever not in working Check and position lever correctly.
position.

quantity.

faulty.
Primary pressure limiting valve Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Pilot control valve operation Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Engine inner leaks. Consult your Dealer.
Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.

defective operation.
Stabilizer legs not operational. Pilot control lever not in working Check and position lever correctly.
position.

quantity.

faulty.

defective.
Pilot control valve operation Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Engine inner leaks. Consult your Dealer.
Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.

Storage pressure of brake system too Check and increase the braking
low. pressure.
Selection of individual Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.

stabilizer leg cylinders not defective operation.
possible.
Storage pressure of brake system too Check and increase the braking
low. pressure.
Switch defective. Replace the switch.
Cylinders switching valve defective. Replace the valve.
5-13
SECTION 5
Cylinder extends without Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.

control. defective operation.
Cylinders internal leaks. Consult your Dealer.
Stabilizers cylinders retract Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.

without control. defective operation.
Blade cylinders extend or Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.

retract without control. defective operation.
The blade lays only one side. Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.
Stabilizer legs lay only on one Non-return valves of cylinders Consult your Dealer.
side. defective operation.
5-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
HYDRAULIC HAMMER
Hammer system not Pressure relief valve defective. Consult your Dealer.
operational.

defective.
Hammer power too low. Pressure relief valve defective. Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Low engine speed. Check and raise the engine power.
Hydraulic oil temperature too high. Consult your Dealer.
Coolant temperature too high. Consult your Dealer.
Pilot control lever not in working Check and inspect lever in working
position. position.

quantity.
Oil delivery too low. Consult your Dealer.
5-15
SECTION 5
CLAMSHELL BUCKET
Clamshell rotation not Clamshell rotation pump defective. Consult your Dealer.
operational.
Hydraulic oil level too low. Top up with hydraulic oil in correct
quantity.
Malfunction of clamshell-rotation Consult your Dealer.

pressure-limiting valve.
Clamshell rotation valve defective. Consult your Dealer.
Button on hydraulic control lever Consult your Dealer.

defective.
Clamshell rotation solenoid defective. Consult your Dealer.
Clamshell rotation motor defective. Consult your Dealer.
Pinion and ring gear worn. Replace pinion and ring gear.
Clamshell rotates very slowly. Malfunction of clamshell-rotation Consult your Dealer.

pressure-limiting valve.
Clamshell rotation solenoid defective. Consult your Dealer.
Clamshell rotation motor defective. Consult your Dealer.
At cylinders stroke end the Malfunction of clamshell-rotation Consult your Dealer.

clamshell does not rotate. pressure-limiting valve.
Clamshell blades or limit stops worn Replace.

out.
5-16
TROUBLESHOOTING
AXLES
Ring gear teeth broken Excessive gear load compared to the Replace bevel gear.
outside. one foreseen.
Gear adjustment wrong (excessive Follow carefully the recommended

backlash). operations for the adjustment of bevel
gear set backlash.
Pinion nut loose. Tighten pinion nut.
Ring gear teeth broken inside. Load bump. Replace bevel gear.
Gear adjustment wrong (insufficient Follow carefully the recommended

backlash). operations for the adjustment of bevel
gear set backlash.
Ring gear teeth or pinion teeth Insufficient lubrication. Use proper lubrication, fill up to right
damaged or scored. Contaminated oil. level and replace at recommended
Incorrect lubrication or depleted intervals.
additives.
Worn out pinion bearings that cause Replace bevel gear.

an incorrect pinion axle backlash and
wrong contact between pinion and
ring.
Overheated ring and pinion Prolonged functioning at high Replace bevel gear.
teeth. temperatures.
Incorrect lubrication. Use proper lubrication, fill up to right

Low oil level. level and replace at recommended
Contaminated oil. intervals.
Drive pinion teeth pitted. Excessive use. Replace bevel gear.
Insufficient lubrication. Use proper lubrication, fill up to right

level and replace at recommended
intervals.
Axle beam body bent. Vehicle overloaded. Replace axle beam body.
Damaged vehicle.
Load bump.
Bearings worn or pitted. Insufficient lubrication. Use proper lubrication, fill up to right
Contaminated oil. level and replace at recommended
intervals.
Excessive use. Replace bearings.
5-17
SECTION 5
Oil leakage from gaskets and Prolonged functioning at high Replace the gasket or seal and
seals. temperature of the oil. matching surface if damaged.
Oil gasket assembled incorrectly. Replace.
Damaged or worn gasket lip. Replace.
Contaminated oil. Use correct lubricants and replace at

recommended intervals.
Excessive wear of input flange Excessive use. Replace the flange.

spline.
Excessive pinion axial backlash. Check and adjust the backlash.
Pinion teeth cracked because Excessive use or continuous Replace bevel gear.
of the fatigue. overload.
Break of pinion and ring gear Crash load of differential Check and/or replace other
teeth. components. differential components.
Side gear spline worn out. Excessive use. Replace differential gear assy.
Replace axle beam, if necessary.
Thrust washer surface worn Insufficient lubrication. Use a correct lubricant, top up to
out or scratched. Incorrect lubrication. correct level and replace washers.
Contaminated oil.
Inner diameter of tapered roller Excessive use. Replace bearing.

bearings worn out.
Excessive pinion axial backlash. Check pinion axial backlash.
Insufficient lubrication. Use proper lubrication, fill up to right

Contaminated oil. level and replace at recommended
intervals.
Bent or broken axle beam. Vehicle intensively operated or Replace.

overloaded.
Axle beam broken at wheel Wheel support loose. Replace.

side.
Axle beam body bent. Ensure that wheel support is not worn
out or wrongly adjusted.
5-18
TROUBLESHOOTING
CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION PUMP

If the tank pump operates correctly can be checked
from outside, by checking the rotation of the mixing
blade (for instance by opening the connection of an
additional lubrication assy or by checking the lamps
of the control board).
If the pump motor in the tank Power supply cut out. Check the electric power supply for
does not rotate. the tank pump and, if necessary,
clear the trouble.
Cut out of electric power supply for Check that the wire from tank pump
control board. connector is linked to the control
board. If power supply is present, the
left lamp is alight.
Cut out of electric power supply from Start additional lubrication. If power
control board to starter motor. supply is present, the right lamp (3)
remains alight during the working
time.
Control board defective. Replace control board. Before

assembling the new board, you have
to set the time-outs and working
times as on the old board. Have
these setting performed by the After-
sales service.
5-19
SECTION 5

The right lamp (3) blinks. One of the two selectors (1) and (2) is Set both selectors on position 3.
positioned to 0.
Signals: 4-times flickering.
Short-circuit on button (4). Check if the short-circuit is occurred

Signals: 3-times flickering. on the control board. Replace the
board if necessary.
Different lubricant quantity on Wrong quantity. Check the quantity according to

lubrication points. lubrication diagram.
The relevant valve body has been Remove the valve and fit the locking
assembled without locking ring. ring.
Wrong setting of working and time- Check the times setting.

out times.
Excess or lack of lubrication on Wrong setting of working and time- Check the setting of the working and
the lubrication point. out times. time-out time on control units, control
boards or controls.
System locking downhill. Articulation points, pipes or Detect and clear the locking cause as
distribution manifold clogged. described hereunder:
The trouble can be determined from Activate the tank pump.
following signals:
On the main distribution manifold (B)
- grease output from pressure relief detach one by one all high pressure
valve; hoses (G) leading to the sub-
- the checking plugs, installed on the manifolds. If, for instance, grease
manifold pistons (if installed), do comes out under pressure from
not move. output 1 of main distribution manifold
(B), this means that the clogging has
to be searched in the lubrication
circuit of the sub-manifold (D).
Let the tank pump operate.
Detach one by one all high pressure
hoses (E) of the sub-manifold (D). If,
for instance, grease comes out under
pressure from output 3 of sub-
distribution manifold (D), this means
that the clogging has to be searched
in the piping of connector 3 or in the
articulation point connected to the
same.
By means of a manual pump clear all
clogged pipes of articulation points.
Distribution manifold clogged. Replace the distribution manifold or

have it cleaned by the After-sales
service.
5-20
TROUBLESHOOTING
HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
System very noisy. Belt loose or worn. Retension belt or replace.
Clutch noisy. Repair clutch.
Compressor supporting bracket loose Repair bracket, replace compressor.

or internal compressor parts worn
out.
Blower motor excessively worn. Replace the blower.
System overfilled. Evacuate coolant until the high

pressure reading is normal again.
Not enough coolant in the system. Check for leaks, refill the system.
5-21
SECTION 5
COOLING SYSTEM
Compressor not working. Open circuit in compressor solenoid. Check power supply to the clutch.
Faulty thermostat. Replace thermostat.
Belt loose or broken. Adjust belt tension, replace belt.
Belt pulley not turning although Check compressor and replace, if

magnetic clutch is engaged. necessary.
Compressor clutch slipping. Repair clutch or replace compressor.
Evaporator flooded. Expansion valve jammed or stuck in Replace expansion valve (block).
open position.
Evaporator frozen. Thermostat sensor in wrong position. Install sensor in another place.
Evaporator clogged up. Dirty fins. Clean evaporator.
Coolant leaking. Refrigerant line defective. Check all lines for defects caused by
external influences or chafing.
Leaks in the system. Evacuate the system, refill, check for

leaks and repair.
Air filter (recirculation). Panel filter clogged. Clean or replace the panel.
Air filter (recirculation). Filter element clogged. Clean or replace the filter element.
Heating operating. Tie rod for heating valve not set Set the tie rod or replace it.
correctly or faulty.
5-22
TROUBLESHOOTING
BLOWER
Blower not working. Fuse blown or loose. Check fuse contact, if necessary plug
in correctly. Replace defective fuse.
Reappearance of the defect after a
short time indicates a short-circuit.
Check blower for blocking or other

faults. Eliminate the cause.
Connector loose. Check that connector at machine side

is firmly in place and correct, if
necessary.
Check connection of blower switch.
Open the machine and check the

electrical connections inside.
Connecting cable damaged or ripped Replace cable, observing correct

off. cable run and connection.
Electrical connections interchanged. Check connecting cables and

reconnect properly, if necessary.
Defective blower switch. Replace by new original spare switch.
Blower unit locked. Eliminate the cause of the blockage,

e.g. by removing foreign object from
rotor. If necessary, install a new
blower.
Defective blower motor. Replace the blower.
Blower cannot be switched off. Defective blower switch. Replace blower switch.
The blower operates at low Rated supply voltage incorrect. Rated voltage of conditioner and of
performance. vehicle system must be identical.
Replace the blower.
Dirty clamps. Clean connector contacts. Proceed

with care to avoid short-circuits.
Heat exchanger heavily Clean carefully, to avoid causing

contaminated. damage that might result in
consequential leaks.
Blower ducts obstructed. Check for no obstructions on the

ports or air outlets. Eliminate the
cause.
5-23
SECTION 5
NOTES:
5-24
SECTION 6
STORAGE
MACHINE STORAGE ENGINE STORAGE

If the machine is to be set out of operation for longer If the engine is to remain idle for an extended period
periods, the following measures are recommended: of time, it is necessary to take protective measures
to prevent rusting. The preservative measures
Inspect the machine. Repair damaged or worn
described here will protect the engine for up to 6
parts. Install new parts, if necessary.
months.
The procedure will have to be reversed before the
Lay the working attachment on the ground, retract- engine is recommissioned.
ing the hydraulic cylinders as much as possible.
Anti-corrosion oils to specification:
If not, coat the exposed cylinder rods with grease.
- MIL-L-21260B.
Shift all control levers to position “0”.
- TL 9150-037/2.
Clean the machine.
- Nato Code C 640 / 642.
Lubricate all grease points.
Anti-corrosion media for exterior protection only to
Protect all pieces against rust and dirt with a grease
specification:
coat.
- Nato Code C 632.
Drain coolant. If the system is filled with antifreeze
mixture, draining is not necessary. Recommended cleaning agent to remove preserva-
Release alternator and fan belts. tives:
- Petroleum benzine (hazardous materials class
Paint parts needing it to prevent rust formation.
A3).
Carry out preservation of the engine.
To store the engine, perform following operations:
Remove the batteries and store them in a dry pro-
Clean the engine.
tected place after full charging.
If not removed, disconnect battery negative cable Clean engine with high-pressure equipment.
from the terminal (-).
Run engine up to operating temperature, then
Protect the machine against unauthorized starting: switch off.
- pull out the ignition key from the block Drain engine oil and fill with anticorrosion oil.
- close and lock the windows Drain fuel from tank.
- lock the cab door Prepare fuel mixture from 90% diesel and 10% anti-
corrosion oil and fill up tank.
- lock and ensure all covers
- cover all ports. Run engine for approximately 10 minutes.
Store the machine in a dry protected place. If the Shut off the engine.
machine is parked outside, cover it with a tarpaulin Race engine repeatedly by hand for cylinder and
arranged so to allow ventilation. If not, humidity combustion chamber preservation.
harmful to the machine may result.
Dismantle V-belts and store in packaged form.
If the machine is to be stored for a prolonged period
Spray V-belt pulley grooves with anti-corrosion
of time, operate some times the travel, swing and agent.
digging hydraulic operations at least once per
month to guarantee proper lubrication. Close intake and exhaust ports.
6-1
SECTION 6
BATTERIES STORAGE RECOMMISSIONING THE MACHINE

For extended machine downtime periods, remove AFTER PROLONGED STORAGE
batteries and store on dry, well ventilated premises Before recommissioning the machine after a pro-
at about 20 °C (68 °F). longed storage, observe the following points:
Observe the following points:
Remove engine preservation. Fill in new engine oil.
Clean battery.
Install batteries and reconnect them to the electrical
Check acid density and battery fluid level once a system. Check batteries charge, if necessary
fortnight. recharge them. Check electrolyte density.
Charge batteries when acid density has fallen to Check the hydraulic oil level in the tank.
1.23 kg/dm3 (85.71 lb/ft3) or earlier. Check tyre pressure.
Keep batteries clean and dry externally. Degrease piston rods of hydraulic cylinders.
Check operation of the electrical system.
Check operation of braking and steering systems.
Check fuel level in the tank and top up if necessary.
Commission engine.
S DANGER S
Do not run the engine in confined spaces without
proper ventilation and/or a suitable system capable
to remove harmful exhaust gases.
Bring machine into driving position and engage the

parking brake.
Bleed air from the hydraulic system.
IMPORTANT: if the machine has not been used for
a long time, oil layers on the sliding surfaces may
have deteriorated.
Operate travel, swing and digging hydraulic sys-
tems 2 or 3 times to lubricate sliding surfaces.
6-2
STORAGE
DECOMMISSIONING OF THE MACHINE

S WARNING S
Dismantle the machine according to the general
safety rules.
The machine dismantling must be carried out
exclusively by trained personnel, qualified and
authorised to perform such operation.
Start the hydraulic system components disassem-
bly, only after such components, hydraulic oil and
lubricants have completely cooled down and after
releasing any residual pressure.
To decommission the machine, it is necessary to

have access to specific equipment (hoist, hydraulic
presses, containers for liquids, etc.) and special
tools described in the Operator’s Manuals and
Repair Manuals, available from Dealers.
This is in order to avoid that during disassembly
operations dangerous situations arise both for the
personnel involved and the environment.
The machine contains:
- fluids under pressure (hydraulic system, cooling
system, etc.);
- gases (air conditioning system and accumulator,
as applicable);
- acid (batteries);
- components of the machine with remarkable
weight (booms, buckets, etc.).
IMPORTANT: handle and dispose of fluids accord-
ing to current regulations. Use only authorised dis-
posal procedure and, in case of doubt, contact the
appropriate authorities.
6-3
SECTION 6
NOTES:
6-4
SECTION 7
ATTACHMENTS
HYDRAULIC HAMMER
HYDRAULIC HAMMER SELECTION

If a hydraulic hammer has to be fitted on the exca-
vator, it is important to choose a model satisfying the
stability, pressure and oil quantity requirements of
the excavator hydraulic system.
S CAUTION S
For the selection of the hydraulic hammer type
most suitable to the machine features, address to
Dealer as well as for the adjustment of power sup-
ply and service pressure required by the selected
tool.
1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The hazard zone of the hydraulic hammer must be
kept clear of all persons.
Risk of flying rock fragments.
Therefore, stop work as soon as any persons enter
the hazard zone of the hammer or the machine.
Resume the work only when bystanders have left
the working area.
Close the front window of the machine before start-
ing up the hammer.
Install the protective grating.
Wear ear protectors.
Operate the hammer from the operator’s seat only.
Avoid to strike objects violently with the hydraulic
hammer, being heavier than the bucket it lowers
faster with the hazard of being damaged or to dam-
age the attachment and the upper structure. NO
Before activating the hammer always lower it slowly
until the tip of the chisel touches the object to strike.
Do not use the hydraulic hammer and/or the slewing
action, to move objects because this could damage
the working attachment.
7-1
SECTION 7
Avoid working with excavator cylinders completely

extended (fully extended or fully retracted) so as not
to damage the attachment structure or the same cyl-
inders.
Stop working if hydraulic hoses are bent abnormally.
Do not operate the hydraulic hammer in water. This
use may originate rust or damage seals and compo- NO
nents of the hydraulic system.
Do not use the hydraulic hammer for lifting of mov-
ing objects; the excavator may overturn and/or the
hydraulic hammer could get damaged.
While working with the excavator pay attention not
to strike the boom with the hydraulic hammer.
Do not use the hydraulic hammer when the dipper is
positioned vertically; excessive vibrations to dipper
cylinder may generate oil leaks.
3
Position the hydraulic hammer with the chisel placed
vertically on the material to be struck.
The hammer should not be operated longer that one
minute, because the chisel could wear down.
If the material is not broken after one minute, posi-
tion the chisel on different spots of the material run-
ning the hammer not longer than one minute on
each spot.
OK NO
4
Do not lift the front side of the undercarriage by
pushing with the hydraulic hammer downward: the
front attachment could get damaged. Although a lift-
ing of 150 mm (5.90 in) of the front edge can be tol-
erated, perform this operation only if strictly
necessary.
Never exceed the 150 mm (5.90 in) of tolerance.
7-2
ATTACHMENTS
USE OF HYDRAULIC HAMMER

BEFORE BEGINNING WORK
Check that the hydraulic hammer is safely locked on
the working equipment and that the hydraulic lines
are connected in the right way.
SWITCHING ON THE HYDRAULIC HAMMER

Select the “Hydraulic hammer” function by depress-
ing switch face without symbol (1).
The electronic control unit switches into power level
4, 5, 6 or 7, depending on which level was active
before engine shut off.
Pedal (2), if installed on the machine, is now control-
ling the “hydraulic hammer”.
The selection menu (A) for 4 hammer types is dis-
played for 10 seconds. Another hammer can now be
selected, e.g. 3 instead of 2 and/or the pertaining
pressure and volume flow settings can be changed.
To quit the menu before the 10-second interval has
elapsed, depress one of the arrow buttons used for 6
setting the machine power levels.
After returning to the main screen, the hammer sym-
bol (B) is displayed.
The display shows the hammer symbol and the
working mode selected. HAMMER 2
The number of the selected hammer is shown
above the symbol.
If the machine is to work alternately with the hydrau-
lic hammer and with other hydraulic attachments
(e.g. hydraulic shears), an electrically operated
shuttle valve automatically connects the return-flow
line of the hydraulic hammer with the hydraulic res-
ervoir.
IMPORTANT: when several hydraulic attachments 7
are activated at the same time, the first switch set-
ting has priority.
7-3
SECTION 7
HAMMER OPERATION WITH FIXED IMPACT

FREQUENCY
Place tip of chisel then switch on hammer with push-
button (1).
The hammer works with the maximum preset
hydraulic power and is on as long as the button is
depressed.
HAMMER OPERATION WITH VARIABLE IMPACT

FREQUENCY
Place tip of chisel then depress pedal (2) back-
wards. The impact frequency increases with the
press on the pedal.
SWITCHING OFF THE HYDRAULIC HAMMER

9
Release push-button (3) or pedal (2).
Depress symbol face of switch (1). The illumination
behind the switch is off.
Pedal (2) now controls the “Boom adjusting cylin-
der“.
7-4
ATTACHMENTS
HYDRAULIC HAMMER, SETTING THE PARAMETERS
MACHINE

SPEED LIMITATION
SWING POWER ROTARY CUTTER BASIC SETTING
A
F34157
10
ATTACHMENT
HAMMER
ROTARY CUTTER
SHEARS
HAMMER 1 HAMMER 2 HAMMER 3 HAMMER 4
HAMMER 3
F34171
11
7-5
SECTION 7
WRONG CODE
HAMMER 3
PRESS ANY KEY
HAMMER 3
PARAMETERS NOT
INPUT CODE UPDATED. RE-TEST.
PRESS ANY KEY.
NO
HAMMER 3
Updating per-
formed by EHC?
YES
280
If the values displacement/pressure are

not defined “0” will be displayed.
HAMMER 3 HAMMER 3 Save changes?

Data input
Displacement Displacement
Pressure 280 Pressure 260

F34172
12
Depending on the working needs and conditions of the buttons are not pressed for a prolonged period.
use, up to four hydraulic oil pressure and volume
Confirm with “set” button, the sub-menu “HAMMER”
flow configurations can be set for hydraulic ham-
is recalled.
mers.
The grey number field indicates actually active ham-
For the first configuration - hammer 1 - the machine
mer 2 with the selected parameters for volume flow
is delivered ex factory with the following parameter
and pressure.
settings:
By means of the arrow buttons, you can set 4 differ-
volume flow 80 l/min (21.10 gal/min); pressure
ent hammer settings: The selection is marked by a
160 bars (2320 psi).
frame around the number.
For hammers 2 thru 4, the preset values for pres- In the example shown hammer 3 is preselected.
sure and flow are in both cases 0. Depress “set” to confirm the selection of hammer 3.
NOTE: to use the hammer functions, the values To activate the settings for hammer 3 without any
specified by the hammer manufacturer must be changes, depress button “set”. The following
adjusted as described below. options are available:
In the working mode, depress an arrow key until - to reject selected hammer 3 with the newly
“MACHINE” appears in the lower part of the display selected values and to retain the settings of ham-
and the machine symbol is marked by a frame. mer 2.
Confirm with “set” button. Depress the button with the upward arrow;
Depress the arrow keys until the bar is on “HAM- - to activate selected hammer 3 with unchanged
MER”. Confirm with “set” button. settings.
Depress the “set” button. The setting is saved.
button with the upward arrow (⇑) or downward
arrow button (⇓), until the beginning or the end of
the display selection is reached.
When scrolling is continued on reaching the begin-
ning or the end of the list, the program returns to the
next higher menu.
The return to the next higher menu is automatic if
7-6
ATTACHMENTS
If the settings for hammer 3 are to be changed,

depress the button with the downward arrow (⇓).
Enter the four digit code and change the settings
with the arrow buttons. Depress the button with the
upward arrow (⇑), the number increases of one unit.
By depressing the button with the downward arrow
(⇓), the number decreases of one unit. By depress-
ing button “set”, the setting is confirmed and the cur-
sor slides to the right. When the cursor is on the last
digit of a set value, a press on the “set” button
moves it on to the first digit of the next set value.
After changing the set values, depress the “set” but-
ton. The following options are available:
- to reject selected hammer 3 and to retain the set-
tings for hammer 2.
Depress the button with the upward arrow (⇑);
- to activate hammer 3 with the changed settings.
The arrow buttons always scroll to higher menu.
the buttons are not pressed for a prolonged period.
For queries concerning the hydraulic oil volume flow
and oil pressure settings or the specified setting
range please contact our Service Department.
7-7
SECTION 7
HYDRAULIC SHEARS
SELECTING THE HYDRAULIC SHEARS

Considering that the weight of the hydraulic shears
is higher than the weight of the bucket, you have to
select a shears model having the features suitable
for the excavator to avoid possible troubles or
machine instability.
S CAUTION S
For the selection of the hydraulic shears type most
suitable to the machine features, address to Dealer
as well as for the adjustment of power supply and
service pressure required by the selected tool.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The hazard zone of the hydraulic shears must be
kept clear of all persons.
Risk of flying or falling rock fragments.
the hazard zone of the shears or the machine.
the working area.
ing up the shears.
Operate the shears from the operator’s seat only.
Never support the machine weight by prying on the
hydraulic shears and the cylinders completely
extended or retracted because this could damage
the front attachment. In particular, with shears cylin-
der completely extended, the front attachment can
get damaged more easily.
13
7-8
ATTACHMENTS
The hydraulic shears must be used with front attach-

ment oriented towards the longitudinal position of
the excavator. The use of other orientations could
impair machine stability and originate risks of over-
turning.
When you work with the hydraulic shears oriented
upwards and the boom extended pay attention to
the fall of debris.
When you work with the hydraulic shears on a build-
ing floor, always check that the floor is strong
enough to support the shears weight summed to the
machine weight.
The excavator must always work on levelled and 14
stable soil. Never work on material debris or inclined
surfaces.
Never use the shears to transfer or move demol-
ished material.
Always disassemble the shears from the excavator
before beginning the transport.
Never transport the excavator with the bucket cylin-
der fully extended; the front attachment could get
damaged because of the transport vibrations.
7-9
SECTION 7
USE OF HYDRAULIC SHEARS

Check that the hydraulic shears are safely locked on
the working equipment and that the hydraulic lines
SWITCHING ON THE HYDRAULIC SHEARS

Preselect “Hydraulic shears” with rocker switch (1).
Depress the blank face of switch, switch backlight-
ing is on.
Once the function is set, the display shows for 10
seconds menu (A) for the selection of 4 different
shears types. The shears can now be selected, e.g.
3 instead of 2 and/or the pertaining pressure and
volume flow settings can be changed. To quit the
menu before the 10-second interval has elapsed,
depress one of the arrow buttons used for setting
the machine power levels.
15
If the machine is to work alternately with the hydrau-
lic shears and with the hydraulic hammer, an electri-
cally operated shuttle valve automatically connects
the return-flow line of the hydraulic shears with the
hydraulic reservoir. SHEARS 2
The electronic control unit switches into power level

1 - 7, depending on which level was active before
engine shut off.
Now the hydraulic shears can be activated:
To close the shears:
press pedal forward (5).
To open the shears:
press pedal backward (5). 16
Push-button (4) can be used to switch pedal (5) dur-

ing the work temporarily over to control the adjusting
cylinder. The buzzer sounds a warning as long as
the push-button is kept depressed.
SLEWING THE SHEARS ONLY

To slew the shears to the right:
depress button (3) of right hydraulic control lever.
To slew the shears to the left:
depress button (2) of left hydraulic control lever.
17
7-10
ATTACHMENTS
SWITCHING OFF THE HYDRAULIC SHEARS

Release pedal (5).
Disconnect switch (1). (Depress the symbol face of
switch, switch backlighting is off).
OPERATING THE SHEARS WITH THE

HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVER (OPTIONAL)
Clamshell operation on quick tool coupler
Switch “Joy” ON - shears over to bucket and bucket
inactive.
Active only when shears are on.
Clamshell bucket
Switch “Joy” ON - shears over to bucket and bucket
over to shears pedal.
7-11
SECTION 7
HYDRAULIC SHEARS, SETTING THE PARAMETERS
MACHINE

SPEED LIMITATION
SWING POWER ROTARY CUTTER BASIC SETTING
A
F34157
18
ATTACHMENT
HAMMER
ROTARY CUTTER
SHEARS
SHEARS 1 SHEARS 2 SHEARS 3 SHEARS 4
160 170 180
SHEARS 3
170
F34178
19
7-12
ATTACHMENTS
WRONG CODE
SHEARS 3
PRESS ANY KEY
SHEARS 3
PARAMETERS NOT
PRESS ANY KEY.
NO
SHEARS 3
Updating per-
formed by EHC?
YES
170

SHEARS 3 SHEARS 3 Save changes?

Data input

F34179
20
Depending on the working needs and conditions of When scrolling is continued on reaching the begin-
use, up to four hydraulic oil pressure and volume ning or the end of the list, the program returns to the
flow configurations can be set for hydraulic shears. next higher menu. The return to the next higher
menu is automatic if the buttons are not pressed for
For the first configuration - shears 1 - the machine is
a prolonged period.
delivered ex factory with the following parameter
settings: Confirm with “set” button, the sub-menu “SHEARS”
- volume flow unlimited (9999) is recalled. The grey number field indicates actually
active shears 2 with the selected parameters for vol-
- pressure unlimited (9999). ume flow and pressure.
For shears 2 thru 4, the preset values are: By means of the arrow buttons, you can set 4 differ-
- volume flow unlimited (9999) ent shears settings. The selection is marked by a
frame around the number. In the example shown
- pressure 0 bar (0 psi). shears 3 is preselected.
NOTE: to use the shears functions, the values Depress “set” to confirm the selection of shears 3.
specified by the hammer manufacturer must be To activate the settings for shears 3 without any
adjusted as described below. changes, depress the “set” button. The following
In the working mode, depress an arrow key until options are available:
“MACHINE” appears in the lower part of the display - to reject selected shears 3 and to retain the set-
and the machine symbol is marked by a frame. tings for shears 2.
Confirm with “set” button. Depress the button with the upward arrow (⇑);
Depress the arrow keys until the bar is on - to activate selected shears 3 with unchanged set-
“SHEARS”. Confirm with “set” button. tings. Depress the “set” button. The setting is
To get back to the “MACHINE” menu, depress the saved.
the display selection is reached.
7-13
SECTION 7
If the settings for shears 3 are to be changed,

Both for pressure and volume flow limit values are
preset. If during the setting phase they are
exceeded, the indication sets to value 9999 (pres-
sure or volume flow unlimited). With reset (button
with downward arrow), the previous value, lower
than the limit value, is restored.
- to reject selected shears 3 with the newly selected
values and to retain the setting of shears 2.
- to activate shears 3 with the changed settings:
depress the “set” button. The setting is saved.
the buttons are not pressed for a prolonged period.
7-14
ATTACHMENTS
HYDRAULIC QUICK COUPLER

The hydraulic quick coupler has been designed The use of the quick coupler for works other than
according to the most severe quality parameters. It those for which it has been planned are prohibited.
corresponds to the safety rules in force. All this Never use the quick coupler as a hammer. Never
though does not prevent the hazard of accidents. use the quick coupler to sweep or level the ground
For this reason it is compulsory to observe carefully or to move objects.
the safety rules and precautions.
Never put your hands inside of the quick coupler
Use the quick coupler only for the applications or and never try to adjust or repair it while the engine is
purposes described in this Manual. running.
The quick coupler has been designed to allow the Check that the safety rod operates correctly and
quick replacement of attachments. that it is not dirty. Clean the locking system.
Any modification or adaptation, not expressly Unauthorized modifications of the quick coupler can
approved by the Manufacturer, causes the non con- cause serious injuries. Never perform any modifica-
formity of the quick coupler with the safety prescrip- tion without prior approval of the Dealer. Any modifi-
tions. cation carried out, must be in conformity with the
machine’s technical specifications and must con-
form to current safety regulations.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Do not use the quick coupler before to have read
carefully and well understood the instructions and
safety prescriptions, indicated in this Manual.
During the machine operation, the switch for quick
coupler locking and unlocking must always be set to
“locked” position.
Check daily that the quick coupler does not show
hydraulic oil leak. Possibly tighten the connectors or
replace the concerned pieces.
Check that the safety rod operates correctly and
that it is not jammed because of foreign bodies.
Clean the locking system.
Each time the bucket is fitted on the quick coupler,
close the bucket and lift the attachment, to check
visually and make sure that the bucket pin is cor-
rectly fitted into the hooks.
The quick coupler modifies the machine operating
range. In particular positions the attachment can hit
the machine, therefore it has to be operated always
at a certain safety distance.
The loads handling must always be performed in
strict conformity with the instructions given in this
Manual and in conformity with the rules in force.
During the handling of loads, never use the front
and rear anchoring points, as they are necessary to
fit the tool on the quick coupler.
7-15
SECTION 7
IDENTIFICATION PLATES
When ordering spare parts or when needing infor-
mation or assistance, it is always necessary to give
the local Dealer all references as regards the type
(4) and the serial number (1) of the relevant quick
coupler.
This and other information (below) is reported on
the plate (A) located on the quick coupler side.
21
1. Serial number
2. Weight
3. Operating pressure (400 bar)
4. Machine type
5. Serial number
6. Date of manufacture
7. Lifting force
22
CONTROL SWITCH
On the control panel to the right of the cab seat, is
installed switch (1) for quick coupler control.
Quick coupler activation (locking) by depressing
blank face of switch (1).
Quick coupler deactivation (unlocking) by depress-
ing symbol face of switch (1).
23
7-16
ATTACHMENTS
QUICK ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY
Make sure that the attachment to be fitted is stand-
ing firmly on a flat surface and that it is equipped
with pins delivered with the quick coupler.
Set the switch to unlocking position. The acoustic
alarm sounds.
By handling on the hydraulic control levers, place
the dipper to vertical position, slightly tilted toward
the cab, so as to release the safety device.
Pull out the bucket cylinder rod completely and hold
it under pressure, to allow the locking hook to
retract.
24
Use the hydraulic control lever of dipper to guide the
quick coupler hook (1) onto the bucket pin (2).
25
Move the bucket hydraulic control lever in such a
way that the pin (2) fits completely into the locking
hook and pin (4) sits in the hook (3).
26
7-17
SECTION 7
Lift the dipper and remove completely the bucket

cylinder rod.
Set the switch to locking position.
The acoustic alarm stops sounding.
27
Keep the bucket cylinder under pressure so as to
allow the closure of the locking hook. Lift the work-
ing attachment so that the bucket pin (3) becomes
visible.
28
By means of a visual check, verify that the bucket
pin is correctly fitted into the locking hook.
29
To allow the engagement of the safety device,
retract completely the bucket cylinder rod, by mov-
ing the bucket hydraulic control lever.
IMPORTANT: if a visual check is not possible when
sitting, dismount from the machine and check if the
working attachment is properly secured with the
safety device hooked.
30
7-18
ATTACHMENTS
DISASSEMBLY
By moving the dipper hydraulic control lever, place
this one to vertical position, slightly tilted toward the
cab, so as to release the safety device.
By moving the bucket hydraulic control lever, lean
the bucket on the ground on a flat and firm surface.
Set the switch to unlocking position. The acoustic
alarm sounds.
Pull out the bucket cylinder rod completely and hold
it under pressure, to allow the locking hook to
retract.
Lift the dipper and leave the bucket on the ground.
31
HANDLING OF LOADS
When lifting loads, the ropes and chains have to be
secured to the proper lifting eyes of the bucket link
or quick coupler.
IMPORTANT: the maximum load carrying capacity
of the lifting eyes or quick coupler has not to be
exceeded.
32
7-19
SECTION 7
CLAMSHELL BUCKET
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The hazard zone of the clamshell must be kept clear
of all persons.
Never try to change the clamshell position or its sup-
port with your hands.
The bucket link when blocked should not be use to
lift weights.
The safety pin could get bent or break.
Use the safety hook or the clamshell lifting eyes or
remove the safety pin, until you have to move loads.
CLAMSHELL BUCKET ASSEMBLY
S WARNING S
Before performing the assembly, check if the clam-
shell bucket and the machine are filled with the
same hydraulic oil or with oil mixed.
Otherwise, drain oil from the hydraulic system of
the clamshell bucket.
Disassemble the clamshell rotation.

Retract the bucket cylinder or assemble the safety
pin for the bucket link (1).
NOTE: after installation of the safety pin, the bucket
cylinder should not be extended, because this oper-
ation could damage the pin and also the bucket link.
33
Shut off the engine, turn the ignition key to position
“I”.
Relieve the pressure from the hydraulic hoses of the
clamshell.
Press to the left and hold the right hydraulic control
lever (3).
Depress button “Clamshell turning” (4) and button
(5).
Press to the right the right hydraulic control lever (3).
Release buttons (4) and (5) and right hydraulic con-
trol lever (3).
Turn ignition key to position “0” and disconnect the 34
pilot control with lever (6).
7-20
ATTACHMENTS
Set to horizontal position the marker grooves on the

valves’ squares (7).
35
Clean and grease bearing pins and bushes.
Drive the machine towards the clamshell.
Insert dipper into grab bearing, push bearing pin (2)
home and secure it.
36
Shut off engine and relieve hydraulic pressure from
clamshell hoses as described.
Clean quick couplers on clamshell and dipper.
Connect hydraulic hoses to clamshell cylinder (8)
and to clamshell rotation motor (9). Check that quick
couplers are perfectly engaged.
Grease all nipples on clamshell and gearing of
clamshell rotating mechanism.
Start the engine and lift the clamshell from the
ground.
Bleed clamshell hydraulic system by opening and
closing the clamshell repeatedly and by turning it 37
clockwise and counter-clockwise.
7-21
SECTION 7
CLAMSHELL BUCKET DISASSEMBLY

Open clamshell completely and set clamshell down
on the ground.
Shut off the engine, turn the ignition key to position
“I”.
Relieve the pressure from the hydraulic hoses of the
clamshell.
Press to the left and hold the right hydraulic control
lever (3).
Depress button “Clamshell turning” (4) to the right
and button (5) to the left.
Press to the right the right hydraulic control lever (3).
Release buttons (4) and (5) and right hydraulic con- 38
trol lever (3).
Turn ignition key to position “0” and disconnect the
pilot control (6).
Disconnect hydraulic hoses (8) and (9) and quick
couplers.
Protect quick couplers of clamshell and dipper from
dirt by applying the dust cups.
39
Unscrew safety device of bearing pin (2) and take
out the pin.
Start the engine.
Lift working attachment carefully to release the
clamshell.
40
7-22
ATTACHMENTS
PARAMETERS SETTING
ATTACHMENT
CLAMSHELL BUCKET
REDUCED LOAD
CARRYING CAPACITY
CLAMSHELL BUCKET CLAMSHELL BUCKET Save changes?

SPEED SPEED
OPENING: OPENING:
CLOSING: CLOSING:
F34185
41
The opening/closing speed reduction of clamshell is

optional.
SWITCHING OVER FROM STANDARD

TO CLAMSHELL BUCKET
To switch over the working attachment from stand-
ard bucket to clamshell, two valves located on the
bucket cylinder have to be switched.
The valves have to be switched only if the pressure
has been released from the hydraulic system, other-
wise, the seals may get damaged.
STANDARD BUCKET OPERATION

Set to horizontal position the marker grooves on the
42
7-23
SECTION 7
CLAMSHELL BUCKET OPERATION

Set to vertical position the marker grooves on the
43
SWITCHING OVER OF VOLUME FLOW FROM

STANDARD BUCKET TO CLAMSHELL
By means of switch (2) the machine can be
switched over from backhoe operation with unlim-
ited volume flow in the working pumps, to grab oper-
ation with presettable independent volume flow
rates for opening and closing of the clamshell.
44
Standard bucket Depress the blank face of the
switch (2).
Clamshell bucket Depress the symbol face of
the switch (2).
The display shows the clam-
shell symbol (3).
The volume flow rates/speeds for opening and clos-

ing of the clamshell can be set via the display inde-
pendently of one another.
45
7-24
ATTACHMENTS
ROTARY CUTTER
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The hazard zone of the hydraulic rotary cutter must
be kept clear of all persons.
Risks of flying rock fragments.
the hazard zone of the rotary cutter or the machine.
the working area.
ing up the rotary cutter.
Operate the rotary cutter from the operator’s seat
only.
The power ratings of the machine and of the hydrau-
lic cutter must be coordinated.
This prevents the machine from being overloaded or
the stability from being jeopardized.
Before mounting the attachment, check that attach-
ment and machine are filled with identical or com-
patible hydraulic oil.
If this is not the case, drain the oil out of the attach-
ment.
7-25
SECTION 7
USE OF THE ROTARY CUTTER

Check that the rotary cutter is securely locked with
the working attachment and that the hydraulic lines
SWITCHING ON THE ROTARY CUTTER

Preselect “Rotary cutter” with switch (1). Depress
the blank face of switch, switch backlighting is on.
Once the function is set, the display shows for 10
seconds the menu for the selection of 4 different
rotary cutters types. The rotary cutter can now be
selected, e.g. 3 instead of 2 and/or the pertaining
pressure and volume flow settings can be changed.
To quit the menu before the 10-second interval has
elapsed, depress one of the arrow buttons used for
setting the machine power levels.
46
If the machine is to work alternately with the rotary
cutter and with the hydraulic hammer, an electrically
operated shuttle valve automatically connects the
return-flow line of the rotary cutter with the hydraulic
reservoir. ROTARY CUTTER 2
The rotary cutter can operate to power rating levels

4-7. The electronic power unit activates the power
rating level that was active before engine shut off.
After returning to the main screen, the rotary cutter
symbol is displayed. The number corresponding to
selected cutter is visualized on the right upper cor-
ner (A).
47
Now the rotary cutter can be activated.
Pedal (2), is now controlling the “rotary cutter”.
Set the rotary cutter to working position, press pedal
forward (2). The further the pedal is depressed, the
higher the speed of the rotary cutter.
During work with the rotary, the pedal (2) can be
temporarily switched over to the “Adjusting cylinder”
function with push-button (3). The buzzer sounds a
warning as long as the push-button is kept
depressed.
SWITCHING OFF THE ROTARY CUTTER

Release pedal (2). 48
Disconnect switch (1). Depress the symbol face of
switch, switch backlighting is off.
7-26
ATTACHMENTS
SETTING THE PARAMETERS OF HYDRAULIC ROTARY CUTTER
MACHINE

SPEED LIMITATION
F34157
49
ATTACHMENT
HAMMER
ROTARY CUTTER
SHEARS
ROTARY CUTTER 1 ROTARY CUTTER 2 ROTARY CUTTER 3 ROTARY CUTTER 4
210 220 230 240
ROTARY CUTTER 3
230
F34193
50
7-27
SECTION 7
WRONG CODE
ROTARY CUTTER 3
PRESS ANY KEY
ROTARY CUTTER 3
PARAMETERS NOT
PRESS ANY KEY.
NO
ROTARY CUTTER 3
Updating per-
formed by EHC?
YES
170

ROTARY CUTTER 3 ROTARY CUTTER 3 Save changes?

Data input
F34194
51
Depending on the working needs and conditions of The return to the next higher menu is automatic if
use, up to four hydraulic oil pressure and volume the buttons are not pressed for a prolonged period.
flow configurations can be set for hydraulic rotary
Confirm with “set” button, the sub-menu “ROTARY
cutter.
CUTTER” is recalled. The grey number field indi-
For the first configuration - rotary cutter 1 - the cates actually active cutter 2 with the selected
machine is delivered ex factory with the following parameters for volume flow and pressure.
parameter settings:
By means of the arrow buttons, you can set 4 differ-
- volume flow 80 l/min (21.10 gal/min). ent cutters settings. The selection is marked by a
- pressure 160 bar (2320 psi). frame around the number. In the example shown
rotary cutter 3 is preselected.
For rotary cutters 2 thru 4, the preset values are 0. Depress “set” to confirm the selection of cutter 3.
In the working mode, depress an arrow key until To activate the settings for cutter 3 without any
“MACHINE” appears in the lower part of the display changes, depress the “set” button. The following
and the machine symbol is marked by a frame. options are available:
Confirm with “set” button.
- to reject selected cutter 3 and to retain the setting
Depress the arrow buttons until the bar is on for cutter 2.
“ROTARY CUTTER”. Confirm with “set” button. Depress the button with the upward arrow (⇑);
The arrows on the right side of display indicate that - to activate selected cutter 3 with unchanged set-
other sub-menus can be recalled. tings. Depress the “set” button. The setting is
To get back to the “MACHINE” menu, depress the saved.
the display selection is reached. When scrolling is
continued on reaching the beginning or the end of
the list, the program returns to the next higher
menu.
7-28
ATTACHMENTS
If the settings for cutter 3 are to be changed,

- to reject selected cutter 3 with the newly selected
values and to retain the setting of cutter 2.
- to activate cutter 3 with the changed settings.
The return is automatic if the buttons are not
pressed for a prolonged period.
7-29
SECTION 7
CRANING HOOK
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The machine can be used to carry loads only if
equipped and approved for this task.
The machine must be equipped with overload warn-
ing system and pipe break protection valves.
Before starting the work, activate the overload warn-
ing system.
During the lifting or transfer of a load, the personnel
must stay or walk near the machine in such a way to
be off the danger area.
The operator must keep visual contact with other
persons in the working area.
Use only tested and efficient lifting gear with an ade-
quate load capacity.
During transfer do not hang a load over a person but
transfer the same by keeping it as close as possible
to the ground to avoid its swinging.
The machine must never be driven with a slung load
unless the road surface is even and the roadway is
clearly visible. The visibility in the passage area can
be improved, by shifting the boom and by turning
the upper structure to the right. Once the upper
structure is turned, block the floating axle.
If the craning hook is installed on the bucket link pay
particular attention to following: the bucket link com-
ponents must be connected with a safety pin, if an
attachment other than the standard bucket is
installed (e.g. the clamshell).
In this case the craning hook cannot be used to lift
loads.
The pin is not designed for such situations, there-
fore it could bend or break abruptly. In this case the
bucket link and the hanging load start suddenly to
swing.
USE OF THE CRANING HOOK

In order to use the standard bucket with craning
function, standard buckets and bucket links with
craning hook welded are available (optional).
LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF HOOK

The maximum load carrying capacity of the craning
hook is indicated on the same hook (1) and (2).
52
7-30
ATTACHMENTS
OVERLOAD WARNING SYSTEM
S WARNING S
The overload warning system sends exclusively
acoustic and visual indication but thanks to them
the machine overturning is avoided.
When the warning system sounds:
- lower the load immediately,
- reduce the working radius or the load.
Hydraulic excavators used for lifting operations or

for transporting loads must be equipped with an
overload warning system and pipe break protections
in the lifting cylinders of the working equipment.
During these operations the overload warning sys- OVERLOAD!
tem must be activated.
When the admissible load moment is exceeded, the
red warning lamp (1) lights up. The buzzer sounds
at the same time. The display shows the “overload”
symbol (2) and the OVERLOAD text (3).
The admissible load moment is exceeded if too
heavy a load is to be lifted with the working radius of
the equipment being too great. 53
SETTING THE OVERLOAD WARNING SYSTEM

INTO OPERATION
The overload working system can be used option-
ally in two different operation modes:
Press button (1) once, the left lamp (2) lights up
when the machine is used as a crane, without stabi-
lizers.
Press button (1) twice, the right lamp (3) lights up
when the machine is used as a crane, with stabiliz-
ers (stabilizers/blade).
Before using the machine for lifting operations, acti-
vate the overload warning system:
With button (1) set the overload warning system to
required operation mode.
The button lamp lights up. 54
Check that the overload warning system works cor-

rectly.
7-31
SECTION 7
MALFUNCTIONING OF THE OVERLOAD

WARNING SYSTEM
If a fault occurs in the overload warning system,
lamps (2) and (3) on button (1) are both flashing.
In this case, too, the red warning lamp lights up and
the “Overload” message is displayed on the screen.
IMPORTANT: have the overload warning system
repaired immediately by our Service Department.
55
OVERLOAD WARNING SYSTEM CHECK

The overload warning system has to be ckecked:
- every day before beginning the work;
- every time before using the machine for lifting.
Raise the boom to the highest position and move OVERLOAD!
against block.
Warning lamp (1) lights up and an acoustic warning
is sounded. The display shows the “overload” sym-
bol (2) and the relevant text (3).
If a fault occurs, have the overload warning system
checked and repaired immediately by our Service
Department.
56
OVERLOAD WARNING SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
If the machine has to be used exclusively for digging
and not for craning, the overload warning system
can be deactivated.
Depress repeatedly button (1) until lamps (2) and (3)
turn off.
Now the overload warning system is deactivated.
57
7-32
ATTACHMENTS
BREAK PROTECTION VALVES

The break protection valves prevent the working
attachment from lowering in case of a hydraulic
hose breaking on the head side of the boom cylin-
ders.
The hydraulic connection of boom cylinder head is
cut out, so that hydraulic oil can flow back from this
point only if the “boom lowering” control is activated.
Also the upper and dipper cylinders can be
equipped with pipe break protection valves.
If an hydraulic pipe breaks:
Set hydraulic control lever for “Boom lowering”, or
the pedal for “Boom lowering” to idle position.
Alert people nearby with the horn.
The working attachment area with lifted load has to
be ensured so as nobody can stay under the work-
ing attachment or under the load or in proximity of
the hydraulic hose broken.
When the working attachment and the load are low-
ered to the ground, oil comes out from the broken
spot of the pipe.
Place the working equipment and the load carefully
on the ground.
Replace the broken hydraulic hose.
Only after replacement, resume the work.
Escaping hydraulic oil and possible rags have to be
discarded without polluting the environment.
7-33
SECTION 7
REAR FLOODLAMPS
The rear working floodlamps (1) are positioned on
the rear side of cab, under the roof.
58
SWITCHING THE FLOODLAMPS ON AND OFF

The rear floodlamps can only be switched on, if the
ignition key is set to position “I” (ignition ON).
Switch on the working floodlamps by depressing
face without symbol of button (2), the lamp inside
the button lights up.
Switch off the working floodlamps by depressing
face with symbol of button (2), the lamp inside the
button lights off.
59
7-34
ATTACHMENTS
ROTARY LIGHT
SINGLE LIGHT
Rotary lights are fitted on a mounting stud and
secured with a retaining screw. The electrical con-
nection is incorporated in the stud. In this way a
connecting cable is not required.
DOUBLE LIGHT
In some countries, two rotary lights are mandatory.
1st rotary light: installed as described for the single
light.
2nd rotary light: this second rotary light is attached
by means of a magnetic base (electrical connection
via coupling) or it is installed as the 1st light.
SWITCHING ON AND OFF

SWITCHING ON THE ROTARY LIGHT/LIGHTS
Connect switch (1).
Depress switch face without symbol, the lamp goes
out.
S WARNING S
The rear floodlamps can only be switched on, if the
ignition key is set to position “I” (ignition ON).
SWITCHING OFF THE ROTARY LIGHT/LIGHTS

Disconnect switch (1).
Depress switch face with symbol, the lamp goes
out.
60
7-35
SECTION 7
FUEL TRANSFER PUMP
S DANGER S
Fuel and its steams are easy flammable and can
generate explosions. For this reason refuel by
keeping far from open flames, cigarettes, alight
matches, particularly hot areas and sparkles gener-
ating areas.
S DANGER S
Fuels can be harmful for health. They must not be
swallowed. Avoid long contact with the skin.
If the machine is refuelled often or regularly with fuel

from cans or barrels, there is an increased risk of 61
foreign matter and water getting into the fuel sys-
tem.
In this case:
- always refuel through a fine mesh filter;
- user only intake hoses with a fine mesh filter;
- drain off water from the fuel filter more often than
specified in the maintenance schedule.
NOTE: refuel only with decanted fuel. We suggest
to refuel at the end of each working day, condensa-
tion will so be avoided during overnight down-time.
Do not let the tank run out of fuel because air could
penetrate inside of the supply circuit and would
require the air bleeding.
By means of the refuelling system, fuel can be
pumped from a large spare container into the
machine tank.
The refuelling system is installed on the left side of
the machine, close to the fuel tank.
The refuelling system consists of: the intake hose,
the electric pump and the tank filling hose.
The intake tube is winded and stored in the tools
compartment. The filling hose (5) remains con-
nected to the pump and fuel tank.
S WARNING S
Before refuelling, the tank cap must be opened to
avoid overpressure in the tank and risks of danger-
ous fuel leaks.
7-36
ATTACHMENTS
Open the tank cover.

Protect the tank filler from penetration of dirt.
Disassemble cover (1) of maintenance opening,
placed under the refuelling system.
Connect intake hose (2) to large spare container.
Turn the ignition key to position “I”.
Activate the pump with green button (3) on the same
pump.
62
The pump deactivates by means of red button (4) on
the same pump.
The pump disconnects automatically when the fuel
tank is full.
If the pump runs dry for a long time, it could get
damaged or broken.
For this reason insert the pump only when you need
to refuel.
63
7-37
SECTION 7
CAB PROTECTIONS
When you work in areas where there is the danger
of rocks or debris falling the use of following cab
protections is unavoidable.
- (1) FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure),
tubular structure to install over the cab roof.
- (2) FGPS (Front Guard Protective System), tubu-
lar structure to install on the front side of the cab.
NOTE: usually the FOPS protection (1) can be sup-
plied either alone or coupled with the FGPS protec-
tion (2).
64
BLADE PROTECTION
The blade can be equipped with a protection (1),
installed frontally between the blade and the under-
carriage, with the aim to protect the blade cylinders
and relevant hydraulic pipes.
65
TRANSPORT BRACKET FOR CLAMSHELL

A transport bracket (1) can be supplied for the clam-
shell transport, to fasten on the front side of the
undercarriage.
Secures the clamshell during travel or excavator
transport.
66
7-38
ATTACHMENTS
CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The centralized lubrication system, connected to the
pump tank is secured through the pressure limiting
valve (1). The whole system can be checked visu-
ally on the pressure limiting valve. If during the flow
rate the pressure limiting valve is releasing fuel, the
system is somewhere clogged.
Danger of injuries caused by the escape of fuel
under high pressure.
An improper treatment can cause damages due to
the lack or excess of lubrication on bearings and
articulation points.
Modifications or application of the system have to 67
be carried out only after agreement and Manufac-
turer approval.
OPERATION
OPERATION VISUAL CHECK
The distribution manifolds can be equipped with
checking plug (1). The checking plug is connected
to a little piston inside of the distribution manifold
and during the delivery phase it moves fore and
back. If the system gets clogged, the checking plug
remains stuck.
68
7-39
SECTION 7
LUBRICANTS
The tank pump can operate with standard grease
types available on the market up to class NLGI 2.
Class NLGI indicates exclusively the static density
of grease, but not the dynamic behaviour of grease
while pumped. The characteristics of fluidity of
grease of same class NLGI may differ remarkably
between them.
S WARNING S
The Manufacturer is not liable for damages to the
centralized lubrication system, caused by chemical
or biological alterations of the lubricant used, or by
grease not allowed or to be used only in a limited
way.
During the handling of grease care for maximum
cleanliness. The dirt inside of grease remains sus-
pended and cannot settle. This creates problems to
the system and as a consequence also damages to
the articulation points.
Lubricants with solid residuals higher than 3% can-
not be used for the centralized lubrication system.
TANK PUMP
The tank pump (1) is secured behind the cab and is
accessible through the left side door. The lubrication
processes are handled according to the machine
service hours. When the ignition key is set to “I”, the
centralized lubrication system activates and lamp
(2) lights up.
A lubrication cycle consists of a down-time and a
work time. The lubrication system is repeated con-
tinuously after machine start. During the working
time, the tank pump delivers lubricant to the different
points to be lubricated, flowing through the distribu-
tion manifolds.
69
The down-time defines the frequency of the lubrica-
tion periods inside of the operation time. The work-
ing time defines the quantity of lubricant delivered. A
longer working time means an higher quantity of
lubricant, a shorter working time means a lower
quantity of lubricant. When the machine is shut off,
the down-times and working times already passed
are summarized and memorized on an unlimited
time. When the ignition cylinder is activated again,
the control restarts from the point of disconnection.
70
7-40
ATTACHMENTS
TIMES SETTING
To check the down-time and the working time,
remove cover (1) from the case of the tank pump.
The down-time can be set by means of blue selector
(3), while the working time can be set by means of
red selector (2). Each one of them must be set on
15 different levels.
IMPORTANT: in the work is set a down-time of 3
hours [position 3 of selector (3)] and a working time
of 6 minutes [position 3 of selector (2)]. The down-
times and working times can be modified and reset
from the After-sales service or by an authorized
workshop.
71
After resetting and checking the down-time and
working time, replace and tighten the closing cover
(1).
72
OPERATION TEST
Turn the ignition key to position “I”.
As soon as the control board of the tank pump
receives voltage, lamp (3) lights up.
Hold button (4) of control board depressed, so that
lamp (2) remains alight over 2 seconds.
During this operation the down-time shortens. Now
a normal lubrication process takes place.
At any time additional lubrications can be per-
formed. The grease coming out from the lubrication
points has to be collected and discarded according
to environmental legislation.
73
7-41
SECTION 7
FILLING OF THE TANK PUMP

The filling of the tank pump is performed through fit-
tings (1) or (2).
74
MANUAL FILLING PUMP

ASSEMBLY
Remove both cartridge caps (1).
Prior to the assembly of the manual filling pump, pay
attention to insert also the gasket (2).
By means of the plunger, fill grease into the tank
pump through the fitting. Repeat this operation until
grease reaches the maximum level. If an overfilling
takes place, grease comes out from the overflow
opening.
After the filling of the tank pump, replace the cap (5)
and the cover (4).
75
REUSE OF THE MANUAL PUMP

It is possible to fill the manual pump by taking the
grease from a barrel. Pay attention not to twist the
lip of the seal pack (6).
76
7-42
ATTACHMENTS
MOTORIZED FILLING PUMP

Fill grease into the tank pump through the fitting (1)
or (2) and by means of the filling hose. Repeat this
operation until grease reaches the maximum level. If
an overfilling takes place, grease comes out from
the overflow opening.
77
After the filling of the tank pump, replace the cap (5)
and the cover (4).
78
79
7-43
SECTION 7
NOTES:
7-44
SECTION 8
DATA AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS - OPERATING WEIGHTS
WX 145 MODELS
OUTFIT WITH PLACING BOOM
mm (in)
Dipper A B C D E F G H I L M N O P Q R S T
2000 2550 430 1230 1850 370 2843 2520 3050 3910 345 4555 930 2500 1070 8035 8175 1175 1010
(78.73) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (111.92) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (179.33) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (316.34) (321.85) (46.25) (39.76)
2300 2550 430 1230 1850 370 2891 2520 3050 3910 345 4560 930 2500 1070 8040 8180 1175 1010
(90.55) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (113.81) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (179.52) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (316.53) (322.05) (46.25) (39.76)
2600 2550 430 1230 1850 370 2989 2520 3050 3910 345 4540 930 2500 1070 8020 8160 1175 1010
(102.36) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (117.67) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (178.74) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (315.74) (321.26) (46.25) (39.76)
G = tyres maximum width

O = machine maximum width
Rear blade Rear stabilizers Front blade and rear

Dipper (mm) (in)
(kg) (lb) (kg) (lb) stabilizers (kg) (lb)
2000 (78.73) 14295 (31449) 14766 (32485) 15237 (33521)
2300 (90.55) 14345 (31559) 14816 (32595) 15287 (33631)
2600 (102.36) 14395 (31669) 14866 (32705) 15337 (33741)
8-1
SECTION 8
OUTFIT WITH MONOBOOM
mm (in)
2000 2550 430 1230 1850 370 2923 2520 3050 3910 345 4445 930 2500 1070 7925 8065 1175 1010
(78.73) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (115.07) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (179.33) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (312.00) (317.51) (46.25) (39.76)
2300 2550 430 1230 1850 370 3072 2520 3050 3910 345 4488 930 2500 1070 7968 8108 1175 1010
(90.55) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (120.94) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (176.69) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (313.69) (319.21) (46.25) (39.76)
2600 2550 430 1230 1850 370 3201* 2520 3050 3910 345 4490* 930 2500 1070 7970* 8110* 1175 1010
(102.36) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (126.02) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (176.72) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (313.77) (319.29) (46.25) (39.76)
* = front blade, without bucket


Dipper (mm) (in)
2000 (78.73) 13798 (30356) 14269 (31392) 14740 (32428)
2300 (90.55) 13848 (30466) 14319 (31502) 14790 (32538)
2600 (102.36) 13898 (30576) 14369 (31612) 14840 (32648)
8-2
OUTFIT WITH OFF-SET BOOM
mm (in)
2000 2550 430 1230 1850 370 2805 2520 3050 3910 345 4404 930 2500 1070 7884 8024 1175 1010
(78.73) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (110.43) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (173.38) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (310.39) (315.90) (46.25) (39.76)
2300 2550 430 1230 1850 370 2377 2520 3050 3910 345 4484 930 2500 1070 7964 8104 1175 1010
(90.55) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (93.58) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (176.53) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (313.54) (319.05) (46.25) (39.76)
2600 2550 430 1230 1850 370 3340 2520 3050 3910 345 4430 930 2500 1070 7910 8050 1175 1010
(102.36) (100.39) (16.92) (48.42) (72.83) (14.5) (131.49) (99.21) (120.07) (153.93) (13.58) (174.41) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (311.41) (316.92) (46.25) (39.76)


Dipper (mm) (in)
2000 (78.73) 14314 (31491) 14785 (32527) 15256 (33563)
2300 (90.55) 14364 (31601) 14835 (32637) 15306 (33673)
2600 (102.36) 14414 (31711) 14885 (32747) 15356 (33783)
8-3
SECTION 8
WX 165 MODELS
mm (in)
2300 2550 450 1230 2000 320 2886 2520 3040 3900 365 4803 930 2500 1070 8283 8423 1175 1010
(90.55) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (113.62) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (189.09) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (326.10) (331.61) (46.25) (39.76)
2600 2550 450 1230 2000 320 2950 2520 3040 3900 365 4814 930 2500 1070 2894 8434 1175 1010
(102.36) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (116.14) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (189.52) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (113.93) (332.04) (46.25) (39.76)
2900 2550 450 1230 2000 320 3022 2520 3040 3900 365 4795 930 2500 1070 8275 8415 1175 1010
(114.17) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (118.97) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (188.77) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (325.78) (331.29) (46.25) (39.76)

Front blade and

Rear blade Rear stabilizers Front and rear
Dipper (mm) (in) rear stabilizers
(kg) (lb)
2300 (90.55) 16970 (37334) 17480 (38456) 17900 (39380) 18400 (40480)
2600 (102.36) 17010 (37422) 17520 (38544) 17940 (39468) 18440 (40568)
2900 (114.17) 17060 (37532) 17570 (38654) 17990 (39578) 18490 (40678)
8-4
mm (in)
2300 2550 450 1230 2000 320 2858 2520 3040 3900 365 4513 930 2500 1070 7993 8133 1175 1010
(90.55) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (112.51) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (177.67) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (314.68) (320.19) (46.25) (39.76)
2600 2550 450 1230 2000 320 3165 2520 3040 3900 365 4606 930 2500 1070 8086 8226 1175 1010
(102.36) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (124.60) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (181.33) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (317.32) (323.85) (46.25) (39.76)
2900 2550 450 1230 2000 320 3389 2520 3040 3900 365 4537 930 2500 1070 8017 8157 1175 1010
(114.17) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (133.42) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (178.62) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (315.63) (321.14) (46.25) (39.76)

Front blade and

(kg) (lb)
2300 (90.55) 16290 (35838) 16800 (36960) 17220 (37884) 17720 (38984)
2600 (102.36) 16330 (35926) 16840 (37048) 17260 (37972) 17760 (39072)
2900 (114.17) 16380 (36036) 16890 (37158) 17310 (38082) 17810 (39182)
8-5
SECTION 8
10
mm (in)
2300 2550 450 1230 2000 320 2984 2520 3040 3900 365 4580 930 2500 1070 8060 8200 1175 1010
(90.55) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (113.84) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (180.31) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (317.32) (322.83) (46.25) (39.76)
2600 2550 450 1230 2000 320 3197 2520 3040 3900 365 4590 930 2500 1070 8070 8210 1175 1010
(102.36) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (125.86) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (180.70) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (317.71) (323.22) (46.25) (39.76)
2900 2550 450 1230 2000 320 3564 2520 3040 3900 365 4505 930 2500 1070 7985 8125 1175 1010
(114.17) (100.39) (17.71) (48.42) (78.73) (12.59) (140.31) (99.21) (119.68) (153.54) (14.37) (177.36) (36.61) (98.42) (42.12) (314.36) (319.88) (46.25) (39.76)

Front blade and

(kg) (lb)
2300 (90.55) 16650 (36630) 17160 (37752) 17580 (38610) 18080 (39776)
2600 (102.36) 16690 (36718) 17200 (37840) 17620 (38764) 18120 (39864)
2900 (114.17) 16740 (36828) 17250 (37950) 17670 (38874) 18170 (39974)
8-6
WX 185 MODELS
11
12
mm (in)
2000 2650 450 1300 2150 320 2990 2520 3150 3900 365 5112 1010 2500 1040 8772 8802 1200 1060
(78.73) (104.33) (17.71) (51.18) (84.64) (12.59) (117.71) (99.21) (124.01) (153.54) (14.37) (201.25) (39.76) (98.45) (40.94) (345.35) (346.53) (47.24) (41.73)
2400 2650 450 1300 2150 320 3003 2520 3150 3900 365 5087 1010 2500 1040 8747 8777 1200 1060
(94.48) (104.33) (17.71) (51.18) (84.64) (12.59) (118.23) (99.21) (124.01) (153.54) (14.37) (200.27) (39.76) (98.45) (40.94) (344.36) (345.55) (47.24) (41.73)
2800 2650 450 1300 2150 320 3081 2520 3150 3900 365 5076 1010 2500 1040 8736 8766 1200 1060
(110.23) (104.33) (17.71) (51.18) (84.64) (12.59) (212.29) (99.21) (124.01) (153.54) (14.37) (199.84) (39.76) (98.45) (40.94) (343.96) (345.11) (47.24) (41.73)

Front blade and

(kg) (lb)
2000 (78.73) 18680 (41096) 19230 (42306) 19810 (43582) 20270 (44594)
2400 (94.48) 18740 (41228) 19290 (42438) 19880 (43736) 20340 (44748)
2800 (110.23) 18830 (41426) 19390 (42658) 19970 (43934) 20430 (44946)
8-7
SECTION 8
13
14
mm (in)
2000 2650 450 1300 2150 320 2990 2520 3150 3900 365 5010 1010 2540 1040 8670 8700 1200 1060
(78.73) (104.33) (17.71) (51.18) (84.64) (12.59) (117.71) (99.21) (124.01) (153.54) (14.37) (197.24) (39.76) (99.99) (40.94) (341.33) (342.52) (47.24) (41.73)
2400 2650 450 1300 2150 320 2986 2520 3150 3900 365 5005 1010 2540 1040 8665 8695 1200 1060
(94.48) (104.33) (17.71) (51.18) (84.64) (12.59) (117.55) (99.21) (124.01) (153.54) (14.37) (197.04) (39.76) (99.99) (40.94) (341.14) (342.32) (47.24) (41.73)
2800 2650 450 1300 2150 320 3080 2520 3150 3900 365 5027 1010 2540 1040 8687 8717 1200 1060
(113.38) (104.33) (17.71) (51.18) (84.64) (12.59) (121.25) (99.21) (124.01) (153.54) (14.37) (197.91) (39.76) (99.99) (40.94) (342.00) (343.18) (47.24) (41.73)

Front blade and

(kg) (lb)
2000 (78.73) 17866 (39305) 18416 (40515) 18996 (41791) 19456 (42803)
2400 (94.48) 17926 (39437) 18476 (40647) 19066 (41945) 19526 (42957)
2800 (110.23) 18016 (39635) 18576 (40867) 19156 (42143) 19616 (43155)
8-8
DIGGING PERFORMANCE
WX 145 MODELS
15
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2300 90.55 2600 102.36

A Maximum digging height mm in 9200 362.20 9300 366.14 9500 374.01
B Maximum loading height mm in 6800 267.70 6900 271.65 7200 283.46
C Maximum digging depth mm in 4700 185.03 5000 196.84 5300 208.66
D Maximum vertical wall digging depth mm in 2800 110.24 2900 114.17 3000 118.11
Maximum digging depth of cut for level mm in 4600 181.10 4900 192.91 5200 204.72
E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
F Maximum digging reach mm in 8300 326.77 8500 334.64 8800 346.46
G Maximum digging reach at ground mm in 8100 318.90 8300 326.77 8600 338.58
H Minimum swing radius mm in 2700 106.30 2600 102.36 2700 106.30
Maximum loading height (dipper mm in 3300 129.92 3000 118.11 2700 106.30
K
retracted)
F1 Bucket tensile force (370 bar (5366 psi)) kN lbf 95.2 21402.9 95.2 21402.9 95.2 21402.9
F2 Dipper tensile force (370 bar (5366 psi)) kN lbf 68.2 15332.7 62.4 14028.7 57.4 12904.6
8-9
SECTION 8
16
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2300 90.55 2600 102.36

E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K
retracted)
8-10
17
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2300 90.55 2600 102.36

C' Maximum off-set boom depth mm in 1400 55.11 1700 66.92 2000 78.73
E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K
retracted)
Or Off-set right side mm in 2600 102.36 2600 102.36 2600 102.36
Ol Off-set left side mm in 2400 94.49 2400 94.49 2400 94.49
Xr Off-set angle right side ° 42 42 42
Xl Off-set angle left side ° 43 43 43
8-11
SECTION 8
OUTFIT WITH CLAMSHELL BUCKET

Placing boom
18
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2300 90.55 2600 102.36

A Maximum loading height mm in 5600 220.47 5700 224.41 6000 236.22
C Maximum depth mm in 5900 232.28 6200 244.09 6500 255.90
F Maximum outreach mm in 7100 279.53 7300 287.40 7600 299.21
H Front swing radius mm in 2300 90.55 2200 86.61 2300 90.55
K Minimum loading height mm in 2100 82.68 1800 70.87 1500 59.05
8-12
Monoboom
19
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2300 90.55 2600 102.36

8-13
SECTION 8
WX 165 MODELS
20
Dipper mm in 2300 90.55 2600 102.36 2900 114.17

E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K
retracted)
8-14
21
Dipper mm in 2300 90.55 2600 102.36 2900 114.17

E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K
retracted)
8-15
SECTION 8
22
Dipper mm in 2300 90.55 2600 102.36 2900 114.17

C' Maximum off-set boom depth mm in 2300 90.55 2600 102.36 2800 110.24
E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K Maximum loading height (dipper retracted) mm in 2700 106.30 2400 94.49 2100 82.68
Or Off-set right side mm in 3000 118.11 3000 118.11 3000 118.11
Ol Off-set left side mm in 2800 110.24 2800 110.24 2800 110.24
Xr Off-set angle right side ° 48 48 48
Xl Off-set angle left side ° 48 48 48
8-16

Placing boom
23
Dipper mm in 2300 90.55 2600 102.36 2900 114.17

8-17
SECTION 8
Monoboom
24
Dipper mm in 2300 90.55 2600 102.36 2900 114.17

8-18
WX 185 MODELS
25
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2400 94.49 2800 110.24

E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K
retracted)
F2 Dipper tensile force (370 bar (5366 psi)) kN lbf 108.7 24437.9 97 21807.5 87.6 19694.2
8-19
SECTION 8
26
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2400 94.49 2800 110.24

E
bottom (L = 2438 mm (95.98 in))
K
retracted)
F2 Dipper tensile force (370 bar (5366 psi)) kN lbf 108.7 24437.9 97 21807.5 87.6 19694.2
8-20

Placing boom
27
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2400 94.49 2800 110.24

8-21
SECTION 8
Monoboom
28
Dipper mm in 2000 78.74 2400 94.49 2800 110.24

8-22
LIFTING CAPACITIES
29
NOTE: the chart represents a WX 145 excavator

with placing boom outfit.
8-23
SECTION 8
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
PUMPS
The hydraulic system is controlled by 3 pumps, 2 main ones and an independent one for slewing. The engine
and the pumps are monitored by the “Power Limit Control” system.
Up to 7 power levels can be selected for digging and lifting, included the levelling mode for fine works. The
power level can be increased automatically with “Drive” mode.
Main pumps ........................................................................... No. 3 at variable displacement, at axial pistons.
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

l/min 2 x 125 + 80 2 x 145 + 80 2 x 175 + 100
Maximum displacement
(gal/min) (2 x 32.90 + 21.10) (2 x 38.20 + 21.10) (2 x 46.10 + 26.30)
bar 340 / 345
Attachment / travel
(psi) (4929 / 5002)
bar 370
Power Boost
(psi) (5364)
bar 390
Slewing pump
(psi) (5654)
bar 45
Pilot pump
(psi) (652)
CYLINDERS (ø for stroke)
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Monoboom lifting cylinder mm in 105 x 1041 4.13 x 40.98 115 x 1065 4.53 x 41.93 125 x 1019 4.92 x 40.12
Placing boom cylinder mm in 105 x 1023 4.13 x 40.27 115 x 1012 4.53 x 39.84 125 x 981 4.92 x 38.62
Dipper cylinder mm in 105 x 1176 4.13 x 46.30 120 x 1085 4.72 x 42.72 130 x 1290 5.12 x 50.79
Bucket cylinder mm in 100 x 870 3.94 x 34.25 105 x 1025 4.13 x 40.35 110 x 1066 4.33 x 41.97
Placing boom cylinder mm in 150 x 762 5.90 x 30.00 160 x 759 6.30 x 29.88 170 x 734 6.69 x 28.90
SLEWING
The slewing function is actuated by a closed hydraulic circuit, driving a mechanical gearbox with built-in
automatic static brake, with 3 possibilities of calibration.
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Slewing speed rpm 9.5
Slewing moment (SAE J1371) kNm (lbs·ft) 38 (27485) 42 (30378) 53 (38334)
TRAVEL
Transmission with clutch pack.
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Maximum travel speed at job site km/h (mph) 8 (4.97)
Maximum travel speed on the road km/h (mph) 20 (12.43)
High speed on road (optional) km/h (mph) 30 (18.64)
Maximum drawbar pull (field) kN (lbf) 91 (20457.6) 115 (25853)
8-24
TYRES
Pressure V (max)
Tyre Manufacturer Type
(bar) (psi) [km/h] (mph)
7.50 30
Mitas 10.00-20 PR16 NB38
(109) (18.64)
7.25 30
Mitas 11.00-20 PR16 NB38
(105) (18.64)
7.50 30
Bridgestone 10.00-20 PR16 FGF
(109) (18.64)
7.00 30
Twin Bridgestone 11.00-20 PR16 FGF
(102) (18.64)
6.5 30
Bridgestone 10.00-20 PR14 FG
(94) (18.64)
8.0 30
Bandenmarkt Excavator PR18 315/80 R 22.5
(116) (18.64)
8.5 30
Bandenmarkt Grader PR18 315/80 R 22.5
(123) (18.64)
8.00 30
Michelin 18 R 19.5 XF
(116) (18.64)
Single
6.00 30
Mitas 600/40 - 22.5 I-331
(87) (18.64)
BRAKES
SERVICE BRAKE
Wet, actives on all wheels.
PARKING BRAKE
Mechanical brake at springs actuation, active on
transmission.
STEERING
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Turning circle diameter (with twin tyres 10.00.20) m (ft) 16 (52.49) 16.2 (53.14)
POWER STEERING
WX 145 - WX 165 WX 185

Model OSPQ70/175 LS OSPQ80/200 LS
Displacement 3 3 70 / 175 (4.27 / 10.68) 80 / 200 (4.88 / 12.20)
cm /rev (in /rev)
Maximum steering pressure bar (psi) 190 / 195 (2755 / 2827)
Shock valve adjusting bar (psi) 240 / 260 (3480 / 3769)
8-25
SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Service voltage ........................................................................................................................................... 24 V
Batteries................................................................................................................................................ 2 x 12 V
Batteries rating........................................................................................................................................ 100 Ah
Alternator .................................................................................................................................................... 70 A
Starter motor ......................................................................................................................... 4 kW (2963 ft·lb/s)
BUCKETS
BUCKETS - WX 145
SAE capacity (m3) (ft3) Heaped capacity (m3) (ft3) Width (mm) (in) Weight (kg) (lb)
0.22 (7.76) 0.16 (5.65) 450 (17.71) 300 (640)
0.32 (11.30) 0.28 (9.88) 600 (23.62) 330 (726)
0.43 (15.18) 0.36 (12.71) 750 (29.52) 370 (814)
0.54 (19.06) 0.46 (16.24) 900 (35.43) 410 (902)
0.62 (21.89) 0.52 (18.36) 1000 (39.37) 440 (968)
0.70 (24.72) 0.58 (20.48) 1100 (43.30) 470 (1034)
0.77 (27.19) 0.65 (22.95) 1200 (47.24) 490 (1078)
BUCKETS - WX 165
0.27 (9.53) 0.25 (8.82) 500 (19.68) 350 (770)
0.39 (13.77) 0.35 (12.36) 600 (23.62) 385 (847)
0.57 (20.12) 0.51 (18.01) 800 (31.49) 455 (1001)
0.66 (23.30) 0.60 (21.18) 900 (35.43) 495 (1089)
0.75 (26.48) 0.65 (22.95) 1000 (39.37) 525 (1155)
0.85 (30.01) 0.75 (26.48) 1100 (43.30) 550 (1210)
0.95 (33.54) 0.83 (29.31) 1200 (47.24) 590 (1298)
BUCKETS - WX 185
0.27 (9.53) 0.25 (8.82) 500 (19.68) 350 (770)
0.38 (13.41) 0.34 (12) 600 (23.62) 380 (847)
0.50 (17.65) 0.43 (15.18) 750 (29.52) 440 (968)
0.66 (23.30) 0.51 (18.01) 900 (35.43) 495 (1089)
0.75 (26.48) 0.64 (22.60) 1000 (39.37) 525 (1155)
0.85 (30.01) 0.74 (26.13) 1100 (43.30) 550 (1210)
0.95 (33.54) 0.81 (28.60) 1200 (47.24) 590 (1298)
NOTE: for the other available bucket models
address to Dealer.
8-26
TIGHTENING TORQUES
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Wheels nuts M22 Nm (lbf·ft) 450 (331.90)
Slewing bearing M16 Nm (lbf·ft) 270 (199.14) 280 (206.52)
M12 Nm (lbf·ft) 104 (76.71) 60 (44.25)
Engine supports M16 Nm (lbf·ft) 270 (199.14) 105 (77.44)
M20 Nm (lbf·ft) 490 (361.40) 250 (184.39)
Slewing gearbox M16 Nm (lbf·ft) 270(199.14) 250 (184.39)
Counterweight M30 Nm (lbf·ft) 2250 (1659.51)
Axles M20 Nm (lbf·ft) 520 (383.53)
CENTRALIZED LUBRICATION PUMP (OPTIONAL)

Service temperature..................................................................................... - 40 °C at 70 °C (-40 °F at 158 °F)
Allowable service pressure ................................................................................................... 350 bar (5074 psi)
Flow rate: ......................................................................................................................................... 2 l (0.5 gal)
Service voltage ........................................................................................................................................... 24 V
Maximum current consumption..................................................................................................................... 3 A
Revolutions ........................................................................................................................................ at 17 rpm
Delivery ................................................................................................................... 2.8 cm3/min. (0.17 in3/min.)
Set working time ........................................................................................................................................6 min
Down-time set ............................................................................................................................................... 3 h
FUEL SYSTEM
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

litres 210 270 / 250 360 / 330
System capacity / tank
(gal) (55.30) (71.10 / 65.80) (94.80 / 86.90)
8-27
SECTION 8
ENGINE
WX 145 WX 165 WX 185

Type F4GE9484E*J600 F4GE9684F*J600 F4GE9684E*J601
Operation 4-stroke diesel
Cylinders number 4 6
Cylinders arrangement in V-line
Valves per cylinders 2
Boring mm (in) 104 (4.09)
Stroke mm (in) 132 (5.20)
Displacement dm3 (dm3) 4.5 (158.92) 6.7 (236.61)
Power kW (ft·lb/s) 90 (66667) 105 (77778) 118 (87407)
515 at 1400 612 at 1400 653 at 1400
Maximum torque Nm - rpm (lbf·ft)
(379.84) (451.39) (481.63)
Rated rpm rpm 2025
Maximum rpm rpm 2161
Minimum rpm rpm 800
Pump rotary
Alternator Bosch KCB1
- voltage V 24
- current A 70
Starter motor Bosch
- power kW (ft·lb/s) 4 (2963)
- voltage V 24
Weight kg (lb) 480 (1056) 482 (1060)
8-28
SECTION 9
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A C
Air conditioning ............................. 2-43, 4-45, 5-21 Code .................................................................. 3-4
Air filter - Change ............................................. 4-55 Components identification plates .....................1-32
Air filter - Cleaning ...........................................4-26 Compressor belt - Change ...............................4-61
Air filter safety element change ........................4-55 Condenser - Cleaning .............................4-61, 4-63
Auto Idle ...........................................................3-27 Controls and instruments ................................... 2-1
Auxiliary socket ................................................ 2-38 Coolant - Level ................................................. 4-17
Axle floating locking cylinders - Air bleeding ....4-79 Cooling system ................................................ 5-22
Axles ................................................................ 5-17 Cooling system liquid - Change ....................... 4-68
Axles floating pins - Greasing .......................... 4-37 Corrosion protection for pins and joints ........... 3-66
Craning hook .................................................... 7-30
B Creep speed .................................................... 3-21
Basic position ................................................... 3-14 Cylinders .......................................................... 8-24
Batteries - Charge check ................................. 4-34
Batteries - Level ...............................................4-34 D
Batteries - Replacement ..................................4-87 Decals .............................................................. 1-35
Battery .............................................................. 3-51 Digging performance .......................................... 8-9
Biodegradable hydraulic oil ................................4-4 Dimensions ........................................................ 8-1
Blade ................................................................ 3-43 Documents storage box ................................... 2-37
Blade and stabilizers joints ..............................4-46 Door open ........................................................ 2-32
Blade protection ...............................................7-38 Drive belt - Change .......................................... 4-73
Blower .....................................................4-62, 5-23 Drive belts - Check ........................................... 4-49
Blower cleaning ................................................ 4-63 Dust discharge valve - Cleaning ......................4-26
Brakes system ...................................................5-7
Bucket ........................................... 3-46, 3-64, 8-26 E
Bucket disassembly and assembly ..................3-66 Electrical system .............................................. 8-26
Buckets teeth - Change ..........................3-67, 4-88 Emergency exit ................................................ 2-35
Bulbs - Replacement ........................................4-83 Engine .......................................................5-3, 8-28
Buzzer ................................................................2-7 Engine brackets - Screws tightening check .....4-54
Engine oil .........................................................4-13
C Engine oil - Change .........................................4-50
Cab ..................................................................2-32 Engine oil - Level ............................................. 4-13
Cab air filter - Change ...................................... 4-53 Engine oil draining ........................................... 4-50
Cab air filter - Cleaning .................................... 4-25 Engine oil filter - Change ..................................4-39
Cab lighting ...................................................... 2-38 Engine revolutions sensor - Cleaning .............. 4-48
Cab protections ................................................ 7-38 Engine shut off ................................................. 3-13
Cab windows .................................................... 2-34 Evaporator - Cleaning ......................................4-63
Cardan shaft .................................................... 4-46
Cardan shaft greasing ...................................... 4-46 F
CE-Mark ...........................................................1-33 Fine levelling .................................................... 3-40
Centralized lubrication .....................................7-39 Fire extinguisher .............................................. 2-37
Clamshell assembly ......................................... 7-20 First-aid kit ....................................................... 2-37
Clamshell bucket ........................... 3-46, 5-16, 7-20 Floating axle .....................................................3-24
Clamshell bucket disassembly ......................... 7-22 Floating axle blocking ......................................5-12
Clamshell wear ................................................ 4-89
9-1
SECTION 9
F L
Floating axle locking cylinders contact Levelling ........................................................... 3-39
faces - Lubrication ............................................ 4-47 Lifting capacities .............................................. 8-23
FOPS ............................................................... 7-38 Lights ............................................................... 4-12
Foreword ............................................................ 1-1 Lubricants ........................................................ 7-40
Front working floodlamps ................................. 2-36 Lubrication pump ............................................. 8-27
Fuel .................................................................... 4-2
Fuel - Level ...................................................... 4-15
M
Fuel filter/s - Change ........................................ 4-40
Machine - Cleaning .......................................... 4-71
Fuel filter/s - Water draining ............................. 4-32
Machine general inspection ............................. 4-10
Fuel level .......................................................... 4-15
Machine main components .............................. 1-28
Fuel system ...................................................... 8-27
Machine recovery and towing .......................... 3-55
Fuel system water draining .............................. 4-29
Main air filter element - Change ....................... 4-55
Fuel tank - Cleaning ......................................... 4-69
Main filter element - Change ............................ 4-55
Fuel tank - Level .............................................. 4-15
Main filter element - Cleaning .......................... 4-27
Fuel transfer pump ........................................... 7-36
Maintenance intervals ........................................ 4-6
Fuses - Chart ................................................... 4-81
Maintenance intervals - Chart ............................ 4-7
Fuses - Replacement ....................................... 4-80
Maintenance intervals chart ............................... 4-7
Multi-cooler - Cleaning ..................................... 4-28
G Multi-function display ................................2-11, 5-2
Gearbox - Gears change ................................. 3-21
Greasing, off-set boom .................................... 4-21
N
Noise .................................................................. 1-4
H
Hammer ....................................................5-15, 7-1
O
Hand signals .................................................... 1-43
Off-set boom - Greasing .................................. 4-21
Heat exchanger - Cleaning .....................4-62, 4-63
Operating the machine ....................................... 3-1
Heating ....................................................2-42, 5-21
Operating the machine with cold weather ........ 3-51
Heating system ................................................ 5-21
Operating weights .............................................. 8-1
Hydraulic damping ........................................... 3-41
Operator’s seat ................................................ 2-47
Hydraulic oil ....................................................... 4-3
Overload indicator ............................................ 7-31
Hydraulic oil - Change ...................................... 4-65
Hydraulic oil - Level .......................................... 4-13
Hydraulic oil return filter - Change ................... 4-41 P
Hydraulic oil tank - Cleaning ............................ 4-66 Parking brake ......................... 2-46, 4-11, 5-7, 8-25
Hydraulic quick coupler .................................... 7-15 Parking the machine .......................................... 3-3
Hydraulic system .......................................5-8, 8-24 Pilot control filter - Change ............................... 4-61
Hydraulic system - Pressure release ............... 4-74 Placing boom attachment ................................ 3-60
Hydraulic system air bleeding .......................... 4-67 Pneumatic seat ................................................ 2-47
Hydraulic system bleeding valve - Change ...... 4-56 Position of decals ............................................. 1-36
Power Boost ..................................................... 3-37
Power levels ..................................................... 3-28
I
Power steering ................................................. 8-25
Ignition key ....................................................... 2-29
Q
J
Quick coupler - Greasing ................................. 4-38
Jump-starting ................................................... 3-11
9-2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
R T
Radio ................................................................ 2-31 Tightening torques - Chart ...............................8-27
Rear working floodlamps ........................2-36, 7-34 Time ................................................................. 2-23
Refrigerating agent .......................................... 2-44 Transport bracket for clamshell ........................7-38
Rigid axle and gearbox - Oil change ................ 4-58 Travel ................................... 3-14, 3-18, 5-10, 8-24
Rigid axle and gearbox - Oil level ...........4-44, 4-58 Travel with load applied to craning hook .......... 3-23
Rotary cutter .................................................... 7-26 Troubleshooting ................................................. 5-1
Running-in period ...............................................3-2 Trunnion pins greasing .................................... 4-47
Tyres ................................................................8-25
S Tyres - Change ................................................ 4-76
Safety element - Change ................................. 4-55 Tyres - Nuts tightening .....................................4-24
Safety instructions ..............................................1-2 Tyres - Pressure .............................................. 4-22
Screen washer liquid - Level ............................ 4-19
Seat belt ...........................................................2-52 U
Secure the machine ......................................... 3-56 Upper structure holding brake .......................... 4-12
Service brake ......................... 2-45, 4-11, 5-7, 8-25 Upper structure slew ..................... 3-31, 5-11, 8-24
Service brake - Air bleeding ............................. 4-78
Service brake - Plates check ...........................4-60 V
Shears ................................................................7-8 Vibrations ........................................................... 1-5
Slewing bearing - Cups greasing .....................4-37
Slewing bearing - Screws tightening check .....4-51
W
Slewing bearing - Teeth greasing .................... 4-52
Warm-up ............................................................ 1-7
Slewing gearbox - Oil change .......................... 4-70
Warning triangle ...............................................2-37
Slewing gearbox - Oil level ..............................4-33
Washing the machine ......................................4-72
Slewing power ..................................................3-35
Waste disposal ................................................. 1-27
Slinging points ..................................................1-39
Windscreen blades change .............................. 4-53
Stabilization of the machine ............................. 3-43
Windscreen wiper .....................................2-5, 4-53
Stabilizers ...............................................3-43, 5-13
Work ........................................................3-26, 3-48
Starting the engines ......................................... 3-12
Working attachment greasing .......................... 4-20
Start-up .......................................................3-4, 3-9
Working attachment with off-set boom ............. 3-63
Start-up - Immobilizer .........................................3-4
Working equipment arm ................................... 3-59
Steering ............................................................8-25
Working hours .................................................... 4-6
Steering axle - Oil change ................................ 4-56
Steering axle - Oil level .................................... 4-42
Steering column ...............................................2-39
Steering system .................................................5-6
Steering trunnion pins - Greasing .................... 4-46
Storage ..............................................................6-1
Sunblind ...........................................................2-37
Supplies - Chart .................................................4-1
Supplies summarizing chart ...............................4-1
9-3
SECTION 9
9-4
CNH ITALIA S.p.A. - Viale delle Nazioni, 55 - 41100 MODENA - Italy
TECHNICAL SUPPORT - Technical Information
Print No. 87590052 - 1st Issue - 06 - 2007
COPYRIGHT BY CNH ITALIA S.p.A.

All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this
publication may be reproduced.
CASE policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification or equipment at
any time without notices is reserved.
All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate
only and the illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about
any particular product, please consult your CASE Dealer.

WX145, WX165, WX185: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WX145, WX165, WX185: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WX145, WX165, WX185: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WX145, WX165, WX185

1 - INTRODUCTION, SAFETY, PLATES AND DECALS

2 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS

3 - OPERATING THE MACHINE

4 - SUPPLIES AND SERVICE CHART

8 - DATA AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

In the event of queries or suggestions relevant to WARRANTY

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

S WARNING S Always keep this manual in the storage compart-

The non compliance with the warning preceded by

Your safety and that of people around you depends

The manufacturer/supplier cannot be held responsi-

Sound pressure level in the operator’s seat

LEVEL OF VIBRATIONS TRANSMITTED

BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE

Make sure that no loose object or tool is left on the

When mounting or dismounting from the machine

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

OPERATING THE MACHINE

ADJUST THE SEAT

DON’T CARRY RIDERS ON THE MACHINE

AVOID INJURY FROM REVERSE TRAVEL AND

SELECTING THE TRAVEL DIRECTION

TRAVELLING OVER LONG DISTANCES

DO NOT TOW ANOTHER VEHICLE

TRAVELLING ON PUBLIC ROADS

On machines equipped with clamshell.

TRAVELLING UPHILL AND DOWNHILL

JOB SITE OPERATION

DIG WITH CAUTION

AVOID ELECTRIC LINES

PARKING THE MACHINE

Disconnect the pilot control.

LOADING THE MACHINE ON A TRAILER

WITHOUT FRONT ATTACHMENT

Secure the machine from accidental movements.

UNLOADING THE MACHINE FROM A

WITH FRONT ATTACHMENT INSTALLED

WITHOUT FRONT ATTACHMENT

MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

PRACTICE SAFE MAINTENANCE

PROTECT AGAINST NOISE

AVOID HIGH PRESSURE FLUIDS

Escaping oil pollutes the environment.

PRECAUTIONS FOR WASTE DISPOSAL

- brakes system oil;

PLACING BOOM ATTACHMENT

1. Bucket 15. Fuel tank

1. Bucket 15. Counterweight

COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION PLATES

NOTE: when you clean the decals, use only a cloth,

NOISE LEVEL DECAL

PLACING BOOM ATTACHMENT

Frontal stay dangerous

Danger electric current

Danger for moving parts

Maintenance in progress tag

START THE ENGINE MOVE AWAY FROM ME